Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
0625 PHYSICS
These mark schemes are published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements
of the examination. They show the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks.
They do not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before
marking began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will
be recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2006 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
TARGET
GRADE MARK
1 (a) larger area F B1
smaller pressure F B1
3 (a) P and Q F B1
(b) R and S F B1
(ii) 57.5/25 C C1
2.3 C A1
g/cm3 C B1
6
(c) potential F B1
(d) chemical C B1
7
(ii) red C B1
(iii) violet C B1
(allow B1,B0 if red and violet both written but interchanged) 6
(b) repulsive F B1
(ii) disappears F B1
5
9 (a) strontium-90 F M1
decays most slowly OR longest half-life F A1
(b) (i) points correctly plotted ± ½ small square -1 each error or omission 3F B3
(ii) filament F B1
(iv) line along axis (by eye) OR conical beam along axis F B1
(b) 75/2.5 C C1
30 (m/s) C A1
(c) accelerated F B1
12 L1 joined to R3 or R1 F B1
L2 joined to R4 F B1
L4 joined to R1 F B1
3
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 (a) For a special parade, the guest of honour is to sit on a chair whilst the parade passes
by. Unfortunately the ground beneath the chair is soft, so the parade organisers put the
chair on a large flat board, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
chair
board
soft
ground
Fig. 1.1
Explain why the board prevents the chair from sinking into the ground.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) At the parade, some air-filled balloons are used as decorations, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State what happens to the balloons when the Sun makes them hotter.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
3 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) A pump is used to pump up the balloons in (b). A valve in the pump becomes blocked,
as shown in Fig. 1.3.
air
blocked piston
valve
Fig. 1.3
(i) The piston of the pump is pushed in. State what happens to the pressure of the air
trapped in the pump.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of molecules, explain your answer to (c)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
4 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 is a full-size diagram of a rectangular block.
C
B
Fig. 2.1
(a) Use your rule to measure the lengths of the three sides AB, BC and CD. Write your
values below, in cm, to 2 significant figures.
length of AB = ......................... cm
length of BC = ......................... cm
(b) Write down the equation you would use to calculate the volume of the block. Do not
attempt a calculation.
[1]
(c) If you used your values from (a), what would be the unit for the volume of the block?
5 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1(a) shows a measuring cylinder, containing some water, on a balance.
Fig. 3.1(b) shows the same arrangement with a stone added to the water.
measuring
cylinder reading Q
reading P
water
stone
balance
reading R reading S
(a) (b)
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the volume of the stone?
(b) Which two readings should be subtracted to give the mass of the stone?
[1]
(ii) Calculate the density of the stone.
6 For
Examiner's
Use
4 A piece of fruit is falling from a tree.
Fig. 4.1
(a) The list below contains the names of some different forms of energy.
Put a tick in the box alongside four that are possessed by the falling fruit.
chemical
electrical
gravitational (PE)
internal (thermal)
kinetic (KE)
light
sound
strain [4]
.................................................................... [1]
.................................................................... [1]
(d) Which form of energy is stored in the body of a person as a result of eating the fruit?
.................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/M/J/06
PMT
7 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State two changes that usually happen to the molecules of a solid when the solid is
heated.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State one example where such expansion is a nuisance, and has to be allowed for.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 6.1
(b) Describe how, using a stopwatch, the frequency of the waves could be found.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of blue light shining onto a glass prism.
screen
air air
no
rm
al
of
ray ht
lig
blue
Fig. 7.1
With the aid of a straight edge, draw a possible path of the ray through the prism and
into the air until it reaches the screen. [3]
(b) When a ray of white light passes through the prism, it spreads into a spectrum of
colours that can be seen on the screen.
(i) What is the name of this spreading effect? Tick one box.
convergence
diffraction
dispersion
reflection [1]
9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) State what is meant by the north pole of a magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The north poles of two magnets are brought close together.
What sort of force, if any, is there between the poles? Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows the north pole of a magnet close to an iron bar.
magnet
iron
bar
Fig. 8.1
(i) The iron bar is attracted to the north pole because of induced magnetism in the
iron bar.
On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the induced north pole and the induced south pole of the
iron bar. [1]
(ii) State what happens to the induced magnetism in the iron bar when the magnet is
taken away.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
10 For
Examiner's
Use
9 (a) The table below gives the half-lives of three radioactive substances.
substance half-life
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
strontium-90 28 years
Samples of each of the three substances have the same activity today. Which sample
will have the greatest activity in 1 year’s time? Explain your answer.
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In 1986, an explosion at the Chernobyl nuclear power station released radioactive
substances into the air. One of the radioactive substances released was iodine-131.
Some of the iodine-131 found its way into cow’s milk.
The activity of a sample of this contaminated milk was measured each week for 4 weeks.
The results are shown below.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
activity
––––––– 1000 547 294 162 88
counts / s
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) On Fig. 9.1, plot the values given in the table.
1000
800
activity
_______
counts / s
600
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 9.1
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a type of tube in which cathode rays can be produced.
fluorescent
filament anode screen
C D
Fig. 10.1
(i) A p.d. is connected between two terminals in order to cause thermionic emission.
Between which two of the four labelled terminals is the p.d. connected?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) What particles are emitted during thermionic emission? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons [1]
(iv) On Fig. 10.1, draw the path of the cathode rays that are created when all the
electrical connections are correctly made. [1]
(v) State what is seen when the cathode rays strike the fluorescent screen.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
13 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same tube as in Fig. 10.1, with two metal plates alongside the tube.
A high p.d. is connected between the plates.
+V
–V
Fig. 10.2
(c) The tube in Fig. 10.1 and Fig. 10.2 has a vacuum inside it.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
14 For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 illustrates part of the journey of a car.
start end
of oil drops tree pylon
of
town town on road
Fig. 11.1
The car engine is leaking oil. Regularly, every 2.5 s, a drop of oil hits the road.
(a) The car is driven at a steady speed of 10 m/s through the town.
(i) Calculate the distance on the road between one oil drop and the next oil drop.
[3]
(b) At a distance of 1000 m outside the town, the car passes a tree. At a further distance of
1500 m, the car passes a pylon. Between the tree and the pylon the oil drops are all
75 m apart.
Calculate the speed of the car between the tree and the pylon.
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(c) What has happened to the car between the end of the town and the tree?
Calculate the average speed of the car for the whole journey between the beginning of
the town and the pylon.
16 For
Examiner's
Use
12 In the boxes of the left column below are some electrical hazards. In the boxes of the right
column are means of protecting against those hazards.
From each hazard, draw a line to the appropriate protection. One line has been drawn as an
example.
[3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a
department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2007 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate
fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they refer
are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives evidence that
they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not
write down the actual equation but does correct working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of the
ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing
in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for
a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to clarify
the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the unit
is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark scheme.
Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
© UCLES 2007
PMT
TARGET MARK
GRADE
(c) 4 minutes 20 s F B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
(b) greater F B1
the same F B1
(b) molecules breaking free (of surface) NOT turns into a gas F M1
mention of higher energy/faster/mols near surface C A1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
8 (a) 50 F B1
(ii) 12 (Ω) F B1
(ii) C or clear mark positioned below A but not lower than bottom of C B1
the word contact”
allow e.c.f. only if 6 and 0 in (i) are reversed
[Total: 12]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
11 (a) dot to right of S: horiz. line from end/pole, to right (must not curve) F B1
dot to left of N: horiz. line from end/pole, to left (must not curve) F B1
dot by top LH corner: smooth curve from end/pole, above magnet,
to equivalent point at south end F B1
dot below magnet: smooth curve between N and S F M1
curve leaving & entering side of magnet, not ends C A1
[Total: 6]
(b) protons: 11 F B1
neutrons: 13 C B1
electrons: same as his protons F B1
(c) (i) 0 C B1
(ii) -1 C B1
© UCLES 2007
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES. For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions. 1
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 2
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2).
3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
50 10
minutes hand
45 15
seconds hand
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(a) A student uses the clock to time the intervals between trains travelling along the railway
past his school.
On the blank face of Fig. 1.2, show the positions of the two hands of the clock as train 2
passes. Make sure it is clear which hand is which. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.2
(b) Train 3 passes the school 4 minutes and 55 s after the clock was started. For
Examiner’s
On the blank face of Fig. 1.3, show the positions of the hands of the clock as train 3 Use
passes. [2]
60
55 5
50 10
45 15
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.3
[Total: 5]
(b) On the grid of Fig. 2.1, draw a speed/time graph of the cyclist’s ride. [3]
14
12
speed /
m/s 10
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(c) Show that the total distance travelled by the cyclist is 5400 m. For
Examiner’s
Use
[4]
[Total: 11]
3 A piece of stiff cardboard is stuck to a plank of wood by means of two sticky-tape “hinges”. For
This is shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
A plank of
B wood
C
Fig. 3.1
(i) On Fig. 3.1, draw the force in the position where its value will be as small as
possible.
[2]
(ii) Explain why the position you have chosen in (a)(i) results in the smallest force.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Initially, the cardboard is flat on the plank of wood. A box of matches is placed on it. The
cardboard is then slowly raised at the left hand edge, as shown in Fig. 3.2.
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The box of matches is opened, as shown in Fig. 3.3. The procedure in (b) is repeated. For
Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
plank of
wood
Fig. 3.3
(i) Complete the sentence below, using either the words “greater than” or “the same
as” or “less than”.
In Fig. 3.3, the angle through which the cardboard can be lifted before
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
4 In Fig. 4.1, a small bird, a large bird and a squirrel are on the ground under a tree. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
A loud noise scares the two birds. They both fly up to the top of the tree.
(a) (i) Which bird does the most work raising itself to the top of the tree? ................... [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) A squirrel has the same weight as the large bird. It climbs the tree, to the same height
as the birds.
How does the increase in the squirrel’s gravitational potential energy compare with that
of each of the two birds? Answer the question by completing the sentences below.
Compared with that of the small bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
energy is ................................................................. .
Compared with that of the large bird, the increase of the squirrel’s potential
(c) Which creature has the least gravitational potential energy when they are at the top of
the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
What happens to the gravitational potential energy it had at the top of the tree?
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/M/J/07
PMT
closely packed
In the columns alongside the descriptions, put ticks next to those which apply to the
molecules in
(i) a solid,
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
10
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows how the pressure of the gas sealed in a container varies during a period For
of time. Examiner’s
Use
pressure
time
Fig. 6.1
11
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows some gas trapped in a cylinder with a movable piston. For
Examiner’s
Use
cylinder piston
gas
Fig. 6.2
(i) State what must happen to the piston, if anything, in order to keep the pressure of
the gas constant.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 4]
12
7 An electric soldering iron is used to melt solder, for joining wires in an electric circuit. A For
soldering iron is shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
electricity
supply
Fig. 7.1
Solder is a metal which melts easily. The heater coil inside the metal cylinder heats the
copper tip.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The heater coil is switched on. When the tip is put in contact with the solder, some of the
heat is used to melt the solder.
(i) State the process by which the heat is transferred from the copper tip to the solder.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) By which process or processes is the rest of the heat transferred to the surroundings?
Tick the boxes alongside any of the following (you may tick as many as you think
are correct).
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation [2]
13
(c) A short time after switching on the soldering iron, it reaches a steady temperature, even For
though the heater coil is constantly generating heat. Examiner’s
Use
What is the rate at which heat is being lost from the soldering iron? Tick one box.
greater than 40 W
equal to 40 W
[Total: 6]
14
8 A square wooden block is made to rotate 3000 times per minute. A springy metal strip presses For
against the block, as shown in Fig. 8.1. A person nearby observes what is happening. Examiner’s
Use
springy
metal strip
Fig. 8.1
(a) Calculate how many times per second the block rotates.
(c) State whether or not this sound could be heard by the person nearby, and give a reason
for your answer.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
15
2Ω
6V X
10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Use your answer to (a)(iii) to calculate the potential difference across the 10
resistor.
.................. V [1]
16
(b) The circuit in Fig. 9.2 is similar to the circuit in Fig. 9.1, but it uses a resistor AB with a For
sliding contact. Examiner’s
Use
A
sliding
contact
6V X
B
Y
Fig. 9.2
(i) State the potential difference between X and Y when the sliding contact is at
(ii) The sliding contact of the resistor AB is moved so that the potential difference
between X and Y is 5 V.
On Fig. 9.2, mark with the letter C the position of the sliding contact. [1]
[Total: 12]
17
10 Your teacher gives you a length of wire, a sensitive millivoltmeter and a powerful magnet. You For
are asked to demonstrate the induction of an e.m.f. in the wire. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) How would you know that an e.m.f. has been induced?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a bar magnet on a board in a region where the magnetic field of the For
surroundings is so weak it can be ignored. The letters N and S show the positions of the Examiner’s
north and south poles of the magnet. Also on the diagram are marked four dots. Use
N S
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw four magnetic field lines, one passing through each of the
four dots. The lines you draw should begin and end either on the magnet or at the edge
of the board. [5]
(b) On one of your lines, put an arrow to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
[Total: 6]
19
24Na 24 Mg + yx
11 12
[Total: 8]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/07
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2008 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate’s answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in Questions 1, 3 and 12.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
© UCLES 2008
PMT
(ii) Centre of mass at centre of rod anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘i’
and the and a line vertically above the left hand ‘1’ in ‘Fig. 1.1’, anywhere across
diameter including the surface but NOT outside the surface [B1]
(b) Centre of mass clearly to left of centre, inside the rod [M1]
anywhere between a line vertically above the ‘t’ in ‘to’ and a line vertically above the ‘t’
in the first ‘the’ AND on axis (by eye) [A1]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) (i) suitable scale, probably 5 small squares = 10 s, no awkward ratios [B1]
[Total: 10]
anticlockwise: F1 [B1]
F2 [B1]
(b) c [M1]
clockwise moment (accept moment on RH side) was too big [A1]
reduce moment by reducing distance [A1]
note: moment must be mentioned in both of the last 2 marks; accept turning effect,
torque and leverage as alternatives to moment
(c) any value bigger than 29 g and less than 30 g, but NOT 29 g or 30 g [B1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
[Total: 4]
[Total: 6]
(a) straight ray through centre of lens (±1 mm on axis by eye) (ignore any arrows) [B1]
(ii) (condone image not labelled if it is clear where it is; condone image labelled as
‘object’ if image line clearly drawn)
image located at his intersection, even if intersection of incorrect rays [C1]
image drawn between axis and his intersection, and not beyond either [A1]
(c) clear indication of screen at candidate’s image, using vertical line [B1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
7 (a) gas )
solid ) any 1 correct [B1]
liquid ) remaining 2 both correct [B1]
i.e. gas, solid, liquid: 2 marks gas, liquid, solid: 1 mark liquid, solid, gas: 1 mark
liquid, gas, solid: 0 marks solid, liquid, gas: 0 marks solid, gas, liquid: 1 mark
(ii) idea that molecules/particles gain energy OR move faster (condone ‘vibrating’) [B1]
idea of molecules/particles becoming gaseous/breaking free [B1]
(iii) boiling, at one temperature only AND evaporation at any temperature [B1]
boiling throughout liquid AND evaporation at surface only [B1]
(ii) 660 (°C) allow 659 (°C) NOT –660 (°C) [B1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) (i) 1 ice point OR freezing point of water OR melting point of ice NOT just ‘freezing
point’ [B1]
2 ice OR freezing water [B1]
pure or melting or ice-water mix [B1]
3 0 (°C) OR 273 K OR 273 °K [B1]
(b) thermal capacity OR heat capacity, allow specific heat capacity [B1]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
(b) D A C B all 4 in correct order (allow B1 for any 2 in correct place) [B2]
(c) (note: mark 1 and 2 together) (1 mark max from any one line below)
too great a current might flow )
fuse might not melt NOT fuse won’t work ) any 2 [B1,B1]
fuse won’t protect OR appliance might be damaged )
wiring might overheat/melt or equivalent )
fire might be caused )
NOT circuit broken, NOT short circuit, NOT electric shock
[Total: 5]
(b) voltmeter correctly shown between X and Y (or equivalent), must be correct symbol [B1]
[Total: 11]
(ii) idea of straightening out ABC OR rotate ABC (on its axis)
OR connect G across AB or CB [B1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
© UCLES 2008
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (SLM/CGW) T41975/6
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
PMT
Fig. 1.1
(ii) On Fig. 1.1, show the position of the centre of mass of the rod using the letter C.
[1]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows another rod, of the same length as the previous one, but this rod is thicker
at one end.
Fig. 1.2
Use your judgement to mark with the letter M approximately where the centre of mass
of this rod will be.
[2]
[Total: 4]
1375 m
Fig. 2.1
The statements below describe the motion of the motorcycle from point A to point B.
1. The motorcycle accelerates uniformly from rest at point A, increasing its speed to
25 m/s in 10 s.
2. It then travels at a constant speed of 25 m/s for 40 s.
3. It then decelerates uniformly to rest at point B, 70 s after leaving point A.
35
30
speed
m/s 25
20
15
10
0
0
time/s
Fig. 2.2
(a) For the motorcycle moving from point A to point B, draw on Fig. 2.2,
Calculate the average speed of the motorcycle between A and B. Give your answer to
the nearest m/s.
3 A beam is pivoted at its centre. Three forces, F1, F2 and F3, act on the beam as shown in For
Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
b c
a
F1 F2 F3
Fig. 3.1
(b) When the beam is released, the right-hand side of the beam starts to go down.
Which of the three distances, a, b or c, should be decreased in order to balance the
beam? Explain your answer.
Explanation
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 3.2 represents a simple beam-balance with the pivot accurately at its centre.
?
Fig. 3.2
The person using the beam-balance puts the object to be weighed in the left-hand pan.
He has a selection of standard masses to put in the right-hand pan, but he finds he
cannot exactly balance the beam.
4 For
(a) An electrician climbs up to the platform Examiner’s
of a special tower, in order to reach a Use
high-level spotlight, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
..................................................... [1]
..................................................... [1]
Why? .......................................................
.................................................................
.................................................................
............................................................. [1]
Fig. 4.1
(c) The electrician wishes to know what power he develops as he climbs the tower.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
5 In the atomic model, the atom has a central mass. Much smaller particles orbit this central For
mass, as shown in Fig. 5.1. Examiner’s
Use
central
mass
orbiting
particles
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State the names of the particles from which the central mass is made.
(d) The central mass of the helium atom is identical to one of the particles emitted in
radioactive decay.
(e) State the name of the particles that form cathode rays.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
6 Fig. 6.1 and Fig. 6.2 show two of the rays from the top of an object, passing through a lens. For
Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.2
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the third ray whose path from the top of the object through the lens is
known. [1]
(i) copy the ray shown on Fig. 6.1 and complete the diagram to locate the image
formed by the lens, [1]
(ii) mark and label the image. [2]
(c) On Fig. 6.2, indicate clearly where you would position a screen on which to see the
focused image. [1]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) The table below describes the conditions of the molecules of a substance in each of the For
three states of matter, solid, liquid and gas. Examiner’s
Use
In the right-hand column, write the state of the substance that is described in the left-
hand column.
(b) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance boils?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) What is the state of matter just before a substance melts?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
8 (a) The thermometer in Fig. 8.1 is calibrated at two fixed points, and the space between For
these is divided into equal divisions. Examiner’s
Use
-10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Fig. 8.1
(i) 1. Write down another name for the lower fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) 1. Write down another name for the upper fixed point.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A block of copper and a block of aluminium have identical masses. They both start at
room temperature and are given equal quantities of heat. When the heating is stopped,
the aluminium has a lower temperature than the copper.
Fill in the missing words in the sentence below, to explain this temperature difference.
The aluminium block has a smaller temperature rise than the copper block because the
aluminium block has a larger ................................................ than the copper block. [1]
[Total: 10]
10
[1]
(b) When the statements in the boxes below are put in the correct order, they describe how
a fuse protects a circuit.
A
fuse wire heats up
B
circuit is broken,
so current stops
C
fuse wire melts
D
current becomes
too high
On the line below, list the letters of the four boxes in the correct order.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) By mistake, a fuse with too high a rated value is put in the fuse-holder in a circuit.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
11
R1 R2
X Y
Fig. 10.1
(b) On Fig. 10.1, use the correct circuit symbol to draw a voltmeter connected to measure
the potential difference between X and Y. [1]
(c) The variable resistor is set to zero resistance. The voltmeter reads 1.5 V.
(ii) State the value of the potential difference across the cell.
12
increases
decreases [1]
increases
decreases [1]
(iii) State the resistance of the variable resistor when the voltmeter reads 0.75 V.
[Total: 11]
13
B
N
A
S G
C
Fig. 11.1
Using the arrangement in Fig. 11.1, the experimenter finds that she does not obtain the
expected deflection on G when she moves the wire ABC down through the magnetic
field.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
14
12 (a) The table below shows how the activity of a sample of a radioactive substance changes For
with time. Examiner’s
Use
activity
time/minutes
counts/s
0 128
30 58
60 25
90 11
120 5
Use the data in the table to estimate the half-life of the radioactive substance.
radon-220 55 seconds
iodine-128 25 minutes
radon-222 3.8 days
strontium-90 28 years
(i) If the radioactive substance in (a) is one of these four, which one is it?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
Which sample will have the greatest proportion of decayed nuclei by the end of one
year, and why?
Which? .....................................................................................................................
Why? ........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/M/J/08
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/08
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2009 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate’s answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
© UCLES 2009
PMT
1 (a) 35 B1
weight ÷ mass
3 (a) 1500 B1
4 (a) 88 – 92 B1
© UCLES 2009
PMT
(c) (i) 12 – 14 B1
© UCLES 2009
PMT
(iii) V B1
(iv) none B1
(b) S S N B1
© UCLES 2009
PMT
9 Apply max 1 un. pen. in (a) and (b) together. Apply at first instance of unit penalty.
(a) (i) 6 V B1
(ii) 50 mA OR 0.05 A B1
(d) (i) infinite OR very large (if figure quoted, must be [25 A)
NOT just “higher” B1
(ii) 0.036 – 0.038 OR his correct value ± 0.0005 (B0 if ridiculous scale) B1
© UCLES 2009
PMT
11 For (a), (b) and (c), mark the names, not the box
(d) battery shown connected across heater filament, any recognisable symbol
ignore extra wires if it would work B1
© UCLES 2009
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core May/June 2009
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid. For Examiner’s Use
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
1
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 2
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 4
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 5
10
11
12
Total
1 A schoolteacher is concerned about the large number of vehicles passing along the busy For
road next to the school. He decides to make a measurement to find the number of vehicles Examiner’s
per minute. Using the school clock he notes the following readings. Use
12
11 1
10 2
8 4
7 5
6
12
11 1
10 2
8 4
7 5
6
(a) Calculate the time for which the schoolteacher was counting vehicles.
(b) Calculate the total number of vehicles passing the school per minute.
[Total: 4]
2 In the left-hand column below are four physical quantities that might be measured in the For
Physics laboratory. In the right-hand column are eight statements which might be definitions Examiner’s
of the quantities in the left-hand column. Use
Use a line to join each quantity with its definition. An example has been given to help you.
There is only one definition for each quantity.
weight ÷ mass
[Total: 3]
Fig. 3.1
(b) Tick the box below that describes the motion of the car.
remains at rest
[1]
(c) The frictional forces increase to 2000 N when the car is moving. What happens to the For
car? Examiner’s
Use
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest two things that might have caused the frictional forces in (c) to increase.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a manometer, containing mercury, being used to monitor the pressure of a For
gas supply. Examiner’s
Use
mm
300
250
from a
gas supply 200
150
100
50
mercury
0
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using the scale on Fig. 4.1, find the vertical difference between the two mercury levels.
(b) What is the value of the excess pressure of the gas supply, measured in millimetres of
mercury?
On Fig. 4.1, mark the new positions of the two mercury levels. [2]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 5.1
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Such a thermometer is calibrated at the ice point and the steam point. The scale is put
on between these two marks.
[Total: 6]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows the waveform of the note from a bell. A grid is given to help you take For
measurements. Examiner’s
Use
time
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the loudness of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) (i) State what, if anything, is happening to the frequency of the note.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) (i) How many oscillations does it take for the amplitude of the wave to decrease to half For
its initial value? Examiner’s
Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................... [1]
3. How long does it take for the amplitude to decrease to half its initial value?
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) A student says that the sound waves, which travelled through the air from the bell, were
longitudinal waves, and that the air molecules moved repeatedly closer together and
then further apart.
(i) Is the student correct in saying that the sound waves are longitudinal? .................
(ii) Is the student correct about the movement of the air molecules? .................
[Total: 11]
10
7 Two apartment blocks are one each side of a road, as shown in Fig. 7.1. A beam of light from For
a police helicopter is hitting the top window H of the left-hand apartment block. Examiner’s
Use
beam of light
H Z
G Y
F X
E W
D V
C U
B T
apartment apartment
A S
block block
Fig. 7.1
1. draw the normal at the point where the beam hits window H, [1]
11
(ii) State the equation that links the angle of incidence with the angle of reflection. For
Examiner’s
................................................. [1] Use
(iii) Which window does the beam hit next, after reflection from H?
................................................. [1]
(iv) Which other windows, if any, receive light from the helicopter?
................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows another example of reflection. The drawing is incomplete.
mirror
card
Fig. 7.2
The horizontal card with the letter P on it is being reflected in the vertical mirror.
[Total: 7]
12
Fig. 8.1
State which of these could be held in the hand at one end and be
................................................. [1]
................................................. [1]
N
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 8.2
13
(c) Charged rods C and D in Fig. 8.3 are attracting each other. For
Examiner’s
Use
+
rod C rod D
Fig. 8.3
(d) Fig. 8.4 shows a plotting compass with its needle pointing north.
Fig. 8.4
brass rod N
plotting
compass
Fig. 8.5
On Fig. 8.5, mark the position of the pointer on each of the two plotting compasses. [2]
[Total: 6]
14
reading
A
50 mA
Fig. 9.1
................................................. [1]
................................................. [1]
R = ................................................ [3]
............................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
15
(d) A student wishes to include a switch in the circuit, but mistakenly connects it as shown For
in Fig. 9.2. Examiner’s
Use
6V
student’s
A incorrect
connection
R
Fig. 9.2
(i) Comment on the size of the current in the circuit if the student closes the switch.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
16
10 The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is called a force-on-conductor balance. When there is an electric For
current I as shown in XY, there is a force on XY that pulls it down. This force is measured by Examiner’s
putting weights in the pan until XY is brought back to its original position. Use
pan
current
out
current
in
Y
N X
I
Fig. 10.1
(a) State what would happen if the current direction were from Y to X.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An experimenter uses the balance to determine the force F on XY for different currents I.
His results are given below.
1. mark suitable scales to plot a graph of F / N against I / A for these values, [2]
17
For
F/N Examiner’s
Use
0
0 I/A
Fig. 10.2
(ii) From your graph, find the force on XY when the current is 1.6 A.
(c) Name one common device that uses the effect demonstrated by the force-on-conductor
balance.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
18
11 Fig. 11.1 represents a cathode-ray tube containing a number of different parts. There are For
empty boxes connected to four of the parts. These boxes are for some of the answers to this Examiner’s
question. Not all of the boxes will be used. Use
heater filament
cathode rays
anode
grid
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, write the word CATHODE in the appropriate box. [1]
(b) One part shown in Fig. 11.1 is used to deflect the cathode rays up and down.
(c) One part glows when the cathode rays strike it.
(d) On Fig. 11.1, draw a battery connected so that the cathode is heated. [1]
(e) Name the particles that make up cathode rays. ................................................ [1]
(f) What fills the rest of the space in the cathode-ray tube? Tick one box.
air
alpha particles
hydrogen
steam
vacuum
[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/M/J/09
PMT
19
12 The following table includes some of the properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations. For
Examiner’s
Complete the table by filling in the missing properties. Use
2 protons +
nature [2]
2 neutrons
ability to penetrate
very penetrating [2]
solids
[Total: 8]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/M/J/09
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 21 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in questions.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(ii) distance = speed × time in this form only, words, letters or numbers C1
66 × 20 OR 66 × ⅓ OR 66 × 20/60 C1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(b) Y marked anywhere to right of X, but not beyond R.H. tip of parrot B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(ii) radiation B1
8 (a) 10 (cm) B1
(ii) idea of cord insulating you from electricity OR cord not a conductor
OR idea of separates you from the electrics/live parts B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
10 (a) V1/V2 or N1/N2 or V1/N1 or V2/N2 in any form Allow full credit for use C1
substitution correct and seen of 25 turns to give 12V, M1
25 turns with working seen
A1
Y and Z (either order) B1
(c) core B1
iron NOT steel B1
(ii) idea that radiation (from watch) can enter the body B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 Imagine that you live beside a busy road. One of your neighbours thinks that many of the For
vehicles are travelling faster than the speed limit for the road. Examiner’s
Use
You decide to check this by measuring the speeds of some of the vehicles.
(a) Which two quantities will you need to measure in order to find the speed of a vehicle,
and which instruments would you use to measure them?
[4]
(b) State the equation you would use to calculate the speed of the vehicle. If you use
symbols, state what your symbols mean.
[1]
(c) One lorry travels from your town to another town. The lorry reaches a top speed of
90 km / h, but its average speed between the towns is only 66 km / h.
(i) Why is the average speed less than the top speed?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 9]
2 A helical spring is hung from the edge of a bench top, as shown in Fig. 2.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
bench top
0 0
29.8
cm pin spring
62.8
cm
metre rule
load = 5.5 N
100 100
Fig. 2.1
Before the load is hung on the spring, the pin points to the 29.8 cm mark on the metre rule.
When a load of 5.5 N is hung on the spring, the pin points to 62.8 cm.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 represents the energy into and out of a machine. For
Examiner’s
Use
useful output
input energy I energy U
wasted energy W
Fig. 3.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) An electric motor and a pulley in a warehouse are being used to lift a packing case of
goods from the ground up to a higher level. This is shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
motor pulley
cable
chains
packing case
pallet
ground
Fig. 3.2
The packing case of goods, the chains and the pallet together weigh 850 N.
(i) State the value of the tension force in the cable when the load is being lifted at a
steady speed.
(ii) When the load is just leaving the floor, why is the force larger than your answer to For
(b)(i)? Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) The warehouse manager wishes to calculate the useful work done when the load
is lifted from the ground to the higher level. Which quantity, other than the weight,
does he need to measure?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) Which further quantity does the manager need to know, in order to calculate the
power required to lift the load?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) How does the electrical energy supplied to the electric motor compare with the increase
in energy of the load? Answer by completing the sentence below.
[Total: 6]
4 (a) A musical note is being produced by a loudspeaker connected to a signal generator. For
Examiner’s
A person is listening to the note, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Use
signal generator
amplitude frequency
Fig. 4.1
By adjusting the controls on the signal generator, the amplitude and the frequency of
the note from the loudspeaker can each be changed.
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) What adjustment, if any, should be made to the two controls so that the sound
heard in the new position is the same as in the original position?
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a girl standing some distance from a rock face. She has a bell in her For
hand. Examiner’s
Use
rock face
Fig. 4.2
The girl rings the bell once. After a short time the sound of the bell reaches her again.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Why was there a short time delay before the girl heard the second sound?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a child’s toy. It is made out of wood, in the shape of a bird. The toy includes a For
metal weight stuck to the tail. When placed on a metal rod, the toy balances in equilibrium. Examiner’s
Use
metal rod
metal weight
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter X a possible position for the centre of mass of the toy.
[1]
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark with the letter Y a possible new position for the centre of mass.
[1]
(ii) What happens to the toy immediately after the metal weight falls off?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a beaker in which coffee is served at an airport kiosk. For
Examiner’s
Use
section through
beaker
layer of corrugated
cardboard stuck to
a layer of smooth
cardboard, with air
trapped between them
The beaker itself is made of two layers of cardboard, as shown in section in Fig. 6.2. It
has a thin plastic lid.
(i) State two sources of heat loss that are reduced by the lid.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State two reasons why the layer of corrugated cardboard stops the fingers of the
person holding the beaker from becoming uncomfortably hot.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) Another airport kiosk serves coffee in pottery mugs. The mugs all have the same
internal dimensions but some have a high thermal capacity and some have a low
thermal capacity.
When hot drinks are poured into the mugs, the temperature of the drink always
drops because of the thermal energy absorbed by the mug.
State which mug, high thermal capacity or low thermal capacity, causes the least
fall in temperature of the hot drink, and explain why.
mug ..........................................................................................................................
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
10
7 The electric lamp in Fig. 7.1 has “240 V, 100 W” marked on it. Its filament is a coiled coil of For
fine tungsten wire, as shown in Fig. 7.2. Examiner’s
Use
(a) (i) To give out white light, the filament has to reach a very high temperature.
Suggest why having the filament as a coiled coil helps to achieve this high
temperature.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) If your hand is close to the lamp when it is switched on for a few seconds, you can
feel warmth from the lamp but the glass will remain cool.
By what method has the thermal energy reached your hand? Tick one box.
conduction
convection
evaporation
radiation
[1]
11
(b) (i) The markings on the lamp give electrical information about the lamp when it is For
operating normally. Examiner’s
Use
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
12
I
O F2 F1
Fig. 8.1
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the ray from the top of the object which passes through F2.
[Total: 8]
13
9 (a) A warning on the packaging of a light switch purchased from an electrical store reads For
Examiner’s
Use
SAFETY WARNING
This push-button switch is not suitable for use in a washroom. Lights in washrooms should be
operated by pull-cord switches.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An electric heater, sold in the electrical store, has a current of 8 A when it is working
normally.
Which of the following fuses would be most suitable to use in the plug fitted to the cable
of the heater? Tick one box.
5A
10 A
13 A
20 A
[1]
(c) The cable for connecting an electric cooker is much thicker than the cable on a table
lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) What would happen if a thin cable were used for wiring a cooker to the supply?
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
14
10 A transformer has 500 turns in both its primary and its secondary coils. It is connected to a For
240 V mains supply. There are 4 possible connections to the secondary, labelled W, X, Y and Examiner’s
Z on Fig. 10.1. Use
W
240 V X
Y
Z
Fig. 10.1
Between which two of the labelled terminals should the bell be connected?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
15
(c) State the name given to the part labelled P and the material from which it is made. For
Examiner’s
name ................................................................................................................................ Use
(d) Why are the coils normally made from copper wire?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
16
11 Fig. 11.1 shows apparatus being used to project a visible spectrum onto a screen, using a For
lamp with a white-hot filament. Examiner’s
Use
glass screen
prism
glass
lens P
visible spe
ctrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 11.1
(a) State two things that happen to the white light as it passes through surface PQ of the
prism.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) A thermometer with a blackened bulb is moved very slowly across the screen.
(i) On Fig. 11.1, mark using a cross (×) the position where the thermometer will show
its largest reading. [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
17
12 (a) A scientist, who is also an antiques collector, buys an old watch at an antiques market. For
The figures on the dial of the watch are painted with a type of luminous paint that is Examiner’s
radioactive. Use
In his laboratory, he puts the watch close to a radiation detector and then places sheets
of different materials in the gap between them, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
radiation
detector
watch
counter
sheet
Fig. 12.1
material effect
(i) From this information, deduce the type or types of radiation escaping from the
watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
State one reason why there would be a health hazard when wearing this watch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
18
Fig. 12.2
[1]
(ii) State one other safety precaution that should be taken when storing the radioactive
substances in the cupboard.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 5]
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 22 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2010 question papers for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored. NOTE: In this paper, note the M marks in questions
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT
1 (a) 16 – 4 C1
2.4 (cm) A1
(b) accelerates it M1
in same direction/opposite direction to exhaust gases A1
3 (a) oil B1
nuclear fission B1
(use + = 0 for extras)
OR weight/force of air B1
area B1
(ii) 1. same B1
2. greater C1
four times A1 [7]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(ii) E = Pt C1
2000 × his(i) × 60 C1
3.48 × 106 (J) c.a.o. A1 [8]
(ii) 8.7–8.9 B1
(iii) idea of more waves (in same distance)/shorter wavelength, however expressed
Accept shown on Fig. 6.1 B1
(ii) 2.5–2.7 B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(iii) close B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
after plates
straight line in direction of final direction between plates
(allow 1 cm of curve beyond plates, before becomes straight) B1 [6]
(ii) 1 B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
1 Five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
wooden
block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cm
Fig. 1.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. It is For
moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. Examiner’s
Use
rocket motors
Fig. 2.1
Is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? Tick one box.
yes
no
If your answer is “yes”, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired.
exhaust gases
Fig. 2.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the Earth’s atmosphere For
again, with no rockets working. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity. For
Examiner’s
Put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed. Use
oil
hydroelectricity
nuclear fission
wind
waves
[2]
(b) Here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another.
battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
soil
reinforced reinforced
concrete concrete
foundation foundation
Fig. 4.1
Which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
P Q
Fig. 4.2
(i) Name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the
atmospheric pressure on square P.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10
PMT
atmospheric pressure on Q.
[Total: 7]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature For
of the air in a room. Examiner’s
Use
power
supply
heater
insulator
Y
temperature
control screw
Fig. 5.1
X and Y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. Together they
are called a bimetallic strip. X expands more than Y for the same temperature rise.
State
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the
temperature at which the thermostat operates.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated For
continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 °C. Examiner’s
Use
80
70
temperature
/ °C 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
The thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current
when the temperature rises above 50 °C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat
operates.
10
[Total: 8]
11
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
State how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]
(ii) From Fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.
State how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in
Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
12
7 (a) A ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface, For
as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
ray of
light
45° 45°
Fig. 7.1
(i) State why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass
at A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has
emerged again into the air. [3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors.
mirror A
mirror B
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at
mirror A. [1]
13
[1]
(iii) In the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in
Fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at A and B.
[2]
[Total: 8]
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 V lamp, two switches and a 6 V motorcycle battery. For
The lamp has a resistance of 10 when it is glowing normally. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2
6V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.1
How can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? Tick the box alongside any
action which will do this.
close S1 only
close S2 only
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel.
S1
S2
6V 6 V, 10 X
Fig. 8.2
How can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? Tick the box alongside any
action which will do this.
close S1 only
close S2 only
15
(c) The lamp is now connected to a 12 V car battery, as shown in Fig. 8.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
12 V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.3
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Resistor R is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 8.4.
R
12 V
6 V, 10
Fig. 8.4
(i) State what value R must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 V across it
when S is closed.
(ii) With this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
16
9 Fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list. For
Do not use any word more than once. Examiner’s
Use
[Total: 3]
17
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The wire is
connected to an alternating current supply.
low voltage
lamp
iron bar
flat coil
alternating
current
supply
Fig. 10.1
Some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. When
the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
18
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor M on and off. For
Examiner’s
Use
springy metal
M
contacts
A
B
pivot
insulator
iron armature
core
coil of
wire
S
Fig. 10.2
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of
steel instead of iron.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
19
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In Fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal
plates.
cathode
rays
Fig. 11.1
(i) What sort of particles make up cathode rays? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they
travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3]
[Total: 6]
20
12 (a) Four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance. For
Examiner’s
Student A Half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero. Use
Student B Half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to
half its original value.
Student C Half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half
its original value.
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. The substance emits
-particles.
Fig. 12.1
Put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.
21
(c) A quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory For
some distance away. Fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive Examiner’s
material. Use
2000
count rate
counts / minute
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / hours
Fig. 12.2
Just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000
counts / minute. When it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.
(i) How long did the journey take? ................................. hours [1]
(ii) How many half-lives elapsed during the journey? ........................................... [1]
(iii) The material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the
radioactive material.
[Total: 6]
22
BLANK PAGE
23
BLANK PAGE
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core May/June 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (LEO/SHW) 27132
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
PMT
1 Five identical steel balls are measured with a rule graduated in cm, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
wooden
block
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
cm
Fig. 1.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a space probe, far out into space, where there is no atmosphere. It is For
moving at a constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow. Examiner’s
Use
rocket motors
Fig. 2.1
Is a force necessary to keep the probe moving like this? Tick one box.
yes
no
If your answer is “yes”, draw an arrow on the diagram to show this force. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the space probe just after the rocket motors are fired.
exhaust gases
Fig. 2.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Later into its mission, the space probe is brought back into the Earth’s atmosphere For
again, with no rockets working. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two effects that the atmosphere has on the space probe.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Here is a list of some energy resources which might be used to generate electricity. For
Examiner’s
Put a tick in the box alongside any of these which relies on a fuel being consumed. Use
oil
hydroelectricity
nuclear fission
wind
waves
[2]
(b) Here is a list of devices which convert energy from one form to another.
battery, electric motor, gas lamp, gas fire, generator, loudspeaker, microphone
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows end views of the walls built by two bricklayers. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
soil
reinforced reinforced
concrete concrete
foundation foundation
Fig. 4.1
Which wall is the least likely to sink into the soil, and why?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
P Q
Fig. 4.2
(i) Name two quantities that would need to be known in order to calculate the
atmospheric pressure on square P.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10
PMT
atmospheric pressure on Q.
[Total: 7]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a device called a thermostat, which is being used to control the temperature For
of the air in a room. Examiner’s
Use
power
supply
heater
insulator
Y
temperature
control screw
Fig. 5.1
X and Y are strips of two different metals, joined together along their length. Together they
are called a bimetallic strip. X expands more than Y for the same temperature rise.
State
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) what adjustment could be made to this thermostat, in order to increase the
temperature at which the thermostat operates.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows how the temperature of the water in a tank would rise if it were heated For
continuously, starting with water at a temperature of 0 °C. Examiner’s
Use
80
70
temperature
/ °C 60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / minutes
Fig. 5.2
The thermostat controlling the temperature of the water switches off the heater current
when the temperature rises above 50 °C.
(i) Use Fig. 5.2 to determine how long the water is heated before the thermostat
operates.
10
[Total: 8]
11
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 illustrates a sound wave travelling through the air. For
Examiner’s
Use
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark clearly the direction in which the air particles are moving. [1]
(ii) Use Fig. 6.1 to measure the wavelength of the sound wave.
State how the sound wave pattern would differ from that shown in Fig. 6.1.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, mark clearly the direction in which the water molecules are moving. [1]
(ii) From Fig. 6.2, measure the wavelength of the water wave.
State how the appearance of the water waves would differ from that shown in
Fig. 6.2.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
12
7 (a) A ray of light passes through one surface of a glass prism at right angles to the surface, For
as shown in Fig. 7.1. Examiner’s
Use
ray of
light
45° 45°
Fig. 7.1
(i) State why the ray is not deviated as it passes through the surface into the glass
at A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, use a ruler to help you draw the rest of the path of the ray, until it has
emerged again into the air. [3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a periscope that uses two plane mirrors.
mirror A
mirror B
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, clearly mark the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at
mirror A. [1]
13
[1]
(iii) In the space below, use a ruler to redraw the periscope, but using prisms like that in
Fig. 7.1 instead of mirrors at A and B.
[2]
[Total: 8]
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit containing a 6 V lamp, two switches and a 6 V motorcycle battery. For
The lamp has a resistance of 10 when it is glowing normally. Examiner’s
Use
S1 S2
6V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.1
How can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? Tick the box alongside any
action which will do this.
close S1 only
close S2 only
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a similar circuit, but the switches are arranged in parallel.
S1
S2
6V 6 V, 10 X
Fig. 8.2
How can the lamp be made to light up at normal brightness? Tick the box alongside any
action which will do this.
close S1 only
close S2 only
15
(c) The lamp is now connected to a 12 V car battery, as shown in Fig. 8.3. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
12 V 6 V, 10
Fig. 8.3
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Resistor R is connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 8.4.
R
12 V
6 V, 10
Fig. 8.4
(i) State what value R must have, in order to enable the lamp to have 6 V across it
when S is closed.
(ii) With this resistor and the lamp in series, calculate the current in the circuit.
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
16
9 Fill in the gaps in the sentences below, using only appropriate words from the following list. For
Do not use any word more than once. Examiner’s
Use
[Total: 3]
17
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) An iron bar has many turns of wire wrapped around it, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The wire is
connected to an alternating current supply.
low voltage
lamp
iron bar
flat coil
alternating
current
supply
Fig. 10.1
Some more wire is made into a flat coil and connected across a low voltage lamp. When
the flat coil is held close to the end of the iron bar, the lamp glows.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/M/J/10 [Turn over
PMT
18
(c) Fig. 10.2 shows a relay being used to switch an electric motor M on and off. For
Examiner’s
Use
springy metal
M
contacts
A
B
pivot
insulator
iron armature
core
coil of
wire
S
Fig. 10.2
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(d) A suggestion is made that the relay would work better if the armature were made of
steel instead of iron.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
19
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) In Fig. 11.1, a beam of cathode rays is entering the space between two charged metal
plates.
cathode
rays
Fig. 11.1
(i) What sort of particles make up cathode rays? Tick one box.
-particles
electrons
neutrons
protons
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 11.1, continue the dotted line to show the path of the cathode rays as they
travel between the plates and into the space beyond the plates. [3]
[Total: 6]
20
12 (a) Four students attempt to define the half-life of a sample of radioactive substance. For
Examiner’s
Student A Half-life is half the time for the activity of the sample to decrease to zero. Use
Student B Half-life is half the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to
half its original value.
Student C Half-life is the time taken for the activity of the sample to decrease to half
its original value.
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows two samples of the same radioactive substance. The substance emits
-particles.
Fig. 12.1
Put a tick alongside any of the following quantities which is the same for both samples.
21
(c) A quantity of radioactive material has to be taken from a nuclear reactor to a factory For
some distance away. Fig. 12.2 shows the decay curve for the quantity of radioactive Examiner’s
material. Use
2000
count rate
counts / minute
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
time / hours
Fig. 12.2
Just before it leaves the nuclear reactor, the count-rate from the material is 2000
counts / minute. When it arrives at the factory, the count-rate is 1000 counts / minute.
(i) How long did the journey take? ................................. hours [1]
(ii) How many half-lives elapsed during the journey? ........................................... [1]
(iii) The material is only useful to the factory if the activity is at least 100 counts / minute.
Use Fig. 12.2 to determine how many hours of useful life the factory has from the
radioactive material.
[Total: 6]
22
BLANK PAGE
23
BLANK PAGE
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(c) reduce/prevent heat coming in from outside NOT cold getting out B1
reduce/prevent conduction NOT convection/radiation B1
(d) idea that heat gained from outside = heat removed by refrigeration unit B2
allow B1 for idea of thermostatic control [7]
6 (a) ray bent down at 1st surface, but not beyond/along normal B1
ray bent down at 2nd surface, but not beyond/along surface B1
MAX 1 mark if any suggestion of a spectrum shown
(b) spot/dot/line AND of one colour accept a single named colour e.g. red B1
(b) 2 complete cycles, any shape (if full-wave rectified, must be 4 humps) B1
cyclical and equal amplitude above & below axis B1
uniform spacing B1
intention of sinusoidal shape accept sinusoidal full-wave rectification B1 [6]
(b) (i) S2 OR 2
any 1 correct B1
(ii) S1 OR 1 ignore mention of S2 B2
all 3 correct B2
(iii) S3 OR 3 ignore mention of S1 and/or S2
(ii) 84 ± 1 (s) B1
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NH/DJ) 28876/6
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
PMT
Fig. 1.2 shows the same measuring cylinder after stone A has been lowered into it on a fine
string.
60.4 cm3
44.2 cm3
water A
Calculate the density of the rock from which stone A was formed.
(c) Stone B, from the same rock as stone A, has a larger volume.
Stone A is removed from the water and replaced by stone B. The measurements are then
repeated.
Which of the values in the experiment will be different when using stone B?
Tick boxes alongside any of the quantities that will have changed.
60.4 cm3
40.5 g
density
[2]
[Total: 8]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) One of the sketch graphs in Fig. 2.1 shows how the pressure of the gas varies with volume
at constant temperature, and the other shows how the pressure varies with temperature at
constant volume.
pressure pressure
/ Pa / Pa
0 0
Fig. 2.1
(i) On the appropriate graphs, label one horizontal axis “ volume / m3 ” and the other horizontal
axis “ temperature / °C ”.
(ii) On one of the graphs, mark, with the letter X, the pressure of the gas at the ice point.
[2]
[Total: 5]
(a) Describe the difference between a renewable energy source and a non-renewable energy
source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why your choice in (b)(i) is not, so far, widely used for generating
electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why non-renewable sources have been widely used for generating
electricity up until the present time.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
refrigeration
unit
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain why the cooling tubes are positioned at the top of the store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest why the refrigeration unit is outside the cold store.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Even when the refrigeration unit is running continuously, there comes a time when the
temperature in the store stops falling, and remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) The four words below can each be used to describe waves.
Put a tick in each of the boxes alongside any words that can be applied to sound waves.
longitudinal
transverse
electromagnetic
mechanical
[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a boat steaming along a river. The river is in a wide gorge and there are high
cliffs on each side.
cliff cliff
A B
Fig. 5.1
The boat sounds its hooter once. Two clear echoes are heard by a person on the boat.
The first echo is 1.5 s after the hooter sounds. The second echo is 2.5 s after the hooter sounds.
(iii) Further along the river, the cliffs are the same distance apart but the river is midway
between the cliffs. The boat sounds its hooter again.
Without further calculation, describe what is now heard and approximately when it is
heard.
...........................................................................................................................................
when ..................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
10
Fig. 6.1 shows the light from a laser shining on a triangular glass prism.
screen
prism
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the light until it reaches the screen. [2]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The beam of light from the laser is replaced by a beam of white light from a lamp.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
11
7 (a) Two light, identical spheres, A and B, are suspended alongside each other on thin nylon
threads, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
nylon threads
A B
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw how the threads and spheres might look after the spheres have been
charged. [1]
(b) A cleaner is attempting to remove dust from some plastic-covered furniture, using a dry cloth.
Unfortunately, this seems to make the dust cling more firmly to the plastic covering.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Suggest why this would be less likely to happen if the cleaner used a cloth which was
very slightly damp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
12
3Ω
A B C D
7Ω
4.2 V
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Complete the following sentence about the two resistors connected between A and D.
current = ............................................................[4]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
13
(b) In the boxes below, draw two circuit diagrams, each containing a battery and three identical
resistors. Arrange each circuit so that all the resistors in the circuit carry the same current.
[2]
[Total: 10]
14
9 (a) A car headlamp circuit consists of a 12 V battery, a switch, two 12 V headlamps and a 12 V
indicator lamp (inside the car).
left headlamp
right headlamp
indicator lamp
(inside car)
switch 12 V battery
Fig. 9.1
Complete Fig. 9.1 to show the wiring necessary so that all three lamps light up at full brightness
when the switch is closed. [2]
(b) (i) Explain briefly, in terms of molecules, why solids expand when heated.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
15
The flasher lamp shown in Fig. 9.2 is used as a warning lamp in a car.
lamp
contact
filament
Fig. 9.2
It contains a bimetallic strip made of a brass strip and an invar strip joined together along
their lengths.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. Explain why the lamp flashes on and off repeatedly when it is connected to an
appropriate battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
16
10 A rotating-coil generator consists of a rectangular coil of wire that rotates at constant speed
between the poles of a permanent magnet.
Figs. 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3 show views from one end of the coil, when the coil is in different
positions.
N S N S N S
(b) On Fig. 10.4, sketch the graph of e.m.f. against time, for two complete rotations of the coil.
e.m.f.
0
time
Fig. 10.4
[4]
[Total: 6]
17
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a cathode-ray tube connected to external voltage supplies and switches. The
terminals labelled H.T. are connected to a high voltage source.
S1 – +
H.T. horizontal metal
plates
screen
V1
C D
S2
cathode anode S3
V2
Fig. 11.1
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Which switch should be closed to make the cathode become hot?
switch = ...............................................................
(ii) Which switch should then be closed to obtain a beam of electrons along CD?
switch = ...............................................................
(iii) Which switch should then be closed to deflect the beam of electrons downwards?
switch = ...........................................................[2]
(c) What must be done in order to deflect the beam of electrons upwards, instead of
downwards?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
18
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a sample of radioactive material changes with time.
30
count rate
counts / s
25
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 12.1
19
(i) Use Fig. 12.1 to find the half-life of the radioactive material.
(ii) Use the graph to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease from 30 counts / s to
10 counts / s.
(iii) Use your answers to (i) and (ii) to find how long it takes for the count rate to decrease
from 30 counts / s to 5 counts / s.
[Total: 6]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2011 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
1 (a) water B1
(e) subtracting M1
1st volume from 2nd volume (however expressed) A1 [6]
2 (a) conduction B1
(b) conduction B1
convection B1
4 (a) (i) 15 (m / s) B1
(ii) 0 (m / s) B1
(b) reflected portions of both first two waves starting where incoming portions
meet harbour wall B1
reflected portions parallel (by eye) B1
reflected portions both at correct angle to wall (by eye) B1
(if any extra waves shown –1 for each one incorrect) [8]
(ii) increases B1
(iii) decreases B1
8 (a) series B1
10 (a) electromagnetic B1
short OR small B1
11 (a) S1 B1
(c) strontium(-90) M1
idea of effectively constant strength
OR barium-139 would decay too quickly A1
(d) more B1
200 B1
more B1 [7]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 28845/3
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
PMT
1 The volume of a stone is to be found using the equipment illustrated in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
The following five steps are intended to describe how the volume of the stone is found.
(b) Take the reading of the ....................................... from the scale on the measuring cylinder. [1]
(d) Take the new reading of the ....................................... from the scale on the measuring cylinder.
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
2 Energy may be transferred from one place to another by means of conduction, convection or
radiation.
[Total: 4]
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows how the speed of an object varies during a period of 30 s.
40
speed
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30
time / s
Fig. 4.1
(i) 0 s – 10 s, ...........................................................................................................................
(ii) 10 s – 25 s, .........................................................................................................................
(iii) 25 s – 30 s. .........................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a girl looking at her reflection in a mirror on the wall. The reflecting surface of
the mirror is the surface in contact with the wall.
mirror
reflecting
surface
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1,
(i) put a small X where the image of the girl’s eye is positioned, [2]
(ii) carefully draw lines to find the lowest part of her body that she can see reflected in the
mirror. Mark clearly the portion of her body that she cannot see. [3]
(b) A helicopter is hovering over a harbour. The pilot can see the waves arriving from out at sea.
The waves hit the harbour wall at an angle, as shown in Fig. 5.2.
incoming
water
waves
harbour
wall
(seen from
the air)
Fig. 5.2
The waves are reflected when they hit the harbour wall.
Carefully complete Fig. 5.2 to show the reflected parts of the first two waves to hit the wall.
[3]
[Total: 8]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When concrete roads are made, the concrete is laid in sections, with gaps between the
sections. The gaps are then filled with a soft material, called pitch. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
concrete
pitch
Fig. 6.1
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) What name do we give to materials in which it is easy to create an electric current?
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) (i) What name do we give to materials in which it is difficult to create an electric current?
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
10
A
P Q
Fig. 8.1
The components in the circuit of Fig. 8.1 are connected in .................................... with each
other. [1]
(i) an arrow to show the direction of the conventional current in the circuit,
(ii) a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference across R. [2]
(c) (i) State the name of the component represented by this symbol:
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
11
(d) The top ammeter reads 1.5 A. The voltmeter reads 6.0 V.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 11]
9 (a) State two advantages that electromagnets have, compared with permanent magnets.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Tick one box in each of the columns below, to indicate what should be used to give the
strongest electromagnet.
[2]
[Total: 4]
12
10 A sportsman is feared to have broken a leg, and is taken to hospital to have his leg X-rayed.
(b) In the hospital, what is used to detect the X-rays and produce an image of the bones of the
leg?
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Describe the properties of X-rays that enable an image to be produced, which distinguishes
between bones and flesh.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State one precaution taken by the technicians who operate the X-ray machines.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
13
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays, connected to two voltage supplies and
switches.
filament
cathode vacuum
anode
+
12 V
– S1
– +
1000 V S2
Fig. 11.1
(a) Which switch has to be closed in order to make the filament release electrons?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Explain why closing the switch in (a) makes the filament release electrons.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) State and explain what will happen to the released electrons when both switches are closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
14
12 A radioactive source, which emits beta-particles, is used as shown in Fig. 12.1 to detect whether
cartons on a conveyor belt have the required volume of pineapple juice in them.
narrow
beta-particle detecting
emitting source slit
carton
SE
IGCPPLE
EA
PIN
ls
t rave
t y
bel is wa to counter
t h
conveyor
belt
Fig. 12.1
(a) State why an alpha-emitting source would not be suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State why a gamma-emitting source would not be suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
source half-life
barium-139 85 minutes
strontium-90 28 years
State, giving your reasons, which of these sources is the most suitable for this application.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/M/J/11
PMT
15
(d) The equipment is set to give a reading of 200 counts / s when there is a carton with the correct
amount of pineapple juice between the source and the detector.
Tick the appropriate boxes to indicate what reading would be expected in each situation.
reading
more than less than
200 counts / s
200 counts / s 200 counts / s
carton containing
too little juice
carton containing
too much juice
no carton at all
[3]
[Total: 7]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 21 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
2 (a) 84 – 53 C1
31 (cm3) A1
(ii) idea of unbalanced force e.g. forward force > backward force
NOT just forward force is bigger A1
[Total: 7]
(ii) increases B1
[Total: 6]
6 (a) EITHER
ray from tip of object through optical centre of lens M1
straight on after lens A1
OR
ray from tip of object through F2 and on to lens M1
parallel to axis after lens A1
(d) smaller B1
closer to lens/to the left B1
[Total: 8]
7 (a) infra-red B1
(b) infra-red B1
(c) X-rays B1
(d) microwaves B1
[Total: 4]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/JG) 43201/2
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
1 A car is travelling along a level road at a steady speed. Fig. 1.1 shows the speedometer in For
the car. A speedometer registers how fast the car is going. Examiner’s
Use
60 80
40 100
20 120
km / hour
0 140
Fig. 1.1
(a) How far, in km, does the car travel in ½ hour at the speed shown in Fig. 1.1?
(b) (i) On the axes shown in Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the motion of the car for the For
½ hour mentioned in (a). Do not go beyond ½ hour. [3] Examiner’s
Use
100
speed
km / hour
80
60
40
20
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / hours
Fig. 1.2
(ii) At the end of the ½ hour, the car reaches a region where the road begins to rise up
into some mountains. The car climbs the mountains for a further ½ hour.
During the climb, its speed steadily decreases to 30 km / hour. The driver then stops
the car so that he can admire the view.
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line representing the climb and the stopping of the car. [4]
[Total: 10]
2 A student carries out an experiment to find the density of water, using a method that is For
slightly different from normal. In his method, he starts with a measuring cylinder containing Examiner’s
some water, and then adds more water to that already in the measuring cylinder. Use
measuring
cylinder reading 2
reading 1
water
balance
reading 3 reading 4
Fig. 2.1
reading 1 53 cm3
reading 2 84 cm3
reading 3 205 g
reading 4 238 g
Calculate
(c) the density of water, stating clearly the equation you are using. For
Examiner’s
Use
[Total: 8]
3 A train is passing through a station at constant speed, as shown in Fig. 3.1. The track is For
horizontal. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 3.1
The engine produces a forward thrust of 70 000 N. There is a 25 000 N force opposing the
motion, due to friction in the wheels.
(a) Mark these forces on Fig. 3.1, using an arrow labelled 70 000 N and an arrow labelled
25 000 N. [2]
(b) The train is travelling at constant speed, so there must be another horizontal force acting
on it.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) Once the train has passed the station, the driver increases the engine’s forward thrust.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
4 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, how a gas causes a pressure on the walls of its container. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
.............................................. .
.............................................. .
[2]
[Total: 6]
5 (a) The principle of conservation of energy states that energy can neither be created nor For
destroyed. Examiner’s
Use
What, then, does happen to the energy supplied to a device such as a motor or a
television?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The television in Fig. 5.1 is switched on to watch a programme. During this time, 720 kJ
of electrical energy is supplied.
electrical energy
input = 720 kJ
light energy
output = 4 kJ sound energy
output = 20 kJ
Fig. 5.1
(i) From the information on Fig. 5.1, find the total energy provided for the viewer to see
and hear the television during this programme.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
10
6 The ray diagram in Fig. 6.1 shows one ray from the top of an object placed to the left of a For
converging lens. Examiner’s
Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, use your ruler to draw another ray from the top of the object until it crosses
the ray printed on the diagram. [2]
(c) Which of the following descriptions fit the image formed by the lens? Tick 3 boxes.
upright
inverted
real [3]
11
(d) The object is moved to a position further from the lens. For
Examiner’s
What differences are seen in the image, compared with the previous image? Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
12
7 (a) Remote controllers for television sets send a beam of electromagnetic radiation to the For
television. Examiner’s
Use
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
(c) Injured legs may be checked for possible fractures using electromagnetic radiation.
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
13
microwaves
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays [1]
[Total: 4]
14
.................................................... . [1]
(c) The resistance wire in (b) is replaced by a greater length of wire from the same reel.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the current in the new wire when there is a potential difference of 9.6 V across it, as
before.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
15
9 The coil in the d.c. motor in Fig. 9.1 is rotating as shown. For
Examiner’s
Use
rotation
magnet
– +
y
batter
Fig. 9.1
(b) State two things that could be done to the apparatus shown in Fig. 9.1 in order to make
the coil rotate more rapidly.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest how the coil could be made to rotate in the opposite direction.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
16
wall-mounted
switch
ceiling-mounted
pull-cord
switch flush
wall-mounted
switch
nylon cord
plug
plug switch
metal
sections
Fig. 10.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a switch.
[1]
(b) (i) Which one of the switches is definitely dangerous to use with mains voltages?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
17
(c) A laundry, where clothes are washed, is likely to have lots of steam and condensation. For
Examiner’s
(i) Which switch is the most suitable for turning the lights on or off from within the Use
laundry?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) The laundry is lit by three mains-voltage lamps. Fig. 10.2 shows the mains supply and
the three lamps.
mains
supply
Fig. 10.2
Complete Fig. 10.2 by adding the switch and the wiring that will allow all three lamps to
light at full brightness when the switch is on. [2]
[Total: 8]
18
11 Fig. 11.1 shows an electron beam about to enter, at point A, the electric field between two For
charged metal plates. Examiner’s
Use
electron
beam A
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig. 11.1, carefully draw the path of the electron beam between A and the line BC.
[3]
(b) The voltage across the plates is reversed. State what difference this makes to the path
of the electron beam.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
19
12 The table below gives details about some radioactive substances. For
Examiner’s
Use
substance symbol type of radiation emitted half-life
thorium-232 232 Th
90
alpha (α) 1.4 × 1010 years
(a) Which of these substances has the greatest number of particles in the nucleus of its
atoms?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Which of these substances has the least number of electrons in the orbits of a neutral
atom?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Samples of each of these substances are decaying. Each sample starts with the same
number of atoms.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(b) 60 – 50 C1
candidate’s (a) + or – 10 e.c.f. C1
86 (cm Hg) c.a.o. A1
3 (a) diagonal, top L to bottom R, drawn (accept any part of this diagonal) B1
(c) time M1
to raise basket up cliff A1
[Total: 6]
(c) arrow pointing to somewhere between RH end of bulb & –10 mark B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) moves/deflects M1
momentary (or equivalent) OR goes back to zero/centre A1
11 (a) diagram:
source, solid absorber, detector shown in line B1
method:
distance between source & detector small/<5cm B1
take reading with no absorber B1
insert sheet of paper/aluminium (ignore thickness) B1
take reading with absorber present B1
identification:
if no/background reading with paper absorber, then α
OR if still get a reading, then β
B1
(NOTE no mark for identification based on Al absorber)
(ii) electron(s) B1
(ii) 2 B1
(iii) 4 at top B1
2 at bottom B1
[Total: 6]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (NF/SW) 43195/3
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. For
Examiner’s
Use
10
B C
8
speed
m/s 6 D
2
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
time / s
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]
[Total: 9]
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains For
some trapped gas. Examiner’s
Use
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 6]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. For
Examiner’s
Use
block of wood
pushed here
protractor
70 80 90 10
01
60 10
50 12
0
40 13
0
30
14
20
0
15
10
01
60 1
0
board
70 180
Fig. 3.1
The block is pushed at the top, as shown in Fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.
(a) On the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the
block topples over. [1]
(b) Use the protractor shown on Fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts
before it topples over.
(c) The block is put back on the board, as in Fig. 3.1. This time, instead of the block being
pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.
State the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples
over.
(d) State how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several
centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12
PMT
4 Two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. The rocks are loaded into a For
basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The basket of Examiner’s
rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. Use
............................................................. [1]
2. ...............................................................
[2]
Fig. 4.1
(c) State the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the
useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
5 The boy shown in Fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the For
other. Fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the Examiner’s
water. Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land.
air
surface
water
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown
in Fig. 5.1. [2]
(c) Later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. Fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the For
position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. Examiner’s
Use
6s
4s
2s
Fig. 5.3
(i) From Fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]
[Total: 7]
6 The liquid-in-glass thermometer in Fig. 6.1 has a scale from –10 °C to 110 °C. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
(a) Two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.
(b) The bulb of the thermometer shown in Fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.
(i) What happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the
boiling water?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) On a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is –12 °C.
On Fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be
at this temperature. [1]
[Total: 5]
7 A teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo For
method. Examiner’s
Use
She has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. She also has
a stopwatch and a tape measure.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) She stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the
firework in a safe manner.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) After she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(i) Using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.
(ii) Suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.
Assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/M/J/12 [Turn over
PMT
10
8 (a) In terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.
Describe how this problem is solved. You may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify
your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
11
9 A solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as For
shown in Fig. 9.1. Examiner’s
Use
sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter
magnet
N
solenoid S
Fig. 9.1
(a) The N pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the
solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
12
10 A length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of Fig. 10.1. Contact C can For
be moved to any position along the resistance wire. Examiner’s
Use
resistance
wire
I
A
contact C
2.0 V
l
5.0 1
Fig. 10.1
(a) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current I in the circuit to the
length l of the resistance wire.
I /A
0
0 l / cm
(b) Calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l is zero.
13
(c) Contact C is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 Ω. For
Examiner’s
Calculate Use
resistance = .................................................... Ω
(d) When l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).
(e) Which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?
heating
light
sound
magnetism [2]
[Total: 11]
14
11 (a) A particular radioactive source is known to emit either α-particles or β-particles. For
Examiner’s
Describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is Use
diagram
[1]
method
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of
80 minutes.
time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80
count-rate
400 228 128 80 44 16
counts / s
[Total: 7]
15
orbiting
particle
Fig. 12.1
(iii) Use nuclide notation, AZ X, to describe the nuclide in Fig. 12.1, writing appropriate
numbers in place of A and Z.
............
............ X [2]
[Total: 6]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2012 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures > 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(b) 60 – 50 C1
candidate’s (a) + or – 10 e.c.f. C1
86 (cm Hg) c.a.o. A1
3 (a) diagonal, top L to bottom R, drawn (accept any part of this diagonal) B1
(c) time M1
to raise basket up cliff A1
[Total: 6]
(c) arrow pointing to somewhere between RH end of bulb & –10 mark B1
[Total: 5]
9 (a) moves/deflects M1
momentary (or equivalent) OR goes back to zero/centre A1
11 (a) diagram:
source, solid absorber, detector shown in line B1
method:
distance between source & detector small/<5cm B1
take reading with no absorber B1
insert sheet of paper/aluminium (ignore thickness) B1
take reading with absorber present B1
identification:
if no/background reading with paper absorber, then α
OR if still get a reading, then β
B1
(NOTE no mark for identification based on Al absorber)
(ii) electron(s) B1
(ii) 2 B1
(iii) 4 at top B1
2 at bottom B1
[Total: 6]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core May/June 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 57150/1
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows how the speed of a truck varies during a period of 80 s. For
Examiner’s
Use
10
B C
8
speed
m/s 6 D
2
A
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
time / s
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw a line to show this part of the motion of the truck. [1]
[Total: 9]
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer that contains For
some trapped gas. Examiner’s
Use
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 6]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a rectangular block of wood on a flat, rough horizontal board. For
Examiner’s
Use
block of wood
pushed here
protractor
70 80 90 10
01
60 10
50 12
0
40 13
0
30
14
20
0
15
10
01
60 1
0
board
70 180
Fig. 3.1
The block is pushed at the top, as shown in Fig. 3.1, and it tilts to the right.
(a) On the front face of the block, draw the line that will be vertical at the instant before the
block topples over. [1]
(b) Use the protractor shown on Fig. 3.1 to measure the angle through which the block tilts
before it topples over.
(c) The block is put back on the board, as in Fig. 3.1. This time, instead of the block being
pushed, the left-hand edge of the board is raised.
State the angle that the board makes with the horizontal at the instant the block topples
over.
(d) State how your answer to (c) might differ if the procedure is repeated after several
centimetres have been cut off the top of the block.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12
PMT
4 Two geologists are collecting rocks from the bottom of a cliff. The rocks are loaded into a For
basket and then pulled up the cliff on the end of a rope, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The basket of Examiner’s
rocks is brought to rest at the top of the cliff. Use
............................................................. [1]
2. ...............................................................
[2]
Fig. 4.1
(c) State the measurement needed, in addition to those in (a)(ii), in order to calculate the
useful power developed by the man at the top of the cliff.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
5 The boy shown in Fig. 5.1 has just thrown a number of stones into a pond, one after the For
other. Fig. 5.1 shows the crests of the waves a short time after the stones landed in the Examiner’s
water. Use
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, mark with a cross the point where the stones hit the water. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section through the surface of the water before the stones land.
air
surface
water
Fig. 5.2
On Fig. 5.2, sketch what the section of the surface might look like at the instant shown
in Fig. 5.1. [2]
(c) Later, the boy throws a single stone into the water. Fig. 5.3 shows, from above, the For
position of the wavefront at 2 s, 4 s and 6 s after the stone landed. Examiner’s
Use
6s
4s
2s
Fig. 5.3
(i) From Fig. 5.3, what can be deduced about the speed of the wave?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 5.3, draw the wavefront 8 s after the stone landed. [2]
[Total: 7]
6 The liquid-in-glass thermometer in Fig. 6.1 has a scale from –10 °C to 110 °C. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 6.1
(a) Two of the temperatures marked on the thermometer are known as fixed points.
(b) The bulb of the thermometer shown in Fig. 6.1 is put into some boiling water.
(i) What happens to the liquid in the bulb when its temperature is raised?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) What is seen happening to the liquid in the capillary tube when the bulb is put in the
boiling water?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) On a certain day in a cold country, the air temperature is –12 °C.
On Fig. 6.1, use an arrow to show approximately where the surface of the liquid will be
at this temperature. [1]
[Total: 5]
7 A teacher is trying to find an unusual way to measure the speed of sound using an echo For
method. Examiner’s
Use
She has a firework, which will make a loud bang at ground level when ignited. She also has
a stopwatch and a tape measure.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) She stands a measured distance of 360 m from her chosen reflector and ignites the
firework in a safe manner.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) After she stops the stopwatch, its appearance is as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(i) Using this reading and the distance from (b), calculate the speed of sound in air.
(ii) Suggest one reason why the speed calculated in (c)(i) might not be quite correct.
Assume that the stopwatch and tape measure function correctly.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/M/J/12 [Turn over
PMT
10
8 (a) In terms of molecules, explain why solids expand when they are heated. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) State one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is a problem.
Describe how this problem is solved. You may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify
your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
(ii) Describe one example where the expansion or contraction of a solid is useful. You
may draw a diagram if it helps to clarify your answer.
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................
................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
11
9 A solenoid with many turns is connected across a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter, as For
shown in Fig. 9.1. Examiner’s
Use
sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter
magnet
N
solenoid S
Fig. 9.1
(a) The N pole of a magnet is moved into the solenoid, and then held stationary in the
solenoid.
Describe what happens to the needle of the millivoltmeter during this process.
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
12
10 A length of bare uniform resistance wire is included in the circuit of Fig. 10.1. Contact C can For
be moved to any position along the resistance wire. Examiner’s
Use
resistance
wire
I
A
contact C
2.0 V
l
5.0 1
Fig. 10.1
(a) On the axes of Fig. 10.2, sketch the graph that relates the current I in the circuit to the
length l of the resistance wire.
I /A
0
0 l / cm
(b) Calculate the reading on the ammeter when the length l is zero.
13
(c) Contact C is moved so that the resistance of the length l of the resistance wire is 15.0 Ω. For
Examiner’s
Calculate Use
resistance = .................................................... Ω
(d) When l = 25 cm, the reading on the ammeter is half that found in (b).
(e) Which of the following effects is caused by the current in the resistance wire?
heating
light
sound
magnetism [2]
[Total: 11]
14
11 (a) A particular radioactive source is known to emit either α-particles or β-particles. For
Examiner’s
Describe an experiment involving a solid absorber to determine which type of particle is Use
diagram
[1]
method
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The table below gives the count-rate obtained from a radioactive source over a period of
80 minutes.
time / minutes 0 15 30 42 58 80
count-rate
400 228 128 80 44 16
counts / s
[Total: 7]
15
orbiting
particle
Fig. 12.1
(iii) Use nuclide notation, AZ X, to describe the nuclide in Fig. 12.1, writing appropriate
numbers in place of A and Z.
............
............ X [2]
[Total: 6]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used. 1
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 2
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (SJF/CGW) 58289/4
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
BLANK PAGE
1 Some liquid is poured into the measuring cylinder shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cm3
250
50
200
150
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(b) On the enlarged part of Fig. 1.1, draw the liquid level when another 25 cm3 of liquid
has been added to the measuring cylinder. [1]
(c) Explain why it would be more accurate to use a narrower measuring cylinder to measure
liquid volumes like that in Fig. 1.1.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 3]
Fig. 2.1
500 bricks like the one shown in Fig. 2.1 are stacked on a wooden platform, known as
a pallet. The pallet of bricks is to be loaded on to a lorry by means of a fork-lift truck, as
shown in Fig. 2.2.
fork-lift truck
bricks
pallet
Fig. 2.2
Each brick has a volume of 0.0012 m3 and is made of a material of density 2300 kg / m3.
(ii) The fork-lift truck can safely lift a load of mass 2 tonnes (2000 kg). The wooden For
pallet has a mass of 100 kg. Examiner’s
Use
2. Is it safe for the fork-lift truck to lift the total mass of the pallet and 500 bricks?
yes
no
[3]
(b) The brick shown in Fig. 2.3 has the same dimensions as the brick in Fig. 2.1 and is
made of the same material. However, this brick has a hollow in one face.
hollow
Fig. 2.3
(i) The density of the brick in Fig. 2.3 is ……………………………………… the density
………………………………………………………….…………………………………. .
(ii) The mass of the brick in Fig. 2.3 is ……………………………………… the mass of
the brick in Fig. 2.1.
[2]
[Total: 8]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a man pulling a truck of logs at a constant speed along a level path from For
P to Q against a resistive (frictional) force. Examiner’s
Use
logs
truck
P Q
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the two quantities, and their units, that must be measured in order to calculate the
work done on the truck.
quantity unit
[2]
(b) State the additional quantity needed in order to calculate the useful power of the man.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On another occasion, there is a smaller number of logs in the truck. The resistive force
on the truck is smaller when the truck is pulled from P to Q at the same speed as
before.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(d) What form of energy stored in his body does the man use to pull the truck of logs?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What occupies the space in the tube, between the end of the liquid thread and the end
of the tube?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(i) State what happens to the position of the end of the liquid thread.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
5 A family goes on holiday in a car. To stop the journey being boring for the children, every half For
an hour they note down the distance they have travelled since they left home. They then plot Examiner’s
the graph shown in Fig. 5.1. Use
400
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time since leaving home / hours
Fig. 5.1
The first half hour and the last half hour of their journey are on small roads. The rest of the
journey is on major roads.
(a) For how many hours were they travelling on major roads?
(i) in total,
(c) They had two refreshment stops whilst on the journey. For
Examiner’s
On Fig. 5.1, clearly mark where they had these stops. [1] Use
(d) Apart from the times when they stopped, during which section of the journey was their
speed slowest? Explain your answer.
section ..............................................................................................................................
explanation .......................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) Calculate the average speed for the whole journey. Your answer must include the unit.
[Total: 11]
10
6 A manometer is being used to measure the pressure of the gas in a container, as shown in For
Fig. 6.1. Examiner’s
Use
container of gas
3 cm
oil
(a) (b)
before after
Fig. 6.1
(a) The appearance of the oil in the manometer before connecting it to the container is
shown in Fig. 6.1(a).
Explain why the oil levels are the same in both limbs of the manometer.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.1(b) shows the oil levels after connecting to the container.
By how much does the gas pressure in the container differ from atmospheric pressure?
Tick one box.
11
(c) When the gas in the container is heated, the pressure rises. For
Examiner’s
(i) What happens to the oil level Use
(ii) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas rises when it is heated.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
12
7 The apparatus in Fig. 7.1 is producing a visible spectrum from a filament lamp (white light For
source). Examiner’s
Use
screen
glass
prism
glass
lens
Y
visible spectrum
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 7.1
(a) Which two things is the lens in Fig. 7.1 doing to the light?
refracting
reflecting
converging
diverging [2]
(b) Which two things is the prism in Fig. 7.1 doing to the light?
diffracting
dispersing
focusing
refracting [2]
(c) Which colour light will be seen at point X, at the bottom edge of the visible spectrum?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
13
(d) A sensitive thermometer shows a small rise in temperature when held at point Y, just For
above the top edge of the visible spectrum. Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
14
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 is a ray diagram of parallel rays passing through a lens. For
Examiner’s
Use
A B
P F
Fig. 8.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 8.2 is another drawing of the same lens as in Fig. 8.1, with an object AX placed in
front of it.
A P F
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, draw two rays to locate the image of point X. Label this point Z.
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, draw in the image of AX, and label it “image”.
[4]
[Total: 6]
15
9 (a) Which electrical quantity is described as “the flow of charge”? Tick one box. For
Examiner’s
current Use
electromotive force
potential difference
power
resistance [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit in which switch S is open. The battery and ammeter have
resistances that can be ignored.
12 V
A
16 1 81
S
Fig. 9.1
(i) Switch S is closed.
Calculate
1. the combined resistance of the two resistors,
16
10 The circuit for adjusting the brightness of the lamp in the display panel of a car is shown in For
Fig. 10.1. Examiner’s
Use
B
S
brightness
control
12 V
panel
lamp
Fig. 10.1
The brightness control is uniformly wound with resistance wire and has a sliding contact S.
(a) State the name of the component used as the brightness control.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the potential difference across the panel lamp when
(c) Describe what happens to the brightness of the lamp as S is moved from A to B.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
17
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows the cross-section of a horizontal wire carrying a current. The wire is For
positioned between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet. Examiner’s
Use
current-carrying
wire
S N
Fig. 11.1
The wire is perpendicular to the page and the direction of the current is into the page.
There is a force on the wire due to the current being in a magnetic field. This magnetic
force balances the weight of the wire.
In which direction is the magnetic force on the wire? Tick one box.
18
(b) Two pieces of bare wire are fixed to terminals on a wooden board. A third piece of bare For
wire X rests on the other two and is free to move. Examiner’s
Use
fixed bare
wires X
Fig. 11.2
On Fig. 11.2, show how you would use the battery and the magnet to make X move
along the two fixed wires. [3]
[Total: 4]
19
In the right-hand column, state whether the particle has a positive charge or a negative
charge or no charge.
proton [2]
electron [2]
neutron [2]
[Total: 8]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1 (a) 15 ±1 (cm3) B1
(d) chemical B1
[Total: 7]
(d) (i) moves to the right (or equivalent e.g. goes higher/up/rises) B1
(ii) 30 (km) B1
(ii) PF B1
9 (a) current B1
(b) (i) 1. R1 + R2 OR 16 + 8 C1
24 (Ω) A1
2. V = I R in any form OR V / R C1
12 / 24 e.c.f. 1. C1
0.5 A1
A/amp/ampere(s) B1
2. 12 V B1
[Total: 9]
(ii) 12 (V) B1
(ii) electron B1
[Total: 8]
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1 (a) (i) use of 2.55 (or 1455) and 3.20 (or 1520) C1
25 (mins) A1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 7]
EITHER
measure length before and after
OR note position of bottom before and after M1
Subtract A1
OR
put ruler zero at bottom of spring M1
note reading of bottom after load applied A1
(v) doubles B1
directly proportional B1
NOT inversely/indirectly proportional
[Total: 10]
[Total: 4]
(ii) condensation B1
[Total: 5]
(b) (i) ray from top of object parallel to axis as far as lens, then down through F1
(ignore point of refraction, as long as somewhere on lens)
OR M1
ray from top of object, straight through centre of lens
(NOTE: ray need not intersect printed one to score M1)
image drawn perpendicularly between intersection of candidate’s rays and axis A1
[Total: 6]
7 (a)
switches closed
lamp that is lit
1 2 3 4 5
lamp A only
lamp B only B1
lamp C only B2
(c) (switch) 1 B1
[Total: 5]
(b) (i) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 4 C1
12 Ω A1
[Total: 10]
[Total: 7]
(ii) direction arrow correct (condone more than one unless any of them wrong) B1
(b) (i) basic pattern correct outside coil, four lines or more B1
lines present and continuous and not touching within core B1
(iii) solenoid B1
[Total: 8]
11 (a) gamma OR γ
beta OR β
alpha OR α
any 1 correct B1
other 2 correct B1
(ii) 2 B1
[Total: 6]
(ii) neutron(s) B1
[Total: 6]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NH/SW) 58288/5
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
1 The highlight of Super Academy’s athletics calendar is the end-of-year cross-country race. For
This is a circular race over a distance of 6.0 km. By tradition, it starts and ends below the Examiner’s
school clock tower. Use
Student Goodrunner is the school’s fastest athlete. His dream is to beat the school record for
the race, which is 26 minutes.
At the start of the race, the school clock looks as shown in Fig. 1.1.
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 1.1
As student Goodrunner crosses the finishing line, the school clock looks as shown in Fig. 1.2.
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) Calculate Goodrunner’s race time. Show your working. For
Examiner’s
Use
yes
no
[3]
[Total: 6]
2 A piece of stiff cardboard is attached to a plank of wood by two sticky-tape “hinges”, as For
shown in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
stiff
cardboard
sticky-tape “hinge”
plank of
wood
Fig. 2.1
(a) The cardboard in Fig. 2.1 is to be lifted by a vertical force F, so that it turns about the
hinges.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
On Fig. 2.1, show force F, positioned so that it fulfils this requirement. [1]
Fig. 2.2
(i) The left-hand edge of the cardboard is gradually raised. The box does not slide.
What will eventually happen to the box of matches as the edge is raised?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State where the centre of mass of the box is positioned when this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Filing cabinets often have a mechanism that prevents more than one drawer being For
opened at a time. Fig. 2.3 shows a filing cabinet standing on the floor with the middle Examiner’s
drawer open. Use
Fig. 2.3
State and explain why it might be dangerous to open the top drawer at the same time as
the middle drawer.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
3 (a) A spring is hung from a support. A load, hung on the spring, makes it extend. For
Examiner’s
Describe how you would use a ruler to measure the extension. Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) The lengths of the spring are found for loads of various weights. From these lengths, the
extensions are calculated. Most of the results are shown in the table below.
0 200 0
1.0 220 20
2.0 249 49
3.0 258
4.0 279 79
5.0 97
(i) Calculate the two missing values and insert them in the table. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, plot the values of extension against load, but do not draw the line yet.
[2]
120 For
Examiner’s
Use
100
extension / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
load / N
Fig. 3.1
(iv) Ignoring the value in (iii), draw the best-fit straight line through your points and the
origin. [1]
Within the limits of the experiment, when the load doubles, the extension of the spring
............................................................. .
The straight-line graph through the origin shows that the extension and the load are
............................................................. .
[2]
[Total: 10]
liquid
capillary tube
Fig. 4.1
(a) What is seen happening when the thermometer is put into a hot liquid?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) On Fig. 4.1, clearly mark with an arrow the point that the liquid will reach when the
thermometer is put in pure boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure. [1]
(d) State why it is necessary for the capillary tube to be very narrow.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
5 (a) The descriptions in the table below each give information about the molecules of a For
substance. Examiner’s
Use
In the space alongside each description, write the state of the substance being
described.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) when more molecules of a liquid are escaping from the surface than are returning
to it?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 5]
10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a converging lens with an object placed to one side of it. For
Examiner’s
Points F1 and F2 are the principal foci of the lens. Use
object F2 F1
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark the focal length of the lens, showing clearly where it starts and finishes.
[2]
(b) One ray has been drawn through the lens from the top of the object.
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw another ray to locate the image of the top of the object. Draw and
label the image of the whole object. [2]
(ii) State two ways in which this image differs from the object.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
11
7 A student has devised the circuit in Fig. 7.1 to control the lighting of three lamps, A, B and C. For
Examiner’s
Use
3 2
A
4
B
5
C
Fig. 7.1
More than one switch must be closed in order to light any lamp.
(a) In the table below, put ticks to indicate which switches must be closed in order to light
the lamps. The first row has been completed for you.
switches closed
lamp that is lit
1 2 3 4 5
lamp A only ✓ ✓ ✓
lamp B only
lamp C only
[3]
(c) Which one switch must be open to ensure that none of the lamps light up? ............... [1]
[Total: 5]
12
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit connected to a 6.0 V power supply. Ignore the resistance of the
power supply and the ammeter.
8.0 1
+
6.0 V A
–
4.0 1
Fig. 8.1
(ii) Calculate the current indicated by the ammeter. Your answer must include the unit.
13
(iii) The 8.0 Ω resistor is replaced by another resistor with a larger resistance. For
Examiner’s
Without further calculation, state the effect this has on Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
14
9 (a) A transformer consists of two coils of insulated wire, wound on a core. For
Examiner’s
State a suitable material from which to make Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is used to enable the 6.0 V lamp to be lit at normal brightness
using a 240 V mains supply.
A
240 V 6.0 V
mains lamp
B
800 turns
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil has 800 turns. The secondary coil is connected to terminals A and B.
(c) A technician wishes to use the transformer in Fig. 9.1 to light three 6.0 V lamps.
(i) What would happen to the lamps if the technician connected them directly across
the mains supply?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
15
(ii) On Fig. 9.2 below, show how the three lamps should be connected to terminals For
A and B, so that they all light with normal brightness Examiner’s
Use
A
240 V
mains
B
800 turns
Fig. 9.2
[1]
[Total: 7]
16
N S
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around the magnet, ignoring
the Earth’s magnetic field.
(ii) On one of your lines, draw an arrowhead to show the direction of the field.
[4]
17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a coil wound on a hollow cardboard tube. There is a current in the coil. For
Examiner’s
Use
current
cardboard
tube
Fig. 10.2
(i) On Fig. 10.2, carefully draw the magnetic field pattern around and through the coil.
You do not need to use arrows to show any directions. [2]
(ii) Suggest one material that could be inserted into the tube to increase the strength
of the magnetic field.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) What name is given to a current-carrying coil used to provide a magnetic field?
Tick one box.
capacitor
potentiometer
relay
solenoid [1]
[Total: 8]
18
11 (a) The emissions from some radioactive sources are tested. For
Examiner’s
Use the information in the table below to deduce the types of the emissions being Use
described.
yes no
no no
[2]
It will take x /2 seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.
It will take 2x seconds for all of the atoms in the sample to decay.
[1]
(c) The number of atoms of a radioactive nuclide in a sample decreases with time, as
shown in Fig. 11.1.
5000
4000
number of
3000
atoms
2000
1000
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 11.1
19
(i) Use Fig. 11.1 to find the time taken for the number of atoms to decrease from 4000 For
to 1000. Examiner’s
Use
time = ..................................................... s
(ii) How many half-lives elapse as the number of atoms decreases from 4000 to 1000?
..................................................................................................................................
half-life = ..................................................... s
[3]
[Total: 6]
20
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which two of these types of particle are found in the nucleus?
These are 35 37
17Cl and 17Cl.
(i) What does the number 17 tell us about the nuclei of chlorine atoms?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig.fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(ii) division by 50 C1
3.94(s) OR 3.9(s) OR 4(s) OR 4.0(s) e.c.f. (a)(i) A1
[Total: 7]
2 (a) mercury B1
[Total: 6]
(ii) 0(°C) B1
[Total: 7]
[Total: 10]
(b) attractive B1
(d) no force B1
[Total: 5]
7 transverse
longitudinal both B1
longitudinal B1
transverse B1
[Total: 3]
[Total: 9]
2. lamp lights C1
full/normal brightness OR as designed, e.c.f. from 1. A1
[Total: 9]
(ii) increase B1
(iii) decrease B1
[Total: 5]
(ii) 1. all absorbed by foil or none reach detector or none penetrates foil B1
2. none absorbed by foil/ (rate) not altered/affected by thickness B1
[Total: 5]
(ii) 238 B1
(b) (i) 1. 4 B1
2. 2 B1
(c) (i) 92 B1
[Total: 8]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core May/June 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
Electronic calculators may be used. 1
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use
appropriate units. 2
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
3
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or 4
part question.
5
10
11
12
Total
DC (LEO/JG) 58286/4
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
1 Small drops of water fall at regular intervals from a leaking tap (faucet). For
Examiner’s
Use
tap
(faucet)
Fig. 1.1
Immediately after a drop has fallen, a student puts an empty measuring cylinder under the
tap, to catch the drops.
Fig. 1.2 shows the reading on the stopwatch at the start and finish of this experiment.
time at start
02:57
minutes seconds
time at finish
06:14
minutes seconds
Fig. 1.2
Fig. 1.3
(a) (i) For how many seconds did the girl catch drops from the tap?
(ii) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a simple barometer. The vertical tube is fixed in position. For
Examiner’s
Use
tube
25 cm
liquid
75 cm
reservoir 5 cm
Fig. 2.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) What occupies the space in the tube, above the liquid?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) The tube is accidentally knocked at the top, so that a small crack is caused at the top of
the tube. Air leaks in through the crack.
Describe what effect, if any, this has on the level of the liquid in the tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
3 The arrows on Fig. 3.1 indicate the changes between the three states of matter. For
Examiner’s
Use
melting
condensation
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, two of the changes have been labelled. In the empty boxes, label the other
two changes. [2]
(b) In terms of molecules and temperatures, describe what happens during melting.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) At what temperature does solid water (ice) turn back to liquid water?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
4 (a) Explain why metals are able to conduct electricity well, whereas insulators, like plastic, For
are very poor conductors. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) A plastic rod is rubbed with a dry cloth, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
plastic rod
dry cloth
Fig. 4.1
After this, the rod is held close to a girl’s long hair. The hair is attracted to the rod.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
X A A Y
3.0 1 5.0 1
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Calculate the current in the circuit. Your answer must include the unit.
1. ammeter X, ......................................................
2. ammeter Y. ......................................................
[1]
(c) (i) On Fig. 5.1 show a voltmeter connected to record the potential difference across
the resistor. Use the standard symbol for a voltmeter. [2]
[Total: 10]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) The technician places two magnets on a bench, in the positions shown in Fig. 6.1.
N S N S
Fig. 6.1
Which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnets? Tick one
box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
(c) The technician now places an unmagnetised iron rod between the magnets, as shown
in Fig. 6.2.
N S N S
iron rod
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, label the N pole and the S pole induced on the iron rod. [1]
(d) Finally, the technician places one magnet and a charged plastic rod on the bench, as For
shown in Fig. 6.3. Examiner’s
Use
N S +
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 6.3
Which of the following describes the magnetic force between the magnet and the rod?
Tick one box.
attractive
repulsive
no force [1]
[Total: 5]
Write either “transverse” or “longitudinal” in the space alongside each of the following
descriptions.
[Total: 3]
10
8 (a) An electric bell hangs from flexible wires inside a glass bell-jar, as shown in Fig. 8.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
to battery
electric
bell
bell-jar
to vacuum
pump
Fig. 8.1
(i) When air is present in the bell-jar, the electric bell can be heard ringing clearly.
What properties of sound does this observation illustrate? Tick the box alongside
any appropriate answer.
(ii) As the vacuum pump removes the air from the bell-jar, the sound becomes quieter.
Eventually the sound cannot be heard at all, even though the bell can still be seen
to be working.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
11
(b) Fig. 8.2 illustrates a quarry where rock blasting is being carried out. For
Examiner’s
Use
P Z
Y
X
DANGER -
BLASTING
Fig. 8.2
An engineer at P sees the blast of an explosion at X, and after a short delay he hears
two bangs separated by a very short interval.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) The distance PX is 195 m and the short delay between seeing the blast and hearing
the first bang is 0.60 s.
[Total: 9]
12
9 (a) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is being used in an attempt to light a lamp using a 120 V a.c. For
mains supply. The lamp is designed for use in a country where the mains supply is Examiner’s
240 V a.c. Use
120 V lamp
a.c.
Fig. 9.1
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The transformer is reversed, so that the 300 turn coil is connected to the 120 V a.c.
supply and the 150 turn coil is connected to the lamp.
Comment on the brightness of the lamp in this arrangement. Explain your answer.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
13
(b) In the National Grid system of electrical energy transmission, a transformer links the For
power station to the transmission cables, as shown in Fig. 9.2. Examiner’s
Use
transmission cables
power
station transformer
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) What has to be done at the other end of the transmission cables, before connection
is made to a factory in a town?
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]
14
10 Fig. 10.1 illustrates the energy into and out of a machine. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 10.1
[1]
(b) Which of these three quantities needs to be as low as possible in order to keep the
efficiency of the machine as high as possible?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
15
11 (a) The α-particle source in Fig. 11.1 is placed 1 cm from a radiation detector connected to For
a ratemeter. The ratemeter gives a count-rate reading of 600 counts / min. Examiner’s
Use
60 0
1 cm
ratemeter
_–source detector
Fig. 11.1
The source is then moved to a distance of 50 cm from the detector and the count-rate
reading on the ratemeter becomes 25 counts / min.
Predict what the count-rate will be when the source is moved to a distance of 100 cm
from the detector. Explain your answer.
explanation ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows aluminium being rolled into a thin sheet suitable for cooking foil.
β-particles are being used to monitor and control the thickness of the foil.
source of
aluminium rollers `-particles
aluminium
detector foil
Fig. 11.2
(i) An adjustment to the rollers is made and the foil becomes thicker.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Assuming that all suitable safety precautions are taken, explain
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
16
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(i) State
1. X ...................................... ,
2. Y ...................................... .
[2]
(c) (i) How many electrons are to be found in a neutral atom of 238U? .......................
92
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE Advanced
Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
o.w.t.t.e. means “or words to that effect”.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(37.1 – 2.1 =) 35 C1
35 / 7 C1
(ii) (vertical) spacing not uniform / equal OR points not on a straight line
OR points do not line up OR difference in gradients between points B1
[Total: 7]
11(.0) (cm) A1
2. 0.8 (cm) B1
200 g / 0.2 kg A1
[Total: 6]
(d) Brownian B1
[Total: 7]
4 (a) greater pressure from man OR man will fall through ice OR ice will break / crack B1
5 (a) 74 (°C) B1
[Total: 7]
(ii) i = r B1
(iv) image / ray moves / misses eye OR viewer can no longer see
image / ray / anything OR viewer sees inside of tube OR angle of
incidence / reflection changes B1
(iii) incident ray through principal focus AND emergent ray parallel to axis B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
6 / 10 C1
0.6 A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
OR potential divider B1
(ii) neat, correct circuit with one added component in series with lamp B1
[Total: 9]
OR
repels (M1)
(c) (i) S N B1
[Total: 8]
10 (a) iron B1
correct substitution C1
12 (V) A1
[Total: 4]
11 (a) alpha OR α B2
beta OR β
gamma OR γ
in any order
if two correct, 1 mark
(ii) alpha OR α B1
(iii) alpha OR α B1
(c) (i) 2 B1
6 × 1010 B1
[Total: 9]
12 (a) 17 B1
(b) 20 B1
(c) 17 B1
[Total: 3]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge Interna ional Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81302/5
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
1 A gardener studies the growth of one of his plants. At the same time each day, he measures the
height h of the top of the plant from the ground, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
(a) From the values in the table, deduce the average speed of growth of the plant during the
7 days. Work in days and cm.
(b) (i) Complete Fig. 1.2 by plotting the last three values of height h against time. Do not draw a
line through the points.
40
30
h / cm
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8
time / days
[2]
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Describe how the graph shows that the speed of growth of the plant is not constant.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
spring
load
Fig. 2.1
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When the graph of extension against load is drawn for the spring, the result is the line shown
in Fig. 2.2.
extension / cm
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
1. Calculate the total length of the spring when a 5.0 N load is hanging from the spring.
mass = ..................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
3 The apparatus in Fig. 3.1 is being used to view the movement of some smoke particles trapped in
a box.
microscope
air molecules
and
light smoke particles
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the smoke is viewed through the microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In the space below, sketch how one smoke particle might move during a short interval of time.
[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) What name is used for this motion of the smoke particles? Complete the sentence.
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/21/M/J/14
PMT
4 A young boy, skating on a frozen pond, has fallen through some thin ice about 10 m from the shore
of the pond. Fig. 4.1 shows the situation.
Fig. 4.1
A man, standing near the pond, hears the boy’s shouts for help.
(a) Why would it be unsafe for the man to walk on the ice to rescue the boy?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Suggest and explain what the man could do to cross the ice to reach the boy safely.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 5.1
(a) The bulb of the thermometer is placed in pure, boiling water at standard atmospheric pressure.
(b) During the day, the temperature in the laboratory rises. In the late afternoon a thermometer
attached to the ceiling records a higher temperature than a thermometer placed close to the
ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
Describe what can be seen happening to the liquid in a thermometer as the temperature falls,
and explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) On Fig. 5.1, draw an arrow to show where the end of the liquid thread might be seen when the
temperature being measured is −15°C. [1]
[Total: 7]
Fig. 6.1 shows the path of a ray of light through a periscope, without the tube.
mirror A
normal
normal
mirror B
Fig. 6.1
1. use the letter i to indicate clearly the angle of incidence of the ray striking mirror A,
2. use the letter r to indicate clearly the angle of reflection of the ray leaving mirror A.
[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
10
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a converging lens. The lens has one principal focus at F1 and the other principal
focus at F2.
principal
axis
F2 F1
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, clearly mark two distances that are each the focal length of the lens. [1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw a ray on the left side of the lens, which strikes the lens, above and
parallel to the principal axis. Label this ray: ray 1.
Continue this ray to show its path through the lens and at least 6 cm to the right of the
lens. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 6.2, draw a ray that emerges from the lens, below and parallel to the principal
axis. Label this ray: ray 2.
Show clearly the path of this ray before it reached the lens. [1]
[Total: 8]
11
7 In Fig. 7.1, XY is a copper rod placed between the N and S poles of a magnet.
N S
X
A B
Fig. 7.1
(b) When there is no current, the pointer on the instrument points half-way between A and B.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) moved repeatedly up and down at right angles to the magnetic field.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Suggest one electrical device that makes use of the effect demonstrated in (b).
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
12
S1
S2
6.0 V 10 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the current in the lamp when both S1 and S2 are open.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Calculate the current in the lamp, stating the unit of your answer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The student decides that she would like to be able to vary the brightness of the lamp.
(i) Name an electrical component that she could add to the circuit to do this.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
13
(ii) In the space below, redraw the circuit of Fig. 8.1, including the component for varying the
lamp brightness.
[2]
[Total: 9]
14
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Use words from the following list to answer the three questions below.
attractive force
repulsive force
no force
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows an iron bar placed close to the N pole of a bar magnet.
magnet iron
bar
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, write N and S, to indicate the induced poles in the iron bar. [1]
(ii) Use a word from the list in (b) to describe the force between the magnet and the iron bar.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
Describe the force that now exists between the magnet and the iron bar.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
15
Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that has a primary coil with 1000 turns and a secondary coil with
50 turns.
core
secondary coil
50 turns
primary coil
1000 turns
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the material from which the core of the transformer is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
16
210
11 Polonium-210 ` 84 Poj is radioactive.
(a) Name three types of emission from radioactive sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State which of these radiations
(iii) How many particles are emitted from the polonium-210 during this time?
[Total: 9]
12 One nuclide of chlorine has 35 nucleons and the other nuclide of chlorine has 37 nucleons. The
proton number of chlorine is 17.
(a) How many protons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-35? ................................................
(b) How many neutrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37? ..............................................
(c) How many electrons are there in a neutral atom of chlorine-37? ..............................................
[3]
[Total: 3]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT
½ × 40 × 8 C1
160 (m) A1
(5.9) 38(m/s) A1
[Total: 9]
62.4 Q 80 C1
0.78 OR 780 A1
g / cm3 OR kg / m3 as appropriate B1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 5]
[Total: 5]
[Total: 7]
330 / 5000 C1
other man hears two sounds OR 1 through air and 1 through rail B1
NOT hears two sounds, one is an echo
[Total: 6]
correct distance A1
(b) (i) correct idea e.g. crest to crest NOT just 2 peaks marked C1
[Total: 7]
(iii) iron B1
in one direction B1
OR (alternative answer)
place in solenoid / coil (B1)
[Total: 6]
24 (Ω) A1
2. V R IR in any form OR V / R C1
12 / 24 e.c.f. C1
0.5 e.c.f. A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
[Total: 10]
(b) (i) transformer shown with one coil across input and other coil across output
accept any reasonable attempt at transformer symbol B1
1:2 OR 1 to 2 A1
(c) (i) resistor shown joining top two wires or bottom two wires M1
accept diagonal connection
[Total: 7]
11 (a) 23 B1
(b) 11 B1
(c) 12 B1
[Total: 4]
12 (a) 4 (hours) B1
appropriate indication of method (minimum indication any halving of count rate on axis
or curve) B1
(iii) in the range 62 – 63, e.c.f. from (b) (i) and (b)(ii) B1
[Total: 5]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge Interna ional Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81309/4
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the motion of a bus along a road.
10
9
speed
m/s
8
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / s
Fig. 1.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
2 A student has been told to find the density of some liquid paraffin by measuring its mass and its
volume.
(a) Which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to measure the volume of the liquid
paraffin?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Which piece of laboratory equipment should she use to find the mass of the liquid paraffin?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe the procedure she would follow in order to find the mass.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
density = ..................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
3 A rowing boat is moving through water, in the direction shown in Fig. 3.1.
upthrust
drag
oar
movement of
boat
forward
thrust weight
Fig. 3.1
The forward thrust is the force that drives the boat through the water, and is caused by the action
of the oars.
(a) The boat is floating. What can be said about the upthrust and the weight?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain why it is important that the weight is not greater than the upthrust.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Describe what happens to the boat when the forward thrust is greater than the drag.
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) Describe what happens to the moving boat when the oars are out of the water and the forward
thrust is zero.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
4 A metal tyre for a wooden wheel is made from an iron ring. This is shown in Fig. 4.1.
wooden wheel
iron ring
joints
Fig. 4.1
The iron ring is made slightly too small to fit on the wheel.
(a) Explain why heating the iron ring will help it fit on the wheel.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the particles in the iron ring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain what will happen to the iron ring after it has been fitted on the wheel and left to cool.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Suggest what happens to the joints in the wooden wheel after fitting the iron ring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
5 (a) A copper rod and a plastic rod each pass through holes in rubber bungs, so that their ends
are inside a tank, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
hot rubber
water bung
copper rod
plastic rod
Fig. 5.1
Both rods are covered with wax.
Very hot water is poured into the tank, covering the end of each rod.
(i) What, if anything, is seen happening on the rods during the next few minutes?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of particles, how evaporation causes the hot water to cool.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
(a) Calculate the time taken for a sound to travel the length of the rail.
As shown in Fig. 6.1, a man puts his right ear against one end of the rail. Another man strikes
the other end of the rail with a hammer.
hammer
hits rail
330 m
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 6]
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 7.1
(i) On Fig. 7.1, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave. [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
direction of
wave travel
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, mark carefully a distance that represents the wavelength of the wave. [1]
(ii) Describe the change that would need to be made to Fig. 7.2 in order to show a wave of
bigger amplitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
10
(c) Fig. 7.3 shows a cross-section through the water wave as it moves into a shallow region and
then out of the shallow region.
piece of plastic
Fig. 7.3
(i) the amplitude of the wave as it moves into the shallow region,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the wavelength of the wave as it moves into the shallow region.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
11
aluminium
copper
ebonite
glass
gold
iron
plastic
silk
(b) Describe briefly a method for magnetising a sample of the substance named in (a)(iii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
12
9 The electric circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains a battery, two resistors, a switch and another
component.
12 V
A
16.0 Ω 8.0 Ω
S
Fig. 9.1
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Which quantity does this instrument measure? Tick one box.
charge
current
potential difference
power
[1]
13
(i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current? Tick one box.
charge
potential difference
power
resistance
[1]
current = ..................................................[4]
(c) When the switch is open, what is the potential difference across the 16 Ω resistor? Tick one
box.
12 V
8.0 V
6.0 V
0V
[1]
[Total: 10]
14
10 A laboratory technician has a 12 V a.c. power supply. He wishes to use it to light a 6.0 V, 1.5 Ω
lamp, using either a transformer or a resistor.
(a) State what will happen if he connects the lamp directly to the 12 V power supply.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Using a standard transformer symbol, complete the circuit in Fig. 10.1 to show how the
transformer could be used to light the lamp at normal brightness.
12 V 6.0 V 1.5 Ω
input lamp
a.c.
[1]
Fig. 10.1
ratio = ..................................................[2]
(c) (i) Complete the circuit in Fig. 10.2 to show how a single resistor could be connected so that
the lamp lights at normal brightness.
12 V 6.0 V 1.5 Ω
input lamp
a.c.
[2]
Fig. 10.2
(ii) State the value of the resistance that is needed for the lamp to light at normal brightness.
[Total: 7]
15
23
11 One nuclide of sodium is represented in nuclide notation as 11 Na .
23
For one neutral atom of 11 Na , state
[Total: 4]
16
12 Fig. 12.1 shows how the count rate from a radioactive specimen changes with time.
count rate
counts / minute
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 time / hours
Fig. 12.1
(a) Use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive material. Make clear marks on the
graph to show how you obtained the answer.
(b) Measurements are made over the same period of time for another specimen of the same
material as the specimen in (a). The second specimen has half as many radioactive atoms at
time zero.
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1850 / 15 C1
areas calculated C1
400 (m) A1
[Total: 13]
of X and Y C1
subtract X from Y A1
[Total: 4]
(ii) increases B1
(iv) increases B1
[Total: 6]
(d) water would squirt out / not dense enough / tube would need to be (very) long (so
not practical)
accept not very dense, less dense than mercury B1
[Total: 7]
[Total: 3]
[Total: 7]
7 (a) spectrum B1
OR colours
OR ROYGBIV
OR red at top / A and violet / blue at bottom
[Total: 6]
[Total: 5]
(ii) 1. copper B1
correct substitution C1
200 A1
[Total: 7]
(ii) moves M1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) voltmeter B1
1.9 / 0.038 C1
50 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) B1
[Total: 9]
(d) (i) 84 B1
(ii) 40 B1
(iii) 44 B1
[Total: 6]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core May/June 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/JG) 81311/4
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
A flood B
1850 m
Fig. 1.1
The motorcyclist passes over the minor crossroads at A at 15 m / s and, for most of the distance
between A and B, he continues at 15 m / s.
The road is flooded at one point, so he has to slow down to ride through the water. He also slows
down and stops at the major crossroads at B.
(a) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the journey between A and B.
15
speed
m/s
0
0 time [5]
Fig. 1.2
(i) If the motorcyclist had been able to maintain 15 m / s all the way from A to B, calculate the
total time the ride would have taken.
(ii) Suggest how the actual time taken from A to B compares with your value in (b)(i). Tick
one box.
(c) The motorcyclist completes another journey. The speed-time graph for this journey is shown
in Fig. 1.3.
25
20
speed 15
m/s
10
5
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.3
Use the graph to determine the distance travelled by the motorcyclist during this journey.
[Total: 13]
2 A spring is attached to the underside of the edge of a bench. A metre rule is fixed next to it, as
shown in Fig. 2.1.
bench top
X spring
pin
Y
metre
rule
load L
When a load of weight L is hanging on the spring, the marker pin is at Y, as shown in Fig. 2.2.
(a) Describe how you would determine the value of the extension of the spring caused by the
load.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 2.3, sketch the graph you would expect to be able to obtain as the spring is gradually
stretched from X to Y.
length
0
0 load L
[1]
Fig. 2.3
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14
PMT
3 A wheel F on an axle is free to rotate about a horizontal axis, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
P
F
axle
Fig. 3.1
String S has a loop on one end, which is hooked over peg P on the axle. The string is wound
several times around the axle, and has a weight W attached to the other end.
W is released and accelerates downwards. The string comes off the peg just as W reaches the
ground.
(b) What happens to the kinetic energy of W when it hits the ground?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What happens to the kinetic energy of F after W hits the ground?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
mm
300
250
200
from a
gas supply
150
100
50
0
mercury
Fig. 4.1
(b) (i) Is the pressure of the gas from the supply greater than or less than atmospheric pressure,
and how do you know?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) By how much is the gas pressure greater or less than atmospheric pressure?
(c) The gas supply is turned off. The rubber tube connecting the manometer to the gas supply is
disconnected, so that both ends of the manometer are open to the atmosphere.
What are the new readings of the mercury levels in each column?
(d) Suggest why water could not be used in this manometer to measure the gas pressure from
the supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
In order to keep the drink hot whilst he eats the rest of his meal, he covers the cup, as shown in
Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Which sources of energy loss does this action reduce? Tick two boxes.
(b) Suggest one other way that the workman can help to keep the drink hot while he eats the rest
of his meal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 3]
6 A laboratory worker hears the sound from a loudspeaker, as illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
signal generator
amplitude
frequency
Fig. 6.1
The amplitude control knob and the frequency control knob on the signal generator are set so that
the worker hears a particular note from the loudspeaker.
(a) The two control knobs are left untouched but the worker stands further away from the
loudspeaker.
What difference, if any, does this make to the sound heard by the worker?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) What difference, if any, does it make to the note heard by the worker if
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Describe what happens to the air in order for the sound from the loudspeaker to reach the
laboratory worker’s ear.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
10
7 A filament lamp emits white light, which passes through a small hole in a card. The light spreads
out from the hole, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
screen
glass
prism
glass P
lens
card B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 7.1
The light from the hole then passes through a glass lens and a glass prism, and finally reaches a
screen.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In Fig. 7.1, what two things are shown happening to the light at surface PQ? Tick two boxes.
diffraction
dispersion
reflection
refraction
[2]
11
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows the same arrangement as in Fig. 7.1, but with the prism removed.
screen
glass
lens
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the rays until they reach the screen. [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a lens, to the left of which is a vertical object AX with one end on the principal axis.
A P F
Fig. 8.1
(b) (i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a ray from the top of the object X, which is parallel to the principal axis.
Continue this ray at least 6 cm after the lens, to show its path through the air on the other
side of the lens. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, draw another ray that will enable you to locate the image of X. Label this
image with the letter Y. [2]
[Total: 5]
13
(b) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 is connected to a 240 V mains supply, and is being used to light a
6.0 V lamp connected between A and B.
A
240 V 6.0 V
mains lamp
supply
B
Fig. 9.1
(i) What name is given to the part of the transformer that is shown on Fig. 9.1 as being
made of iron?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil in order to provide 6.0 V
between A and B.
3. Suggest one difference that is seen in the appearance of the lamp when the mains
supply voltage is reduced to 120 V.
.................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2014 0625/23/M/J/14 [Turn over
PMT
14
10 A positively charged plastic ball is suspended on an insulating nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
nylon thread
positively
charged
plastic ball
negatively
charged rod
Fig. 10.1
A negatively charged plastic rod is brought towards the positively charged ball.
(a) (i) Describe how the rod might have been given its charge.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Describe what is seen happening to the ball as the rod is brought near to it.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State the reason for what you have described in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
15
An identical plastic ball is suspended on another nylon thread of equal length, so that the
balls are a short distance from each other. The second ball is also given a positive charge.
In the space below, sketch how the two balls and their threads will hang.
[2]
[Total: 7]
16
11 In an attempt to measure the current in a lamp and a resistor, a student connects the circuit shown
in Fig. 11.1.
Fig. 11.1
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) When the lamp fails to light, she realises that she has used the wrong instrument to measure
the current.
(i) With which instrument should she replace it, in order to be able to measure the current?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) In the space below, redraw the circuit of Fig. 11.1, but with the correct instrument in the
[2]
17
(c) When the circuit is working correctly, the student records that the potential difference across
the cell is 1.9 V and that the current in the circuit is 0.038 A.
(i) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the resistor. State the unit.
resistance = ...................................................[4]
(ii) The positions in the circuit of the lamp and the resistor are interchanged, as shown in
Fig. 11.2. The measuring instruments are not shown.
Fig. 11.2
What difference, if any, does interchanging the components make to the value of the
current? Tick one box.
[Total: 9]
18
12 A dish contains a sample of radioactive powder. The half-life of the radioactive substance is known
to be 26 minutes. It decays by β-particle emission.
A radiation detector, held close to the powder, records a count rate of 800 counts / min, after
subtraction of the background count rate.
A time of 26 minutes is allowed to elapse after recording the 800 counts / min count rate. A new
count rate is then taken.
(b) How many radioactive atoms of the original type remain in the sample after the 26 minutes
have elapsed? Tick one box.
(c) How many atoms in total remain in the sample after 26 minutes has elapsed? Tick one box.
84
For one atom of 40 Zr , state
[Total: 6]
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working
is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated “e.c.f.”
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous with spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection/refraction/diffraction or
thermistor/transistor/transformer.
Sig. figs. On this paper, answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures
≥2, except where the mark scheme specifies otherwise or gives an answer to only 1
significant figure.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are awarded for specific units.
Extras If a candidate gives more answers than required, irrelevant extras are ignored; for
extras which contradict an otherwise correct response, or are forbidden by the mark
scheme, use right plus wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a
right plus wrong penalty.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(b) 7.7 ÷ 20 C1
0.385 (cm) OR 0.39 (cm) A1
[Total: 5]
2 (a) 40 (km) B1
[Total: 7]
[Total: 7]
4 chemical B1
kinetic B1
thermal B1
sound B1
[Total: 4]
[Total: 7]
molecules closer B1
[Total: 7]
2. convection B1
[Total: 8]
(ii) normal B1
[Total: 5]
(e) 50 × 5 C1
250 V A1
[Total: 10]
(c) steel B1
[Total: 7]
11 (a) transverse waves OR travel at same (high) speed OR travel across a vacuum B1
(d) (i) medical imaging OR security scanning (at airports etc.) OR dentistry
OR finding defects in welding B1
[Total: 6]
775 ± 75 A1
(c) initial count rate halved OR pair of count rates indicating halving C1
at least one corresponding time from graph C1
20 days ± 2 days A1
[Total: 7]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (NF/SW) 90323/2
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
Fig. 1.1 shows the student measuring the height of the stack using a ruler.
cm
15
eye
10
5
stack of
20 coins
Fig. 1.1
(a) With his eye at the position shown, the student’s measurement of the height of the stack is
6.8 cm.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Another student correctly determines the height of the stack as 7.7 cm.
[Total: 5]
(b) The car in Fig. 2.1 is travelling along a road on which there is a speed detector.
The speed detector consists of two parallel strips attached to the road and connected to a
timer.
speed
detector
strips
Fig. 2.1
The speed detector strips are 0.50 m apart. The time interval between the car hitting the first
strip and the second strip is 0.040 s.
(c) (i) A car is travelling at a speed of 15 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and brings the car
to a stop.
16
14
12
speed
m / s 10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
time / s
Fig. 2.2
(ii) On another occasion, the car is travelling at the same speed of 15 m / s when the driver
sees a hazard ahead. She uses emergency braking to stop the car in 2.0 seconds.
On Fig. 2.2, draw the speed-time graph for the emergency stop. [1]
[Total: 7]
Fig. 3.1
The mass of the chair is less on the Moon but not zero.
(b) The student tips his chair back to the position shown in Fig. 3.2.
centre of mass of
student and chair
Fig. 3.2
(i) State and explain how the pressure exerted by the chair on the floor in Fig. 3.2 compares
with the pressure exerted by the chair in Fig. 3.1.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Explain why the chair will topple over backwards. You may draw on Fig. 3.2 as part of
your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
BLANK PAGE
11 12 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 6 5
Fig. 4.1
The battery stores ...................................... energy. When the battery is first connected, electrical
energy is transferred to ...................................... energy of the clock’s hands. Some of the electrical
energy is transferred to the surroundings as ...................................... energy. When the alarm bell
[Total: 4]
10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows four traces produced by an oscilloscope for different sounds. For each trace
the same settings of the oscilloscope were used.
A B C D
Fig. 5.1
(i) In the box, write the letter A, B, C or D of the trace showing the sound with the highest
pitch.
[1]
The two traces that have the same amplitude are ......... and ......... . [1]
(b) Students are provided with a 100 m tape measure and stopwatches. The teacher has a
starting pistol.
Describe an experiment that they can carry out to determine the speed of sound in air.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15
PMT
11
6 A round-bottomed flask is connected to a mercury manometer. The air inside the flask is warm.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 6.1.
mm
500
400
mercury
300
air
200
100
Fig. 6.1
(a) (i) State the scale reading for the left-hand column.
(i) State what happens to the pressure of the air inside the flask as the air cools.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) In terms of the air molecules, state two ways in which the air changes as it cools.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15 [Turn over
PMT
12
to taps
metal
storage
water tank
jacket heater
from
water
supply
Fig. 7.1
(i) Name the process by which water in contact with the heater becomes hot.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) 1. Explain how the water at the top of the storage tank becomes hot. Include the word
density in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Hot water storage tanks are often covered in a material such as polystyrene or a ‘jacket’ made
from a woollen material.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons why the use of such a material is important.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2015 0625/21/M/J/15
PMT
13
8 (a) A ray of red light passes through a glass block, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
air
glass
Fig. 8.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A roadside reflector is made of plastic. It reflects the light from car headlamps.
Fig. 8.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through the reflector.
A roadside
45° reflector
45°
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, complete the path of the ray of light. [1]
(ii) State the term used to describe this type of reflection.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
14
Fig. 9.1
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The heater has three identical heating elements, a fan driven by a motor and a lamp.
Name the components that are working when switch A only is closed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The heater has two switches, B and C, to give high, medium and low heat settings.
Identify how each heat setting is obtained. Complete the table by adding ticks to represent a
closed switch.
(d) Write down the equation that relates resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
15
(e) The current in one of the heating elements is 5.0 A. The resistance of the heating element
is 50 Ω.
Calculate the p.d. across the heating element. Include the appropriate unit.
(f) Explain how the component with the symbol protects the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
16
(b) A student has 3 metal bars which all look the same. Two of the metal bars are magnets and
one is not.
Explain how the student can identify the two magnets without using any other equipment.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) From the metals given in (a), state the name of the metal that can be used to make a
permanent magnet.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Fig. 10.1 shows a vertical wire passing through a horizontal piece of card.
wire
Fig. 10.1
There is a direct current (d.c.) in the wire. The current produces a magnetic field around the
wire.
(i) Name a piece of equipment that can be used to investigate the magnetic field produced
by the current-carrying wire.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
17
(ii) Fig. 10.2 shows the wire and the card viewed from above.
vertical
wire
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, carefully draw two complete field lines produced by the current-carrying
wire. [1]
[Total: 7]
18
Fig. 11.1
(a) Identify one feature that is the same for all radiations that form the electromagnetic spectrum.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces between visible light and radio waves by adding the names of the
radiations. [2]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
19
In a laboratory, the count rate from a sample of the contaminated water is measured every 10 days.
The results are shown in the table.
time / days 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
count rate
3250 2300 1650 1200 980 550 400 320
counts / s
(a) On Fig. 12.1, complete the graph by plotting the first three points and drawing the best-fit
curve. [2]
3500
3000
2500
count-rate
counts / s 2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / days
Fig. 12.1
Circle this point on the graph and estimate the correct count rate for this day.
(c) Use the graph to determine the half-life of the radioactive element. Ignore background
radiation.
[Total: 7]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in he Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working
is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated “e.c.f.”
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous with spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection/refraction/diffraction or
thermistor/transistor/transformer.
Sig. figs. On this paper, answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures
≥2, except where the mark scheme specifies otherwise or gives an answer to only 1
significant figure.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are awarded for specific units.
Extras If a candidate gives more answers than required, irrelevant extras are ignored; for
extras which contradict an otherwise correct response, or are forbidden by the mark
scheme, use right plus wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a
right plus wrong penalty.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
0.28 (s) A1
0.8 (g / cm3) A1
[Total: 11]
(b) two forces are equal (in size) OR X and Y are equal (in size) B1
[Total: 5]
(ii) shape B1
[Total: 4]
6 (a) B, D, C, A
all correct for 3 marks; 2 or 3 correct for 2 marks; 1 correct for 1 mark max. B3
[Total: 7]
7 (a) tractor tracks have larger area (in contact with ground)
OR reverse argument for car B1
8 (a) ray goes straight through 1st surface without changing direction B1
ray reflecting and NOT refracting at either inclined surface B1
ray reflected through 90° at either surface OR i = r marked B1
emerging ray parallel to incident ray B1
(c) steel B1
alternative materials such as Magnadur and Alnico accepted
(iii) suitable use e.g. crane for moving vehicles in scrap yards / relay / electric bells etc. B1
[Total: 8]
150 A1
(b) damp B1
[Total: 5]
(c) 86 B1
133 B1
86 B1
(d) (i) α B1
(ii) nucleus B1
[Total: 10]
(ii) voltmeter B1
3.2÷0.005 C1
640 (Ω) A1
[Total: 7]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (NH/SW) 90331/4
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
distance
fallen 1.0
/m
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Use this graph to find the time it takes the object to fall from 0.60 m to 1.60 m.
(b) State and explain what the graph shows about the motion of the falling object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
Fig. 2.1
A student is asked to find the centre of mass of the card. The student is provided with a clamp and
stand, a small mass attached to a thin string and a long pin.
(a) Describe the procedure for finding the centre of mass of the card. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) What simple test can be carried out to confirm that the centre of mass has been found?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
beaker
liquid
Fig. 3.1
(a) The student makes some measurements. His results are shown in the table.
(b) The student warms the beaker and liquid on an electric heater as shown in Fig. 3.2.
electric
heater
Fig. 3.2
(i) State the name of the process by which thermal energy is transferred through the glass
of the beaker.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain how thermal energy is transferred throughout the liquid by convection.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) After heating for 20 minutes, the student re-weighs the beaker and liquid. He finds that the
mass of the beaker and liquid has decreased to 260 g.
(i) State the name of the process that causes this decrease in mass.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 11]
4 At a party, three balloons are filled with a gas less dense than air. The balloons are tied to an
empty drink can. The can floats, without moving, in the air above a table, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
empty
drink can
top of Y
table
(a) Fig. 4.2 represents the vertical forces acting on the can as it floats in the air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In terms of the vertical forces acting on the can, explain why the can does not rise or fall.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A window is opened, causing a draught of air into the room. The window is to the left of the
balloons and can, and at the same height.
On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow indicating the direction of the resultant force on the can. [1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
Fig. 5.1
(a) Use words from the box to complete the sentences below. Each word may be used once,
more than once, or not at all.
(i) Each time the football moves ....................................., it gains gravitational potential
energy. [1]
(ii) Each time the football hits the ground, it changes ....................................., and this results
in energy stored as strain energy (elastic potential energy). [1]
(b) Each time the football hits the ground, energy is transferred away from the ball.
(i) State how you can tell this from the diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the energy that is transferred away from the ball.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
pipes
reservoir
hydroelectric
power station
dam
outflow
of water
Fig. 6.1
(a) These are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. They are not in the
correct order.
Use the letters A, B, C and D to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station
works.
Rainwater flows off the hills into the reservoir behind the dam.
Electricity is generated.
[3]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15
PMT
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Using a renewable source of energy is one advantage of hydroelectric power compared with
other energy sources.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
10
Fig. 7.1
The car and the snow tractor have the same weight.
(a) Explain why the snow tractor can travel across soft snow without sinking, but the car cannot.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The car driver checks his tyre pressure in a warm garage. The pressure of the air inside the
tyre when it is warm is 24.0 N / cm2.
(i) Suggest a value for the pressure of the air inside the tyre when it is cold.
(ii) In terms of the air molecules inside the tyre, explain the change in the pressure of the air.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
11
8 (a) A student arranges two 45° prisms as shown in Fig. 8.1. He aims a ray of red light to hit the
surface of one of the prisms at 90°.
ray of 45°
red light
45°
45°
45°
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw the path of the light through the prisms. [4]
(b) Visible light is one region of the electromagnetic spectrum, as represented in Fig. 8.2.
Fig. 8.2
(i) Two regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are missing from Fig. 8.2.
State the name of the missing region with the longer wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) An infra-red sensor is fitted into a room as part of an intruder alarm system.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State two properties that are the same for all electromagnetic waves.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15 [Turn over
PMT
12
The student uses the N pole of one magnet and the S pole of the other magnet. Starting from the
centre of the iron rod he rubs the poles against the rod out to its ends. He repeats this many times.
Fig. 9.1 shows how the student uses the two magnets to make the iron rod into a magnet.
N
S
S
N
iron rod
Fig. 9.1
(a) Label the magnetic poles created on the iron rod. [1]
(b) Describe how to test whether the iron rod has become a magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
13
iron nail
Fig. 9.2
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
14
charger
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) Suggest a suitable material for the coils of the transformer.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The transformer has an input voltage of 240 V and an output voltage of 6.0 V. There are
6000 turns on the input coil.
(b) Place a tick in the box alongside the condition in which it could be dangerous to use the
charger.
cool
damp
dry
warm
[1]
[Total: 5]
15
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
Complete the table below to show the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom
of 21896Rn.
(i) Tick the box alongside the correct symbol for an alpha particle.
γ
[1]
(ii) From what part of the radon-219 atom is the alpha particle emitted?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Complete the table below to show the composition of an alpha particle.
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/M/J/15 [Turn over
PMT
16
Fig. 12.1
(b) The student wants to determine the resistance of the thermistor at different temperatures.
Complete the sentences for the meters he should use in the circuit.
(i) The meter to be connected in series with the thermistor is .................................. . [1]
(ii) The meter to be connected in parallel with the thermistor is ................................ . [1]
(ii) When the temperature increases, the resistance of the thermistor decreases.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in he Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working
is correct, bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated “e.c.f.”
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous with spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection/refraction/diffraction or
thermistor/transistor/transformer.
Sig. figs. On this paper, answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures
≥2, except where the mark scheme specifies otherwise or gives an answer to only 1
significant figure.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are awarded for specific units.
Extras If a candidate gives more answers than required, irrelevant extras are ignored; for
extras which contradict an otherwise correct response, or are forbidden by the mark
scheme, use right plus wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a
right plus wrong penalty.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(c) (speed = ) distance ÷time in any form: symbols, words, numbers, ecf from (b) C1
[Total: 8]
(ii) balance A1
(b) (i) (density =) mass ÷ volume in any form: symbols, words, numbers C1
15.2 ÷ 1.36 C1
[Total: 6]
3 energy °C
max. B2
resistance m/s
speed J
temperature Ω
note: 1 mark for 1 or 2 lines correct, 2 marks for all 3 lines correct
4 (a) 4 (N) B1
up the slope B1
[Total: 4]
(ii) D AND E B1
(d) (speed=) distance ÷ time, in any form: symbols, words, numbers, ecf from (a) C1
3.7 OR 3.67 (m / s) A1
[Total: 7]
(b) D, C, B, A max. B3
[Total: 6]
note: 3 marks for all 4 correct, 2 marks for 3 correct, 1 mark for 2 correct
[Total: 9]
candle flame image drawn same distance behind mirror as flame is in front B1
[Total: 5]
2. D B1
30 (cm) A1
(b) (i) at least one straight line in shallow water and at different angle,
accept refracted wrong way B1
at least 3 lines drawn showing refracted wave of constant wavelength, different from
incident wavelength, and continuous with incident wavefronts B1
(ii) refraction B1
[Total: 9]
10 (i) 1. negative B1
2. electrons B1
(iii) (idea of) shirt gaining / losing (electric) charge OR becomes charged
OR charge transferred between shirt and body B1
[Total: 6]
B: off ticked B1
C: hot ticked B1
(R = ) 10 ÷ 6.0 C1
(c) lamp B1
[Total: 10]
(ii) electron B1
proton number = 7 B1
17 400 (years) A1
[Total: 8]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core May/June 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (CW/CGW) 90391/2
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
A boy carries out an experiment to make his own timer using a burning candle.
Fig. 1.1 shows the length of the candle, and the clock he used, at the start of the experiment and
at the end of the experiment.
11: 50 14 : 05
candle at 5.0 cm
the start candle at 3.2 cm
the end
(c) The difference in the length of the candle from the start to the end of the experiment
was 1.8 cm.
(d) The boy estimates that he would need a candle about 24 cm long, of the same material and
diameter, to make a candle timer that would last at least one day.
State whether the boy’s estimate is correct. Give a reason for your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
2 (a) A student is asked to find the density of a small block of metal, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
length width
height
Fig. 2.1
Use words from the list below to complete the following sentences.
(i) The student should use a ............................................. to measure the length, width and
height of the metal block.
(ii) The student should use a ............................................. to find the mass of the metal
block.
[2]
(b) A jeweller has a small block of metal. The block has a mass of 15.2 g and a volume of 1.36 cm3.
(ii) The jeweller looks up the values for the density of various metals and produces a table,
part of which is shown below.
density
metal
g / cm3
gold 19.3
lead 11.3
platinum 21.5
silver 10.5
Using your answer to (b)(i) and the information in the table, state which metal the block is
most likely to be made from.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
3 In the columns below are physical quantities and the units in which they are measured.
Draw a line from each quantity to its corresponding unit. One line is drawn for you.
quantity unit
energy °C
resistance m/s
speed J
temperature Ω
[Total: 2]
4 A toy car is rolling down a slope. Fig. 4.1 shows the total forward force and the total backward force
acting on the car.
16 N
12 N
Fig. 4.1
(b) What will be the effect of this resultant force on the car’s motion?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
5 A girl cycles to meet a friend. The distance-time graph for her journey from start to finish is shown
in Fig. 5.1.
1200
E
1000
distance / m
800
D
600
400
B C
200
0
A 0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
Fig. 5.1
(a) How far does the girl travel from start to finish?
distance = ...........................................................[1]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(i) the part of the girl’s journey that involves cycling up a hill 500 m long,
[Total: 7]
(a) Draw one straight line from each energy source to the type of power station that uses it.
energy source type of power station
hydroelectric
fossil fuel
nuclear
coal-fired
uranium fuel rods
wind farm
[3]
SLSH FDUU\LQJ
ZDWHU PLUURU
Fig. 6.1
These are some of the stages explaining how the power station works. They are not in the
correct order.
A Electricity is generated.
Use the letters A, B, C and D to complete the flow chart to explain how the power station
works.
[3]
[Total: 6]
10
Fig. 7.1
On each arrow, write the name for the change of state. [3]
The particles are much further apart than they are in a solid.
(c) A student spills a small amount of nail varnish remover on one of her hands. Nail varnish
remover is a liquid with a low boiling point.
Explain why this hand feels colder than her other hand.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
11
8 A student looks into a vertical mirror to see the reflection of a burning candle.
Fig. 8.1 shows one ray of light being reflected by the mirror.
eye mirror
flame
candle
Fig. 8.1
(a) On the ray in Fig. 8.1, mark arrows to indicate the direction of travel of the light. [1]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, carefully mark the position of the image of the candle flame. [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 represents a wave in a water tank. Five distances are shown, labelled A, B, C, D
and E.
B D E
A
C
Fig. 9.1
................................................................................................................................[1]
................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
13
shallow water
water
tank
deep
water direction of
travel of wave
wavefront
Fig. 9.2
The wave has reached an area of shallow water, where it travels more slowly.
(i) Complete the diagram to show the wavefronts in the shallow water. [3]
(ii) State the term used to describe what happens to the wave as it enters the shallow water.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
14
(i) The student charges a plastic rod by rubbing it with a dry cloth. The rod becomes
positively charged as shown in Fig. 10.1.
cloth
+
+ + rod
+ ++ +
+ + ++
+ ++
+
Fig. 10.1
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. State which particles the cloth has gained for it to have this charge.
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The student then rubs two thin plastic strips with another dry cloth. The strips are
suspended so that they are free to move.
Fig. 10.2 shows the two plastic strips before and after the student rubs them with the dry
cloth.
string string
sticky tape
plastic strips
Fig. 10.2
Explain why the bottom ends of the strips move apart after rubbing.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
15
(iii) A boy wears a shirt made from nylon. After wearing the shirt for some time he finds the
shirt clinging to his body.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
16
11 Some cars have electrically heated front seats. Each seat has a warm and a hot setting, controlled
by a switch.
12.0 V
fuse
X
switch
A C
B
heater
Fig. 11.1
(a) The circuit contains a switch that can connect to any of the contacts A, B or C.
In the table below, put one tick for each switch setting to indicate the condition of the seat.
condition of seat
switch setting off warm hot
A
B
C
[3]
(b) When the heater setting is on ‘hot’, the current in the heater is 6.0 A. The potential difference
across the heater is 10.0 V.
17
purpose .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The heated seat develops a fault and there is a large current in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]
18
neutron
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
14 ..... 0
6
C .....
N + –1
e
[2]
19
A piece of wood contained 20 000 carbon-14 atoms when it was buried in a landslide.
Calculate the number of years it takes until the number of carbon-14 atoms in the wood
is 2500.
[Total: 8]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in he Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 A 22 D
3 A 23 D
4 D 24 B
5 A 25 D
6 C 26 B
7 B 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 B 29 B
10 C 30 A
11 C 31 A
12 D 32 D
13 B 33 A
14 A 34 B
15 C 35 B
16 C 36 C
17 D 37 B
18 A 38 D
19 B 39 D
20 A 40 B
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
*9170531728*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB16 06_0625_21/2RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
PMT
1 The diagram shows an enlarged drawing of the end of a metre rule. It is being used to measure
the length of a small feather.
10 20 30
mm
cm 1 2 3
A 19 mm B 29 mm C 19 cm D 29 cm
15
speed
m/s
10
0
0 20 40 60 80
time / s
A 0 m / s2 B 15 − 3 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D (15 – 3) m / s2
40 40
The graph shows how the speed of each runner changes with time.
runner 1
speed
runner 2
0
0 t time
The diagram shows the satellite at one point in its circular orbit around the Earth.
Which labelled arrow shows the direction of the resultant force on the satellite at the position
shown?
direction of rotation
of satellite
D B
Earth
satellite
C
What happens to the mass and what happens to the weight of the liquid in the cup?
mass weight
A decreases decreases
B decreases stays the same
C stays the same decreases
D stays the same stays the same
6 The diagrams show three uniform beams P, Q and R, each pivoted at its centre.
2.0 m 1.0 m
P
4.0 N 4.0 N
4.0 m 2.0 m
Q
2.0 N 5.0 N
2.0 m 4.0 m
R
1.5 N 1.0 N
A P and Q only
B P and R only
C Q and R only
D P, Q and R
Which nuclear reaction takes place in a nuclear power station, and which nuclear reaction takes
place in the Sun?
nuclear power
the Sun
station
A fission fission
B fission fusion
C fusion fission
D fusion fusion
A car has a mass of 1000 kg. The kinetic energy of the car is equal to the kinetic energy of the
lorry.
11 A force acts on an object and causes the object to move a certain distance, in the same direction
as the force.
Which row represents a situation in which the largest amount of work is done on the object by the
force?
A 2.0 40.0
B 10.0 2.0
C 20.0 6.0
D 100.0 1.0
12 A diver under water uses breathing apparatus at a depth where the pressure is 1.25 × 105 Pa.
A bubble of gas breathed out by the diver has a volume of 20 cm3 when it is released. The bubble
moves upwards to the surface of the water.
At the surface of the water, the atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
mercury
X
Y
Z
A VW B WY C XY D XZ
15 A beaker contains 0.500 kg of water at a temperature of 3.0 °C. The beaker is heated, and the
internal energy of the water increases by 21.0 kJ.
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.
temperature
P
0
0 time
A gas condensing
B gas cooling
C liquid cooling
D liquid solidifying
17 A student wishes to check the upper and the lower fixed points on a Celsius scale thermometer.
Which two beakers should she use to check the fixed points?
18 Two otherwise identical cars, one black and one white, are at the same initial temperature. The
cars are left in bright sunshine and their temperatures increase. During the night their
temperatures decrease.
Which car shows the greater rate of temperature increase and which car shows the greater rate
of temperature decrease?
A black black
B black white
C white black
D white white
liquid
heating
The density of the liquid changes as its temperature increases. This causes energy to be
transferred throughout the liquid.
How does the density change and what is this energy transfer process?
energy transfer
density
process
A decreases conduction
B decreases convection
C increases conduction
D increases convection
20 Sound waves of frequency 2.0 kHz travel through a substance at a speed of 800 m / s.
10
21 Which row shows the natures of light waves, sound waves and X-rays?
normal
light
w
air v
glass y
image object
Y
11
Which row correctly compares the air pressure in a compression and the air pressure in a
rarefaction to the air pressure nearby where there is no sound wave?
A higher higher
B higher lower
C lower higher
D lower lower
A second sound wave is quieter and lower in pitch than the first sound wave.
A a region around a wire carrying an electric current in which a compass needle experiences a
force
B a region in which an electric charge experiences a force
C a region in which an electric charge is attracted by the Earth’s gravity
D a region through which electromagnetic radiation is passing
12
27 A negatively charged rod is held close to one side of a metal sphere. The other side of the sphere
is earthed.
A B
– + –
–
– –– – – ––
– – – + –
C D
+ + +
+
– –– – –– +
– + + – +
– +
What is the direction of the electron flow in the lamp and what is the current in the lamp?
direction of electron
current / A
flow in lamp
13
Which two graphs show the characteristics of an ohmic resistor and of a filament lamp?
W X Y Z
0 0 0 0
0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage 0 voltage
ohmic filament
resistor lamp
A W Y
B X Y
C W Z
D X Z
30 The four circuits shown all include an a.c. power supply, two diodes and a lamp.
A B
C D
14
input P
(= 0) output X
input Q output Y
(= 1)
output X output Y
A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
D 1 1
32 The diagram shows part of a circuit used to switch street lamps on and off automatically.
LDR
Which row shows the effect on the resistance of the light-dependent resistor (LDR) and on the
potential difference (p.d.) across it?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
15
33 A domestic circuit includes a 30 A fuse. This protects the wiring if there is too much current in the
circuit.
In which wire is the 30 A fuse positioned, and what does it do when it operates?
position operation
current core
coil
pins
16
input output
voltage voltage
A 6.0 V B 12 V C 20 V D 40 V
36 The diagram shows a shaded area where the direction of a magnetic field is into the page.
magnetic field
into the page
beam of
β-particles
In which direction is the beam of β-particles deflected as they enter the magnetic field?
17
37 The arrangement shown is used to check whether the flour inside a cardboard packet is above a
certain level. If it is above this level, the flour absorbs the radiation from the source so that it
doesn’t reach the detector.
radioactive
source detector
flour
cardboard
packet
A α-particles only
B β-particles only
D γ-rays only
A 243
95 Am → 247
97 Np + 2α
4
B 243
95 Am → 243
96 Np + -1 α
0
C 243
95 Am → 243
94 Np + -1 α
0
D 243
95 Am → 239
93 Np + 2α
4
18
40 A reading is taken every 10 minutes of the number of emissions per second from a radioactive
source. The table shows the readings.
number of
time / min emissions
per second
0 800
10 560
20 400
30 280
40 200
50 140
60 100
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 C 22 D
3 C 23 C
4 A 24 D
5 C 25 C
6 C 26 B
7 D 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 B 29 D
10 A 30 B
11 B 31 A
12 D 32 D
13 B 33 A
14 A 34 B
15 D 35 B
16 B 36 C
17 C 37 D
18 A 38 C
19 D 39 B
20 C 40 D
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 B 1
4 C 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 C 1
8 B 1
9 A 1
10 A 1
11 C 1
12 C 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 B 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 D 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 A 1
29 D 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 B 1
38 B 1
39 A 1
40 B 1
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*8388841185*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 06_0625_21_VI_LIL/FP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
PMT
1 What is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?
0m ball
0.5 m
1.0 m
1.5 m
2.0 m
A 5.0 m / s2 B 10 m / s2 C 15 m / s2 D 20 m / s2
4 A piece of steel is taken from the Earth to the Moon for an experiment. The gravitational field
strength on the Moon is smaller than on the Earth.
5 A measuring cylinder containing only water is placed on an electronic balance. A small, irregularly
shaped stone is now completely immersed in the water.
The diagrams show the equipment before and after the stone is immersed.
balance
g g
6 A boat is travelling at a steady speed in a straight line across the surface of a lake.
A sudden gust of wind exerts a horizontal force of 0.5 N on the ball from the left.
Which diagram shows the resultant force on the ball while the wind is blowing?
A B
ball 0.5 N ball 0.5 N
C D
1.2 N
1.2 N resultant
force
ball 0.5 N
8 The diagram shows a uniform bridge, 4.0 m long and weighing 10 000 N.
The bridge is pivoted at one end. A force at the other end gradually increases until the bridge
begins to lift.
lifting
bridge force
pivot
4.0 m
9 A bullet of mass 0.10 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 600 m / s. It strikes a stationary wooden
block of mass 1.90 kg resting on a frictionless, horizontal surface.
What is the speed of the bullet and the block immediately after the impact?
A 30 m / s B 32 m / s C 60 m / s D 134 m / s
10 A box of mass m slides down a slope of length l and vertical height d against a frictional force F.
mass m
stop
As the box slides down the slope, it loses gravitational potential energy and it does work against
the friction.
Which row gives the loss in gravitational potential energy and the work done against friction?
A mgd Fl
B mgd Fd
C mgl Fl
D mgl Fd
useful
input output energy
energy
wasted
output energy
A B
lifting
pushing through
through 1 m
1 m against a
frictional force of 4 N
1 kg 1 kg
C D
lifting
pulling through
through 2 m
2 m against a
frictional force of 2 N
2 kg 2 kg
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
14 Brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.
15 Gas molecules striking a container wall cause a pressure to be exerted on the wall.
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.
Liquid 1 is heated for 100 s and liquid 2 is heated for 200 s by heaters of the same power.
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2
17 Water of mass 100 g at a temperature of 100 °C is converted into steam at 100 °C. The specific
latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2300 J / g.
10
18 A copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. A piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.
The bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side
only.
heat
Which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?
11
A B
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
12
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
22 Light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. The speed of the light in the glass block
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
D The speed in the glass is 1.0 × 108 times the speed in a vacuum.
23 A fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. An engineer adjusts the alarm so that it
produces a louder note of a higher pitch.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
13
24 In a child’s toy, metal fish are lifted out of a toy pond using a metal rod. The fish are magnetically
attracted to the end of the rod. There is no magnetic force between the fish themselves.
metal rod
toy pond
metal fish
What are possible materials from which the fish and the rod are made?
fish rod
A placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large alternating current and gradually
decreasing the current
B placing the magnet in a solenoid carrying a large direct current and gradually decreasing the
current
C placing the magnet in a solenoid that produces a magnetic field in the opposite direction to
the magnet
D placing the magnet next to an identical bar magnet with its poles in the opposite direction
26 A magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.
14
A charge
B current
C electromotive force
D power
29 A cylinder of conducting putty has length l, diameter d and resistance R. The putty is now
moulded into a cylinder of diameter 2d that has the same volume.
R d
A 2 B 4 C 8 D 16
30 The average current during a lightning strike between a cloud and the ground is 1.5 × 104 A.
The lightning releases 3.0 × 108 J of energy and lasts for 2.0 × 10–4 s.
What is the average electromotive force (e.m.f.) between the cloud and the ground?
15
R
T V
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C It remains at 0 V.
D It remains at 12 V.
32 The circuit diagram shows a circuit with an a.c. supply, a diode and a resistor.
Which diagram shows how the current I in the resistor varies with time t ?
A B
I I
0 0
0 t 0 t
C D
I I
0 0
0 t 0 t
16
33 A light-dependent resistor (LDR) and a resistor R are connected in a series circuit. Light falls on
the LDR.
What happens to the resistance of the LDR and what happens to the reading on the ammeter?
resistance reading on
of LDR ammeter
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
P
R
Q
P Q
A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
D 1 1
17
35 A simple d.c. electric motor is fitted with a coil that rotates in a magnetic field. A commutator
connects the power supply to the coil.
C It reverses the direction of the current in the coil after every 180° rotation of the coil.
D It switches the current off momentarily after every 90° rotation of the coil.
37 Which row gives the relative charge of an electron, a neutron and a proton?
A –1 0 –1
B –1 0 +1
C +1 –1 0
D +1 0 +1
18
A radioactive isotope with a half-life of 2.0 days is brought near to the detector. The reading on
the detector increases to 100 counts / minute.
How long does it take for the reading on the detector to decrease to 40 counts / minute?
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice Extended May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 A 1
2 B 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 B 1
7 C 1
8 A 1
9 C 1
10 A 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 C 1
27 A 1
28 B 1
29 D 1
30 D 1
31 A 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 C 1
39 A 1
40 C 1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*7478947670*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 06_0625_22/3RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
PMT
1 What is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?
2 A student determines the average speed of a bubble rising through a liquid at constant speed.
bubble
18 Q
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
P
26
cm
27
bubble
3 The diagram shows the speed-time graph for a toy car travelling in a straight line.
4.0
speed
m/s 3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / s
What is the acceleration of the car during the first two seconds and what is the total distance that
it travels?
acceleration total
m / s2 distance / m
A 0.50 10
B 0.50 20
C 2.0 10
D 2.0 20
5 The masses of a measuring cylinder before and after pouring some liquid into it are shown in the
diagram.
cm3 cm3
200 200
100 100
liquid
7 A car travels forwards along a straight horizontal road. Only the horizontal forces acting on it are
shown.
air resistance
and friction
driving force
8 The diagram shows a wooden beam of weight 20 N. The centre of mass of the beam is labelled
M.
There is a pivot at one end of the beam. The beam is kept horizontal by an upward force, F.
2.0 m
1.2 m
pivot
M wooden beam
20 N
A 12 N B 20 N C 30 N D 33 N
9 A ball of mass 2.0 kg is travelling at a speed of 12 m / s. It moves towards an object of mass 3.0 kg
which is at rest.
12 m / s
3.0 kg
2.0 kg at rest
Which row gives the total momentum, and the speed of both objects immediately after the
collision?
A 0 4.8
B 0 8.0
C 24 4.8
D 24 8.0
A 15 kg B 50 kg C 75 kg D 150 kg
11 An electric generator produces an electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 200 V and produces a current of
3.0 A in a circuit. The generator is driven by an engine with a power of 2.4 kW.
A B
C D
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
14 Brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.
15 A student blows air through a liquid using a straw. This causes the liquid to evaporate quickly and
therefore to cool.
A the energy needed to change unit mass of ice into water at constant temperature
B the energy needed to change unit volume of ice into water at constant temperature
C the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit mass of ice
D the energy needed to produce unit temperature increase of unit volume of ice
17 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.
Liquid 1 is heated for 100 s and liquid 2 is heated for 200 s by heaters of the same power.
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2
18 A copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. A piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.
The bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side
only.
heat
Which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?
10
A B
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
11
20 The incomplete ray diagram shows two rays of light that have passed from one point on an object
through a thin converging lens.
rays of
light
Which type of image is formed, and on which side of the lens is it formed?
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
12
22 Light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. The speed of the light in the glass block
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
D The speed in the glass is 1.0 × 108 times the speed in a vacuum.
23 A fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. An engineer adjusts the alarm so that it
produces a louder note of a higher pitch.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
He places the bar in a solenoid connected to a power supply. He then removes the bar from the
solenoid.
Which row indicates the most effective way of demagnetising the bar?
type of speed to
power supply remove bar
A a.c. fast
B a.c. slow
C d.c. fast
D d.c. slow
13
25 A magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.
iron disc
N S
aluminium
iron
plastic
silver
14
A ampere
B coulomb
C ohm
D volt
+ +
+ + +
+
+ + +
positively charged + + + neutral
metal sphere metal sphere
What happens to the charges on the neutral sphere as the positively charged sphere is brought
close to it?
A Some positive charges move to the left and some negative charges move to the right.
B Some positive charges move to the right and some negative charges move to the left.
C Some positive charges move to the right, but the negative charges do not move.
D The positive charges do not move, but some negative charges move to the left.
30 Which diagram is the current-voltage (I-V) characteristic graph for a metallic conductor at
constant temperature?
A B C D
I I I I
0 0 0 0
0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V
15
31 Four circuits each contain a 6 V battery, a diode, an ammeter and a lamp. None of the
components is faulty.
A B
A A
reading = 1.0 A reading = 0 A
C D
A A
reading = 1.0 A reading = –1.0 A
R
T V
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C It remains at 0 V.
D It remains at 12 V.
16
20 Ω 0.40 A
10 Ω
A 4.0 V B 8.0 V C 25 V D 50 V
A an AND gate
B a NOR gate
C a NOT gate
D an OR gate
A a d.c. motor
B a relay
C a transformer
D an a.c. generator
17
A an alpha particle
B an electron
C a neutron
D a proton
18
BLANK PAGE
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 A 1
2 C 1
3 C 1
4 B 1
5 C 1
6 B 1
7 B 1
8 D 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 B 1
12 D 1
13 C 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 C 1
18 D 1
19 B 1
20 A 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 B 1
25 C 1
26 D 1
27 A 1
28 A 1
29 A 1
30 C 1
31 B 1
32 B 1
33 A 1
34 D 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 A 1
38 A 1
39 A 1
40 B 1
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) May/June 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*3182427838*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 06_0625_23_VI_YEL/FP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
PMT
1 What is the most accurate and precise method to measure the thickness of a coin?
2 A pendulum is swinging. Five students each measure the time it takes to swing through ten
complete swings.
Three students measure the time as 17.2 s. Another student measures it as 16.9 s, and the fifth
student measures it as 17.0 s.
A B
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
distance distance
0 0
0 time 0 time
A kg Ns Pa
B kg Pa m/s
C Ns Pa m/s
D Pa Ns m/s
5 A steel ball bearing has a mass of 24 g and a density of 8.0 g / cm3. It is lowered into a measuring
cylinder containing 12 cm3 of water.
6.0 N 3.0 N
7 The diagram shows a man holding a sack and barrow stationary. He applies a vertical force to
the handle.
The centre of mass and the weight of the sack and barrow are shown. The wheel acts as a pivot.
force
exerted
by man
centre of mass
of sack and barrow
20 cm
80 cm
15 cm 45 cm
weight of
sack and barrow
200 N
A 38 N B 50 N C 67 N D 200 N
8 The diagram shows the only two forces F1 and F2 acting on an object. The magnitude of each
force is represented by the length of each arrow.
F1
110°
F2
A B
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2
C D
F1 R
F2
110° R 70°
F1
F2
9 The diagrams show four bodies moving in the directions shown. The only forces acting on the
bodies are shown in each diagram.
Which body gains the most kinetic energy when moving a distance of 1.0 m?
A B
20 N
movement movement
10 N 10 N
C D
10 N 25 N 30 N 30 N
movement movement
10 A steel ball is fired vertically upwards with a velocity v. The ball reaches a height h.
The same ball is now fired vertically upwards from the same position with a velocity 2v.
A h B 2h C 4h D 8h
11 A solar panel is used to recharge a battery. The solar panel produces 0.80 W of electrical power.
The panel is 20% efficient.
solar panel
sunlight
power to
battery
0.80 W
What is the power input of the sunlight onto the solar panel?
A B C D
The diagrams show the depth and the density of liquid in each container.
A B C D
40 cm
30 cm
20 cm
10 cm
14 Brownian motion is observed when using a microscope to look at smoke particles in air.
15 The diagrams show four open dishes. Each dish contains water at the same temperature.
The dishes are different shapes and a draught blows over two of them.
From which container does the water evaporate at the greatest rate?
A B C D
draught
draught
no draught no draught
16 Equal masses of two different liquids are put into identical beakers.
Liquid 1 is heated for 100 s and liquid 2 is heated for 200 s by heaters of the same power.
different liquids
of same mass
liquid 1 liquid 2
10
17 A block of ice at –20 °C is heated until it turns to steam. The graph of temperature against thermal
energy absorbed is shown.
temperature 100
°C 80
60
40
20
0
–20
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400 2600
18 A copper bar and a wooden bar are joined. A piece of paper is wrapped tightly around the join.
The bar is heated strongly at the centre for a short time, and the paper goes brown on one side
only.
heat
Which side goes brown, and what does this show about wood and copper?
11
A B
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
C D
barrier barrier
wavelength
wavelength 2.0 cm
1.0 cm
12
screen
converging
lens
image
formed
candle here
21 Which diagram shows what happens when a ray of white light passes through a prism?
A B
spectrum
white white
light light
spectrum
C D
spectrum
white white
light light spectrum
13
22 Light travels in a vacuum and then enters a glass block. The speed of the light in the glass block
is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
D The speed in the glass is 1.0 × 108 times the speed in a vacuum.
23 A fire alarm is not loud enough and the pitch is too low. An engineer adjusts the alarm so that it
produces a louder note of a higher pitch.
What effect does this have on the amplitude and on the frequency of the sound?
amplitude frequency
A larger greater
B larger smaller
C smaller greater
D smaller smaller
25 A magnet near a coil of wire is attracted to the coil only when there is a current in the coil.
14
Which type of current is established in the coil, and how is the current changed?
A a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero
B a direct current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero
C an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current quickly to zero
D an alternating current in the coil, then reduce the current slowly to zero
A brass
B glass
C plastic
D wood
Which diagram represents the pattern and the direction of the electric field due to the charge?
A B C D
+ + + +
30 A circuit contains a fixed resistor. The potential difference across the resistor is 24.0 V and the
current in the resistor is 2.30 A.
15
31 A battery, an ammeter, a switch, a lamp and a resistor are connected together in a circuit.
With the switch open, the ammeter reads 2.4 A. When the switch is closed, this reading increases
to 4.0 A.
What is the current through the resistor with the switch closed?
R
T V
12 V
What happens to the reading on the voltmeter as the sliding terminal T is moved from R to S?
A It decreases from 12 V to 0 V.
B It increases from 0 V to 12 V.
C It remains at 0 V.
D It remains at 12 V.
16
X Y
Which component causes the ammeter reading to increase when the light gets brighter?
A B C D
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
device purpose
A a.c. generator to change the direction of the
current in the coil as it turns
B a.c. generator to change the output current
from d.c. into a.c.
C d.c. motor to change the direction of the
current in the coil as it turns
D d.c. motor to change the input current
from a.c. into d.c.
17
37 When a source of D-particles is directed towards a thin metal foil they become scattered.
Which observation of this experiment provides evidence for a small charged nucleus?
A A small proportion of the D-particles come straight back from the foil towards the source.
D Some of the D-particles follow a curved path after leaving the foil.
18
The student uses a detector over five minutes and plots a graph showing how the count rate
shown on the detector varies with time.
250
count rate
counts / minute 200
150
100
50
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
A 0.30 minutes
B 1.2 minutes
C 1.5 minutes
D 5.0 minutes
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Multiple Choice – Extended),
maximum raw mark 40
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®
and Cambridge International A and AS Level components.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 C 21 B
2 C 22 D
3 D 23 B
4 C 24 D
5 D 25 D
6 B 26 C
7 A 27 A
8 C 28 A
9 C 29 B
10 D 30 B
11 C 31 C
12 A 32 A
13 D 33 B
14 B 34 C
15 B 35 C
16 C 36 B
17 C 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 B 39 A
20 B 40 A
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
*5652212684*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB16 03_0625_22/3RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
PMT
Which instrument should be used to obtain a more accurate measurement of the diameter of the
wire?
A measuring tape
B metre rule
C micrometer
D ruler
3 An object is released from rest and falls to Earth. During its fall, the object is affected by air
resistance. The air resistance eventually reaches a constant value.
Which description about successive stages of the motion of the object is correct?
4 A concrete post is carried up a very high mountain. At the top of the mountain, the gravitational
field is slightly weaker than at the bottom.
What is the effect of this weaker field on the mass and on the weight of the post at the top of the
mountain?
mass weight
A is less is less
B is less is unchanged
C is unchanged is less
D is unchanged is unchanged
5 The diagram shows a cuboid block made from a metal of density 2.5 g / cm3.
2.0 cm 10 cm
2.0 cm
A 8.0 g B 16 g C 50 g D 100 g
6 The diagram shows an object moving at a constant speed in a circular path in the direction
shown.
In which labelled direction does this force act, when the object is in the position shown?
object
A
D B
path of
object
Which graph is obtained by plotting the extension of the spring against the load applied?
A B
extension extension
0 0
0 load 0 load
C D
extension extension
0 0
0 load 0 load
A 200 V
B 100 kg / m3
C 20 m / s, east
D 50 J / (kg °C)
9 The table gives four energy sources and states whether the energy of the source is derived from
the Sun.
A geothermal yes
B oil no
C water held behind a dam yes
D wind no
11 A wind turbine generates 54 kW of useful power from an input of 180 kW of wind power.
A 54 000 %
180 000 × 100
B 180 000 %
54 000 × 100
C 54 000 × 100 %
180 000
13 Identical toy bricks are placed one on top of another to make a tower on a table.
bricks
tower of bricks
table
Which graph shows the relationship between the pressure P that the tower exerts on the table
and the weight W of the tower?
A B C D
P P P P
0 0 0 0
0 W 0 W 0 W 0 W
15 The diagram shows a quantity of gas trapped in a cylinder. The piston is pushed in slowly and the
gas is compressed. The temperature of the gas does not change.
piston
Which graph shows the relationship between the pressure and the volume of the gas?
A B
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
C D
pressure pressure
0 0
0 volume 0 volume
17 To mark a temperature scale on a thermometer, standard temperatures known as fixed points are
needed.
A room temperature
B the temperature inside a freezer
C the temperature of pure melting ice
D the temperature of pure warm water
What is one method by which thermal energy is transferred in the copper rod?
A Free electrons transfer energy from the cooler end to the hotter end.
B Free electrons transfer energy from the hotter end to the cooler end.
C Molecules of copper move from the cooler end to the hotter end.
D Molecules of copper move from the hotter end to the cooler end.
20 Two plastic cups are placed one inside the other. A small spacer keeps the two cups separated.
Hot water is poured into the inner cup and a lid is put on top, as shown.
lid
small spacer
hot water
bench
A The bench is heated by convection from the bottom of the outer cup.
B The lid reduces the energy lost by convection.
C There is no thermal conduction through the sides of either cup.
D Thermal radiation is prevented by the small air gap.
A hertz
B metre
C metre per second
D second
10
A B
C D
11
image
F
A
object F
lens
image
F F
B
object
lens
image
F
C
F
object
lens
object
F F
D
image
lens
12
X Y
Which diagram represents the movement of the air molecules, due to the sound wave, in the
region between X and Y?
A B C D
Which row gives typical values for the speed of sound in a liquid and in a solid?
A 250 180
B 250 5000
C 1500 180
D 1500 5000
A methods 1, 2 and 3
B methods 2, 3 and 4
C methods 1 and 2 only
D methods 3 and 4 only
13
A a battery
B a filament lamp
C a resistor
D a spring balance
29 The table describes four different resistance wires. They are all made from the same metal.
length of diameter of
wire / m wire / mm
A 2.0 1.0
B 2.0 1.5
C 3.0 1.0
D 3.0 1.5
30 Which circuit shows the directions of the conventional current I and the flow of electrons?
A B
I electrons I electrons
C D
I electrons I electrons
14
A B
240 V 240 V
C D
240 V 240 V
32 A battery charger plugs into a 230 V a.c. supply. The charger is used to charge a 6.0 V d.c.
battery.
diodes transformer
15
V voltmeter P
V voltmeter Q
reading on reading on
voltmeter P voltmeter Q
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
34 After some building work in a house, a bare (uninsulated) live wire is left protruding from a wall.
A a fire
B a fuse blows
C an electric shock
D no current flows
16
The direction of the magnetic field is into the plane of the page (away from you).
uniform
magnetic field
electron
In which direction does a force act on the electron when it enters the magnetic field?
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
output voltage
As the coil passes through the position shown, the output voltage is +10 V.
17
37 The scattering of α-particles by a thin metal foil supports the nuclear model of an atom.
What are the nucleon (mass) number and proton (atomic) number of the nuclide formed after
both decays have happened?
A 214 85
B 216 85
C 214 83
D 216 83
39 A scientist carries out an experiment using a sealed source which emits β-particles. The range of
the β-particles in the air is about 30 cm.
Which precaution is the most effective to protect the scientist from the radiation?
α-particles γ-rays
18
BLANK PAGE
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) March 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 B 1
4 B 1
5 B 1
6 A 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 C 1
15 A 1
16 C 1
17 C 1
18 A 1
19 C 1
20 D 1
21 D 1
22 B 1
23 B 1
24 A 1
25 C 1
26 B 1
27 A 1
28 C 1
29 A 1
30 A 1
31 B 1
32 A 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 D 1
38 C 1
39 C 1
40 A 1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) February/March 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
*9900917881*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 03_0625_22/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
PMT
stack of
coins
2.40 cm
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
P Q R S
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
3 An object is travelling in a straight line. The diagram is the speed-time graph for the object.
C
speed
m/s
B
D
A
0
0 time / s
4 Which statement about the masses and weights of objects on the Earth is correct?
5 An object in a space probe above the Earth weighs 3.5 N. The gravitational field strength at the
height of the space probe is 7.0 N / kg.
What are the mass and the weight of the object on the Earth’s surface?
mass / kg weight / N
A 0.50 3.5
B 0.50 5.0
C 2.0 3.5
D 2.0 20
6 A skydiver jumps from a stationary helicopter and reaches a steady vertical speed. She then
opens her parachute.
path of car
car
direction
of travel
A All the forces are balanced as the car is moving at constant speed.
B The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts away from the centre of the circle.
C The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force acts towards the centre of the circle.
D The forces are unbalanced and the resultant force is in the direction of travel of the car.
A Nm B N/m C Ns D N/s
9 A man can either take an escalator or a lift to travel up between two floors in a hotel.
escalator lift
The escalator takes 20 seconds to carry the man between the two floors. The useful work done
against gravity is W. The useful power developed is P.
The lift takes 30 seconds to carry the same man between the same two floors.
How much useful work against gravity is done by the lift, and how much useful power is
developed by the lift?
useful work
useful power
done against
developed by lift
gravity by lift
11 A column of liquid has height h, mass m and density ρ. The gravitational field strength is g.
A hρ B mρ C mgh D ρ gh
12 The diagrams show two mercury barometers. The right-hand diagram shows a tube of larger
diameter. There is a vacuum above the mercury in both tubes.
Which labelled position on the right-hand tube shows the mercury level in the right-hand tube?
A
B
C
glass
tubes
D
mercury
13 Very small pollen grains are suspended in water. A bright light shines from the side.
When looked at through a microscope, small specks of light are seen to be moving in a random,
jerky manner.
eye
microscope
bright light
pollen grains
in water
Which row shows whether the mercury absorbs or releases energy and what happens to the
bonds between the mercury atoms?
bonds between
energy
atoms
A absorbed stronger
B absorbed weaker
C released stronger
D released weaker
15 A model thermometer consists of a flask of coloured water and a stopper with a glass tube
passing through it, as shown.
glass tube
temperature scale
stopper
● The flask can be replaced with a larger one full of coloured water.
● The glass tube can be replaced with one with a larger internal diameter.
16 A metal has a specific heat capacity of 360 J / (kg °C). An object made of this metal has a mass of
2.0 kg.
17 In which type of substance are free electrons involved in the transfer of thermal energy?
A all liquids
B all solids
C metals only
D plastics only
18 Four objects, made of the same material and having the same mass, are at the same
temperature. The objects have different surfaces and different surface areas.
A dull large
B dull small
C shiny large
D shiny small
19 A person uses a surfboard to ride every 30th wave crest towards the beach. The wave crest
travels at a speed of 1.6 m / s and the distance between each wave crest is 24 m.
How many wave crests does the person surf in one hour?
A 1 B 2 C 8 D 450
20 In a shallow tank, a water wave moves towards a barrier with a narrow gap.
barrier
water
wave
A B
C D
A diffraction
B dispersion
C refraction
D total internal reflection
10
22 The points labelled F are the principal foci of a lens. A beam of parallel light is incident on the
lens.
Which diagram shows the path of the light after it passes through the lens?
A
F F
B
F F
C
F F
D
F F
11
25 A small compass is placed close to a strong bar magnet, the same distance from each end.
Which diagram shows the direction in which the compass needle points?
A B C D
N N N N
compass compass compass compass
S S S S
26 A bar magnet can be demagnetised by hammering it for a long time or by slowly removing it from
a coil connected to a power supply.
Which row completes the descriptions of how these processes are carried out?
A electrons
B neutrons
C nucleons
D protons
12
A B C D
20 mm 20 mm
10 mm 10 mm
1 mm 2 mm 1 mm 2 mm
29 An air-conditioning unit, a lamp and an electric fire all receive electrical energy from the mains
supply.
From which of these devices is all this energy eventually transferred to the surroundings?
air-
electric
conditioning lamp
fire
unit
A key
B = all energy transferred to surroundings
C = not all energy transferred to surroundings
D
A B C D
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
A A A A
2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
13
What happens to the resistance of the LDR, the current in the fixed resistor and the reading on
the voltmeter?
32 The diagram shows two linked circuits to control when a bell is switched on.
The conditions are altered and only one pair of conditions causes the bell to ring.
14
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
34 In this circuit, a component at X automatically protects the wiring from overheating if there is a
fault.
electrical supply
circuit
fuse switch
breaker
A key
B = suitable
C = not suitable
D
15
35 The diagram shows a simple transformer with an input of 240 V and an output of 40 V.
600
input 240 V 40 V output
turns
36 The diagram shows a current-carrying wire. The wire is at 90° to a magnetic field. The direction of
the magnetic field is into the page.
A force acts on the wire due to the current and the magnetic field.
16
37 A radioactive substance emits radiation at a rate of 600 emissions per second. Four hours later, it
emits radiation at a rate of 300 emissions per second.
What is the half-life of the substance and what is the rate of emission after a further four hours?
A 2 0
B 2 150
C 4 0
D 4 150
A 47 B 62 C 109 D 156
39 The equation represents an isotope of radium Ra decaying to an isotope of radon Rn with the
emission of particle X.
226
88 Ra → 222
86 Rn +X
What is particle X?
0 1 4 1
A −1 e B 1H C 2 He D 0n
B α-decay only
D β-decay only
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
Candidate
Centre Number Number
Candidate Name
PHYSICS 0625/2
PAPER 2
OCTOBER/NOVEMBER SESSION 2002
1 hour
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
TIME 1 hour
INSTRUCTIONS TO CANDIDATES
Write your name, Centre number and candidate number in the spaces at the top of this page.
Answer all questions.
Write your answers in the spaces provided on the question paper.
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 A baggage handler at an airport lifts a suitcase from the ground and places it on a moving
belt. The moving belt then transfers the suitcase to the owner.
moving
belt
A suitcase on ground
B suitcase held
level with belt
C suitcase moving
on belt
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in B compare with its energy in A?
Tick one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) (i) How does the total energy of the suitcase in C compare with its energy in B? Tick
one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
Complete each of the following sentences by writing in the appropriate word from the list.
(a) Cooking pots often have a wooden handle, because wood is a good thermal
...................................... . [1]
(b) Thermal energy reaches Earth from the Sun by means of ....................................... [1]
(d) The heating element is put at the bottom of an electric kettle, so that
...................................... can rapidly transfer thermal energy throughout the water. [1]
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical wire through a horizontal piece of card. There is a current down the
wire.
large
current
card
Fig. 3.1
Fig. 3.2 shows the wire and card, viewed from above.
card
Fig. 3.2
The large circle is one of the magnetic field lines caused by the current.
On Fig. 3.2,
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 In an experiment to find the density of some oil, a student takes the following readings.
cm3
500
400 mass of empty measuring jug = 610 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.1
cm3
500
oil 400 mass of jug containing 500 cm3 of oil = 1020 g
300
200
100
Fig. 4.2
(iii) How could the volume of the oil be more accurately measured than with the
measuring jug?
...................................................................................................................................
[7]
On Fig. 4.3, mark approximately where the surface of the same mass of water would be
if it replaced the oil. [1]
level
of oil cm3
500
400
300
200
100
Fig. 4.3
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 (a) What happens to the nucleus of an atom that undergoes radioactive decay?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Strontium-90 has a half-life of 28 years. How much time must pass before its activity
falls to of its original value?
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Which two of the following quantities are the same? Tick two boxes.
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) Some liquid in a beaker is kept boiling by heating the beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
boiling
liquid
heat
Fig. 6.1
(i) On the axes of Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph to show what happens to the temperature
of the liquid whilst it is boiling.
temperature
0
time
time at which
liquid starts
to boil
Fig. 6.2
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A student holds a polythene rod in one hand and a dry cotton cloth in the other.
Fig. 7.1
(a) How can the student cause the rod to become charged with static electricity?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) How can the student detect that the rod has become charged?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(d) The charged polythene rod is brought close to another charged polythene rod that has
been suspended from a nylon thread, as shown in Fig. 7.2.
nylon charged
thread polythene
rod (–)
charged
polythene
rod (–)
Fig. 7.2
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) If the student used a copper rod in (a), instead of the polythene rod, why would he not
be able to charge the rod?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows an electric circuit containing a battery, a 4.7 Ω resistor, an ammeter and a
variable resistor with a sliding contact. The variable resistor is set at zero. The ammeter and
battery have such a small resistance that it can be ignored.
X
sliding contact
variable
resistor A
Y
4.7 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(b) Write down the equation that links resistance, potential difference (p.d.) and current.
[2]
(c) The ammeter shows that the current through the 4.7 Ω resistor is 0.5 A.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(e) The variable resistor is now adjusted to make the total resistance of the circuit 10.0 Ω.
What is the resistance of the variable resistor now?
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A student wrote the following report about an experiment to measure the speed of sound in
air.
My friend and I went into a field a long way from any buildings and measured
the distance across the field. My friend stood at one side of the field and I
stood at the other. My friend banged two pieces of wood together, and as I
saw him do this, I started a stopwatch. I stopped the stopwatch when I heard
the sound. We obtained the following readings.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Suggest what the students could have used to measure the distance across the field.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) Why was there a delay between the student seeing the pieces of wood come together
and hearing the bang?
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(f) Suggest why it might have been a good idea for the students to repeat the experiment
after they had exchanged positions.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) The apparatus shown in Fig. 10.1 can be used to indicate when there is a force on the
copper rod.
N
S
mercury
Fig. 10.1
(i) Suggest what is seen to happen to the hanging copper rod when the switch is
closed.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
How does what is seen now differ from what you described in (a)(i)?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 represents a d.c. motor.
coil
S
N
Fig. 10.2
(i) In the boxes, label the various parts of the motor. One part has been labelled as an
example.
(ii) Which part of the motor ensures that the coil keeps rotating when the battery is
connected?
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The battery is reversed. What difference does this make to the motor?
...................................................................................................................................
[5]
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a reed relay in a simple circuit.
flexible
lamp iron reeds
Fig. 11.1
Explain why the iron reeds touch each other when switch S is closed.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a simple temperature-operated alarm.
warning
lamp
thermistor
Fig. 11.2
When the thermistor is cold, its resistance is too high to allow sufficient current to
operate the reed relay. The resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases.
Describe what happens to make the warning lamp light as the air temperature changes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A narrow beam of red light strikes one face of a triangular prism at A, as shown in
Fig. 12.1.
screen
red light
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, show the path of the beam until it reaches the screen.
(ii) What name do we use to describe what happens to the beam at A?
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The red light is replaced by a narrow beam of mixed red and violet light, as shown in
Fig. 12.2.
screen
red +
violet light
Fig. 12.2
Complete Fig. 12.2 to show what happens to the red and the violet light. [2]
(c) The beam of red and violet light is replaced by a narrow beam of white light from the
Sun. State what is now seen on the screen.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) The rays from the Sun also include infra-red rays. Infra-red radiation can pass through
glass.
(i) On Fig. 12.2, mark with the letter X the place where infra-red radiation from the
Sun might strike the screen after passing through the prism.
(ii) Why can infra-red not be seen on the screen?
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
0625/2/O/N/02
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Theory
October/November 2003
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
If you have been given a label, look at the For Examiner’s Use
details. If any details are incorrect or
missing, please fill in your correct details
in the space given at the top of this page.
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 (a) The block of wood in Fig. 1.1 will balance on a horizontal table.
Q R
P
S
B
A
Fig. 1.1
If the block is tilted slightly clockwise about AB, it returns to its original position when
released.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, mark with the letter G where the centre of mass of the block might be.
(ii) Small masses are added to the top PQRS of the block until it is just about to
topple (fall over). Fig. 1.2 shows a side view of the block.
P S
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw a line along which the centre of mass of the arrangement must
now lie.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 1.3 shows two ways of using a laboratory retort stand.
A B
Fig. 1.3
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Some office filing cabinets have a mechanism that allows only one drawer to be
opened at a time, as shown in Fig. 1.4.
Fig. 1.4
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A wheel is rotating at approximately 2 revolutions per second.
Describe how you would use a stopwatch to measure as accurately as possible the time for
one revolution of the wheel. Make sure you include all the relevant information.
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [5]
loose
rocks
mountain
Fig. 3.1
The rocks higher up the mountain were disturbed by something and they roll down the
mountain until they stop at the bottom. In the boxes below, write the name of the type of
energy being described.
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) A farmer has two vehicles with the same weight and the same number of wheels.
Fig. 4.1 shows what the wheels on these two vehicles look like.
vehicle 1 vehicle 2
Fig. 4.1
Which vehicle should the farmer use when driving across his fields when the ground is
very soft? Give your reasons.
vehicle ................................................................
reasons ............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) (i) If you stepped on the point of a sharp nail with your bare foot, it would be
extremely painful. Explain, in terms of pressure, why this is so.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) A person can lie on a bed of nail-points if there is a large number of nails. Explain
why this is not extremely painful.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows two parallel rays of light, AB and CD, in a symmetrical glass block.
glass block
A B
C D
Fig. 5.1
(b) State two things about the directions of the two rays emerging from the block.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) What might happen to a third ray in the block, parallel to the others, which reached the
point P?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Here are three quantities that are associated with waves in the electromagnetic spectrum.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Which of these determines the colour of a ray of light?
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) Which of these is the distance between two successive wavecrests?
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Which region of the electromagnetic spectrum has the shortest wavelength?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 (a) The resistance of a piece of wire of constant diameter depends on its length.
On the axes of Fig. 7.1, sketch a graph to show how the resistance of the wire varies
with length. [2]
resistance
0
0 length
Fig. 7.1
(b) A reel contains 50 m of insulated wire. The ends of the wire are connected to the
circuit shown in Fig. 7.2, so that the resistance of the wire can be found.
+
50 m
meter 1
–
meter 2
Fig. 7.2
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(v) The dials of the meters are shown in Figs. 7.3(a) and 7.3(b).
5 6 0.2 0.3
3 4 7
8 0.4
2
9 0.1
1
0.5
10
0
0
V A
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the view, from above, of a sheet of cardboard on top of a bar magnet. The
dotted line is the outline of the bar magnet.
Fig. 8.1
(a) Describe how the pattern of the magnetic field round the bar magnet can be shown
experimentally. If you wish, you may draw on Fig. 8.1 as well as write on the lines
below.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) State how you would identify the north pole of the magnet.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) When a nucleus decays by emitting an -particle, what happens to
(i) the number of neutrons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) the number of protons in the nucleus,
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) the charge on the nucleus?
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
(b) On 1st January 1900, a sample of a particular radioactive nuclide had an activity of
3200 count / min. The nuclide has a half-life of 22 years. Calculate the activity of the
nuclide remaining in the sample on 1st January 1966.
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 In a spring-stretching experiment, the following values were found for the extension of the
spring.
load / N 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
200
extension / mm
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 10.1
(b) A mistake was made with measuring one of the extensions. On the table above, put a
circle around the incorrect extension. [1]
Suggest what is happening to the spring when the load is greater than 5 N.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Describe how you would measure the extensions if you were doing this experiment.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a mercury-in-glass thermometer, calibrated in °C.
ºC
Fig. 11.1
(a) (i) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in steam, just above boiling
water at standard pressure?
........................... °C
(ii) What temperature would the thermometer read if put in pure melting ice?
........................... °C
(iii) On Fig. 11.1, mark where the end of the mercury thread might be when the
thermometer is in a freezer, where the temperature is well below the freezing
point of water.
[3]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 In a country where the mains electricity supply is 240 V, the transformer in Fig. 12.1 is used
to enable a 6 V lamp to be lit.
A
240 V 8000 6V
mains turns lamp
Fig. 12.1
(a) Calculate the number of turns needed on the secondary coil if the lamp is to be lit at
normal brightness.
(b) Without further calculation, state the number of secondary turns needed to light, at
normal brightness,
A
(i) two identical 6 V lamps in parallel i.e.
A
(ii) two identical 6 V lamps in series i.e.
[2]
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
15
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
0625/02/O/N/03
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory), maximum mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does
not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking
began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be
recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2004 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level syllabuses.
PMT
Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the November 2004
examination.
The threshold (minimum mark) for B is set halfway between those for Grades A and C.
The threshold (minimum mark) for D is set halfway between those for Grades C and E.
The threshold (minimum mark) for G is set as many marks below the F threshold as the
E threshold is above it.
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
PMT
November 2004
INTERNATIONAL GCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/02
PHYSICS
Theory
PMT
6 (a) aluminum F B1
copper F B1
gold F B1
(b) insulator NOT non-conductor F B1
(c) (i) copper OR aluminum OR gold F B1
(ii) any of the insulators F B1
(d) convection F B1
(e) intelligent mention of convection currents C B1
(accept “to make sure always covered by water”
NOT “heat rises”)
8
7 (a) (i) speed = distance/time in any form F C1
correct substitution in his equation OR 1600/5 F C1
320 c.a.o. F A1
(ii) light travels instantaneously/very fast OR
reference to reaction time
NOT just faster than sound C B1
(b) explosion heard sooner/less than 5s )
second sound/echo/reflection (from ) any 2 B1,
2C
rock face) ) B1
louder )
6
8 repulsion F B1
repulsion F B1
attraction F B1
attraction C B1
attraction C B1
5
9 (a) (i) 3 )
F B1
3 ) both
(ii) 10 + 10 F C1
20 F A1
(b) (i) 1 1.5A ticked F B1
2 3A OR 3.0A C B1
(ii) 5 Ω ticked C B1
6
10 (a) electrons F B1
(b) neutrons OR atoms F B1
(c) electrons F B1
(d) electrons F B1
(e) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
(f) protons C B1
neutrons C B1
8
11 (a) (i) A or E F B1
(ii) CE or AC or 2.5 cm F B1
(b) real )
) B1,
inverted ) mark in pairs using ✓ + ✗ = 0 2f, 1C B1,
) B1
enlarged )
(c) any ray from 0’ to I’ refracting at mid-line of lens or
F B1
refractions at both surfaces
6
B marks are independent mark, which do not depend on any other marks. For a
B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen
in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend.
For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in
a candidate’s answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark,
then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the
points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does
not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or
allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated by
e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his
earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated
“e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o means “each error or omission”
brackets () Around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend
on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
underlining Indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means “unit penalty”. An otherwise correct answer will have one mark
deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where
specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing
units are condoned.
OR/or Indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for
scoring the marks.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the top part of a measuring cylinder containing some liquid.
cm3
100
90
80 liquid
Fig. 1.1
(b) Fig. 1.1 indicates four ways the observer’s eye could look when taking the reading from
the measuring cylinder. Put a circle around the eye position that gives the correct
reading. [1]
(c) In order to fill the measuring cylinder up to the 100 cm3 mark, 80 drops of the liquid are
added to the liquid already in the measuring cylinder.
Calculate the average volume of one drop.
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) In Fig. 2.1, the sealed drum containing gas has a mercury manometer connected to it in
order to indicate the gas pressure.
air pressure
760 mm of mercury
B
gas pressure
781 mm of mercury A
mercury
Fig. 2.1
(i) State the difference in height between levels A and B on the manometer.
(b) The air in part (a) is also pressing on a large window pane in the wall of the room where
the drum is situated.
(i) State how the air pressure on the window pane compares with the air pressure on
the mercury surface at B in Fig. 2.1.
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State how the force exerted by the air on the window pane compares with the force
exerted by the air on the mercury surface at B.
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04 [Turn over
PMT
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 A packaging company purchases corrugated cardboard boxes in which to pack its goods.
The boxes are not made up when they are delivered, but are flat, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
0.20 m
0.60 m
0.50 m
Fig. 3.1
(a) A bundle of these boxes measures 0.60 m x 0.50 m x 0.20 m and has a mass of 7.2 kg.
volume = .....................................[3]
density = .....................................[4]
(b) Corrugated cardboard is made up of 3 sheets of thick paper stuck together. Fig. 3.2
shows an enlarged view of the edge of a sheet of corrugated cardboard.
Fig. 3.2
Which of the words below correctly complete the sentence? Tick one box.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 O/N/04
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 Logs of wood are burning in a camp-fire on the ground. A person is sitting nearby.
Fig. 4.1
(a) (i) State two types of energy that the burning logs possess.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
(ii) State the main method of heat transfer by which energy from the fire reaches the
person sitting nearby.
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(i) State the name of the type of energy that the spark possesses due to its
movement.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The pain caused by the spark makes the person stand up.
1. State the type of energy that has increased, now that he is standing.
...................................................................................................................................
2. State the type of energy stored in his body that enabled him to stand.
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 In order to observe Brownian motion, some smoke is mixed with air trapped in a small glass
box. The box is strongly illuminated from the side, and the smoke is viewed from above
through a microscope. This is illustrated in Fig. 5.1.
Fig. 5.1
(a) Describe what is seen when the microscope is focussed on the smoke particles.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[4]
(c) The temperature of the glass box and its contents is increased. Suggest what change is
seen through the microscope.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) Here is a list of solid materials. Put a tick in the box alongside those materials which are
good conductors of heat.
aluminium
copper
cork
gold
polystyrene
wood
[3]
(b) State the word we use to describe materials that are poor conductors of heat.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) From the list of materials given in (a), state which would be suitable to use for
(d) Water is a poor conductor of heat. A beaker of water is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1.
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(e) State why the heating element is always placed near the bottom of an electric kettle.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A girl is walking along a path 1600 m from the rock-face of a quarry (a place where stone is
obtained).
girl
explosion
rock face
quarry
1600 m
Fig. 7.1
(a) The quarry workers set off an explosion at X to break up some rock. The girl measures
the time interval between seeing the flash and hearing the bang.
The time is 5.0 s.
(ii) State what assumption you have made in your working in (i).
...............................................................................................................................[1]
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 Two light conducting balls A and B are hanging side by side, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
Fig. 8.1
A and B are given a series of different charges, as indicated in the table below.
In the third column of the table, write what is seen to happen in each case.
Use the words repulsion or attraction or nothing, as appropriate.
positive positive
negative negative
positive negative
zero positive
negative zero
[5]
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 (a) Two 10 Ω resistors are connected in series in a circuit, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
3.0 A 10 Ω 10 Ω
Fig. 9.1
1. point Y, ....................A
2. point Z. ....................A
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The 10 Ω resistors are now arranged in parallel, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
3.0 A 1.5 A 10 Ω
10 Ω
Fig. 9.2
(i) The current at X is adjusted to 3.0 A. The current through one resistor is 1.5 A.
0A
1.5 A
3.0 A
4.5 A
(ii) What is the combined resistance of the two 10 Ω resistors? Tick one box.
0Ω
5Ω
10 Ω
20 Ω
[3]
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Atoms contain protons, neutrons and electrons.
(b) is uncharged,.................................................................................................................[1]
(f) are lost from the nucleus during α-particle emission. ...................................................[2]
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 The ray diagram in Fig. 11.1 shows a lens forming an image II′ of an object OO′.
O′
D E I
O A BC
I′
Fig. 11.1
(a) State
(i) which of the marked points is a principal focus of the lens, .......................................
real
virtual
inverted
upright
enlarged
diminished
[3]
(c) On Fig. 11.1, draw one other ray that goes from O′, the top of the object, to the image.
[1]
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A small pin is fixed to the edge of a bench. A triangular piece of card with a small hole in
each corner is hung on the pin from corner A and allowed to settle, as shown in
Fig. 12.1. A plumb-line is then hung from the pin and the vertical line AP is marked on
the card.
P
plumb-line
Fig.
Fig. 12.1
This procedure is then repeated with the card hanging from C and the vertical line CQ is
marked.
After this, the card is as shown in Fig. 12.2.
Q C
Fig. 12
B
Fig. 12.2
On Fig. 12.2,
(i) draw the vertical line that would be obtained if the card were hung from B,
(ii) clearly mark the centre of mass of the card using a dot labelled G. [2]
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 12.3a shows a glass ornament standing on a shelf. Fig. 12.3b shows an identical
ornament filled with coloured glass beads.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 12.4 shows two wooden blocks standing on a hinged board with a rough surface.
A
rough
surface
Fig. 12.4
The board is slowly tilted. The blocks do not slip. State which block falls over first, and
explain why.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
16
BLANK PAGE
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced.
The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/02 O/N/04
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory)
Maximum mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does
not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking
began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be
recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
The minimum marks in these components needed for various grades were previously published with
these mark schemes, but are now instead included in the Report on the Examination for this session.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the November 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
MARK
[4]
2 (a) distance/time C1
25/2 C1
12.5 A1
m/s B1
[6]
3 (a) skate M1
4 (a) 40 or 160 B1
(b) 720 B1
(c) W=Fxd C1
720 x 0.2 C1
144 A1
J OR joule B1
(d) his(c)/1.2 C1
[10]
(b) air has expanded (could be scored in (a), but not twice)
OR Kinetic Theory application to pressure B1
[7]
[6]
[6]
9 (a) 1 correct C1
2 correct C1
4 correct A1
(iii) both B1
(iv) 0.5 B1
(v) current stops OR ammeters read zero OR other bulb goes out B1
[8]
10 (a) 10 x 4 x 6.5 C1
260 (cm3) A1
0.96 ecf A1
[7]
11 (a) electrons B1
(b) A B1
(c) (i) D B1
[7]
12 (a) (i) time taken for (B0 for half the time) B1
activity/count-rate/mass etc. B1
(b) (i) 80 – 25 C1
55 cao A1
2. 52.5 ecf B1
(iii) 15 ± 1 ecf B1
[12]
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 The length of a spring is measured when various loads from 1.0 N to 6.0 N are hanging
from it. Fig. 1.1 gives a graph of the results.
25
20
length / cm
15
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
load / N
Fig. 1.1
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Palm trees are growing every 25 m alongside the highway in a holiday resort.
1 2 3 4
IGCSE
Fig. 2.1
(a) It takes 2 s for the bus to travel between palm tree 1 and palm tree 2.
Calculate the average speed of the bus between tree 1 and tree 2.
(b) It takes more than 2 s for the bus to travel from tree 2 to tree 3.
State what this information indicates about the speed of the bus.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The speed of the bus continues to do what you have said in (b). State how the time
taken to go from tree 3 to tree 4 compares with the time in (b).
The time taken to travel from tree 3 to tree 4 is ............................................. the time to
travel from tree 2 to tree 3. [1]
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows two examples of footwear being worn by people of equal weight at a
Winter Olympics competition.
skate
ski
Fig. 3.1
Which footwear creates the greatest pressure below it, and why?
Which? .............................................................................................................................
(b) Drivers of high-sided vehicles, like the one in Fig. 3.2, are sometimes warned not to
drive when it is very windy.
Fig. 3.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 A man is delivering a cupboard to a house.
house
wheels step
Fig. 4.1
(a) The man rolls the cupboard at a steady speed from the lorry to the house. The friction
force in the wheels is 40 N. State the force with which the man has to push.
(b) The cupboard weighs 720 N. State the smallest force needed to lift the cupboard.
(c) The step is 0.20 m high. Calculate the work required to lift the cupboard onto the step.
(d) The man has to ask his assistant to help him lift the cupboard onto the step. Together,
they lift it onto the step in 1.2 s. The men work equally hard.
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 The apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1 is set up in a laboratory during a morning science lesson.
flask
air
clamp
tube
water
Fig. 5.1
Later in the day, the room temperature is higher than in the morning.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a reed relay being used to switch on an electric motor when a variable
resistor is adjusted.
M +
power
– supply
reed
S
relay
variable resistor
Fig. 6.1
(a) The variable resistor is set at its greatest resistance and then switch S is closed. The
reeds in the reed relay do not close when this is done.
(i) State two things that happen in the coil of the reed relay.
1. ..............................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State what happens to the two reeds in the reed relay.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) The resistance of the variable resistor is slowly decreased. The reeds in the reed relay
close. Fig. 6.2(a) shows how the current in the coil changes with time.
current
in
coil Fig. 6.2(a)
0
time
0
current
in
motor Fig. 6.2(b)
0
time
0
On Fig. 6.2(b), draw a line that might show how the current in the motor changes with
time as the variable resistor is adjusted. [4]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05 [Turn over
PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 (a) The filament of a lamp is placed at the principal focus of a lens, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, continue the three rays through the lens and out into the air on the right of
the lens. [1]
(b) The lens in Fig. 7.2 has a focal length of 2.0 cm.
object
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 7.2
On Fig. 7.2,
(i) mark and label the positions of the principal focus on the left of the lens and the
principal focus on the right of the lens, [1]
(ii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the axis, through the lens
and continue it until it reaches the edge of the squared area, [1]
(iii) carefully draw a ray from the top of the object, which travels parallel to the axis
after it has passed through the lens, [1]
(iv) draw and label the image. [2]
9 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) Two magnets are laid on a bench. End A of an unidentified rod is held in turn above
one end of each magnet, with the results shown in Fig. 8.1.
A A
S N
N S
Fig. 8.1
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State what, if anything, happens when the end A is held over one end of
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows four identical plotting compasses placed around a bar magnet where
the magnetic field of the surroundings can be ignored. The pointer has only been
drawn on one plotting compass.
S N
Fig. 8.2
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pointers on the other three plotting compasses to indicate the
directions of the magnetic field of the bar magnet in those three places. [3]
10 For
Examiner's
Use
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows five circuit symbols and their names. The names are in the wrong order.
Draw a straight line from each symbol to its name. One line has been drawn as an
example.
V cell
lamp
ammeter
voltmeter
A switch
Fig. 9.1
[3]
ammeter 1
switch
lamp 2
lamp 1
V
1.5 ammeter 2
cell
Fig. 9.2
11 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit using circuit symbols. [1]
(ii) On your diagram in (b)(i), add a voltmeter connected to measure the potential
difference across the cell. [1]
(iii) When the switch is pressed so that the contacts join, which of the lamps light up?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iv) When there is a current in the circuit, ammeter 1 reads 0.5 A.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 Some fat purchased from a shop is supplied as the block shown in Fig. 10.1.
10 cm
4 cm
6.5 cm
Fig. 10.1
(b) the density of the fat. Give your answer to 2 significant figures.
13 For
Examiner's
Use
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube for producing cathode rays. The tube contains various parts.
B C
Fig. 11.1
(b) Which part, A, B, C or D, must be heated to create the cathode rays? ..................... [1]
(c) (i) Which part, A, B, C or D, is coated with fluorescent material? ........................... [1]
(ii) What is the purpose of the fluorescent material?
............................................................................................................................ [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
14 For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) State what is meant by
(i) the half-life of a radioactive substance,
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
Fig. 12.1 is a graph of the count-rate measured by a detector placed a short distance
from a radioactive source in the laboratory.
80
70
count-rate
counts / min
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time / min
Fig. 12.1
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/O/N/05
PMT
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) At zero time, the measured count-rate of the source and background together is
80 counts/minute.
Calculate the count-rate due to the source alone.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(v) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might be obtained for a source with a shorter
half-life. [2]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department
of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/05
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
The grade thresholds for various grades are published in the report on the examination for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2006 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later
depend. For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers
must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a candidate fails to score
a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the
points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate
does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward
to subsequent stages of working, he may be given marks indicated
by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind
his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not
depend on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the
unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one
mark deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies
where specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect
or missing units are condoned.
© UCLES 2006
PMT
1 (a) 55 (s) B1
3 (a) OP accelerating B1
PQ accelerating B1
QR constant speed B1
RS slowing down (however expressed) B1
(b) O and S (both) B1
(c) 6 (m/s) B1
(d) 70 (s) B1
(ii) conduction B1
© UCLES 2006
PMT
(ii) F1 + F2 + W B1
(iii) F B1
6
correct substitution C1
© UCLES 2006
PMT
(ii) (group) 2 B1
charge B1
experiences a force B1
7
9 (a) good straight line through first 5 points, drawn with a rule B1
(c) 67 – 40 C1
27 (mm) A1
11 (a) 92 B1
(c) 146 B1
(d) nucleus B1
(e) decreases M1
by 2 A1
6
© UCLES 2006
PMT
© UCLES 2006
PMT
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 A worker on the production line in a factory is making brackets. An inspector times the
worker whilst he makes 5 brackets. To start, the stopwatch is set to zero.
After 5 brackets have been made, the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
60 5
55
50 10
60
50 10
45 40 20
15
30
40 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.1
(c) The worker has a target of making 300 brackets per hour.
Does the worker meet his target? Tick one box and show the working which led you to
your answer.
No [4]
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 Some IGCSE students were asked to write statements about mass and weight.
Their statements are printed below. Put a tick in the box alongside each of the two correct
statements.
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the speed/time graph for a journey travelled by a tractor.
Q R
speed 6
m/s
2 P
O
S
0
0 50 100 170 200
time / s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Use the graph to describe the motion of the tractor during each of the marked sections.
OP ....................................................................................................................................
PQ ....................................................................................................................................
QR ...................................................................................................................................
RS .............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Which two points on the graph show when the tractor is stationary?
(d) For how long was the tractor travelling at constant speed?
(e) State how the graph may be used to find the total distance travelled during the 200 s
journey. Do not attempt a calculation.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 (a) Name the process by which thermal energy is transferred
(b) A child is sitting on an oscillating swing, as shown in Fig. 4.1. At the top of the
oscillation, the child and swing are momentarily at rest.
Fig. 4.1
(i) Use the names of appropriate types of energy to complete the following word
equation. Write on the lines in the boxes.
gravitational
......................... .........................
potential energy
at the top of the
= energy at the + energy at the + energy losses
bottom of the bottom of the
oscillation
oscillation oscillation
(ii) The child continues to sit still on the swing. The amplitude of the oscillations slowly
decreases.
Explain why this happens.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06 [Turn over
PMT
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) State the two factors on which the turning effect of a force depends.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
(b) Forces F1 and F2 are applied vertically downwards at the ends of a beam resting on a
pivot P. The beam has weight W. The beam is shown in Fig. 5.1.
F1 P W F2
Fig. 5.1
(i) Complete the statements about the two requirements for the beam to be in
equilibrium.
(ii) The beam in Fig. 5.1 is in equilibrium. F is the force exerted on the beam by the
pivot P.
Complete the following equation about the forces on the beam.
F = ....................................................
(iii) Which one of the four forces on the beam does not exert a moment about P?
...................................................
[4]
7 For
Examiner's
Use
6 A woman stands so that she is 1.0 m from a mirror mounted on a wall, as shown in Fig. 6.1.
mirror
1.0 m
Fig. 6.1
(b) Explain why the woman cannot see the reflection of her toes.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................ m
(ii) How far must the woman walk, and in what direction, before the distance between
her and her image is 6.0 m?
direction = ............................................
[4]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06 [Turn over
PMT
8 For
Examiner's
Use
7 A man is using an axe to chop down a tree, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
Fig. 7.1
(a) A short time after the axe hits the tree, the man hears a clear echo.
He estimates that the echo is heard 3 seconds after the axe hits the tree.
(i) Suggest what type of obstacle might have caused such a clear echo.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The speed of sound in air is 320 m/s.
Calculate the distance of the obstacle from the tree.
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) A branch from the tree falls into some shallow water in a pond nearby. The branch sets
up a wave. The wave moves to the left a distance of 3.0 m before hitting the side of a
moored boat and reflecting back again.
water
wave
B
3.0 m
side of
boat
A
Fig. 7.2
The wave takes 5.0 s to travel from AB to the boat and back to AB.
10 For
Examiner's
Use
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows two groups of materials.
GROUP 1 GROUP 2
copper plastics
iron silk
gold glass
aluminium ebonite
Fig. 8.1
...................................................
...................................................
(iii) Write down the name of one of the eight materials above that may be charged by
rubbing it with a suitable dry cloth.
...................................................
[3]
(b) Two charged metal balls are placed close to a positively-charged metal plate.
attracted to plate
charged
plate
repelled by plate
Fig. 8.2
Write a + sign on the ball that is positively charged and a – sign on the one that is
negatively charged. [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2006 0625/02/O/N/06
PMT
11 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The points plotted on the grid shown in Fig. 9.1 were obtained from a spring-stretching
experiment.
100
length / mm
80
60
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 9.1
(a) Using a straight edge, draw a straight line through the first 5 points. Extend your line to
the edge of the grid. [1]
(b) Suggest a reason why the sixth point does not lie on the line you have drawn.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) A small object is hung on the unloaded spring, and the length of the spring becomes
62 mm.
12 For
Examiner's
Use
10 A person has a 6 V bell. He hopes to operate the bell from a 240 V a.c. mains supply, with
the help of the transformer shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V
a.c. output
input
Fig. 10.1
(a) State how you can tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State how the output voltage compares with the input voltage in a step-down transformer.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the output voltage of the transformer when connected to the 240 V mains
supply.
(d) Why would it not be wise for the person to connect the 6 V bell to this output?
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
13 For
Examiner's
Use
11 The table below contains some information about uranium-238.
proton number Z = 92
(a) State how many electrons there are in a neutral atom of uranium-238.
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
........................................ [1]
(e) State what happens to the number of protons in an atom of uranium-238 when an
-particle is emitted.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
14 For
Examiner's
Use
12 Fig. 12.1 shows an electric circuit.
ammeter
battery
lamp
15 resistor
Fig. 12.1
(a) The lamp lights, but the ammeter needle moves the wrong way.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
............................................................................. [1]
(c) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram of the circuit in Fig. 12.1, using correct circuit
symbols.
[2]
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(d) (i) Name the instrument that would be needed to measure the potential difference
(p.d.) across the 15 resistor.
.............................................................
(ii) Using the correct symbol, add this instrument to your circuit diagram in (c), in a
position to measure the p.d. across the 15 resistor.
[2]
(f) Without any further calculation, state the value of the current in the lamp.
(g) Another 15 resistor is connected in parallel with the 15 resistor that is already in the
circuit.
(i) What is the combined resistance of the two 15 resistors in parallel?
Tick one box.
30
15
7.5
zero
(ii) State what effect, if any, adding this extra resistor has on the current in the lamp.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/06
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2007 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets. e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark scheme.
Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
© UCLES 2007
PMT
1 (a) 60 (cm3) B1
(c) less B1
[Total: 4]
(c) decreases M1
air expands OR density decreases A1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
(ii) arrow labelled F, down slope, between either boat and slipway B1
[Total: 6]
o
5 (a) C B1
[Total: 5]
(ii) 9 (m/s) B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
(ii) circle centred on X, outside printed circle (circle need not be drawn
with a compass, but must be carefully drawn) M1
diameter 4.5 cm by eye A1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 10]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
[Total: 8]
[Total: 4]
12 (a) electrons B1
(b) move M1
towards P1 A1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2007
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2007
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question. 4
10
11
12
Total
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 Fig. 1.1 shows some liquid in a measuring cylinder. The metal can next to it has a cross-
sectional area which is four times that of the measuring cylinder.
cm3
100
measuring
cylinder 90
80
70
60
50 metal
can
40
liquid 30
20
10
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw the surface of the liquid in the can. [2]
The pressure of the water at the bottom of the can is ……………………………… than
the pressure that the water had at the bottom of the measuring cylinder. [1]
[Total: 4]
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 A theatre measures 100 m × 80 m × 25 m. The air inside it has a density of 1.3 kg / m3 when it
is cool.
(b) Calculate the mass of the air. State the equation you are using.
(c) Some time after the doors are opened, the heating in the theatre is switched on.
State and explain what happens to the mass of the air in the theatre as it warms up.
statement .........................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
explanation ......................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Suggest why the temperature of the air in the balcony of the theatre (nearer the ceiling)
is likely to be greater than that lower down in the theatre.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a simple mercury barometer, drawn 1/10 full size.
glass tube
mercury
reservoir
Fig. 3.1
(a) On Fig. 3.1, use your rule to make an appropriate measurement, and then use it to
calculate the atmospheric pressure.
(b) State what occupies the space in the tube above the mercury.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) On another occasion, the atmospheric pressure is much less than that shown in
Fig. 3.1.
On Fig. 3.1, mark where the mercury surfaces in the tube and in the reservoir might
be. [2]
(d) The tube above the mercury gets broken and allows air to move in to and out of the
tube.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 A diesel engine is used to drag a boat up a slipway (see Fig. 4.1).
diesel
engine
slipway
s
Fig. 4.1
(ii) the friction force F on the boat, using an arrow labelled F. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(iii) the total work done pulling the boat up the slipway.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) What other measurement would you need to make if you wanted to calculate the useful
power output of the diesel engine?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
capillary tube
liquid
Fig. 5.1
(a) The thermometer is used for measuring temperatures in school laboratory experiments.
State the units in which the temperatures are measured. .......................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 5.1, mark where the liquid thread will reach when the thermometer is placed in
(ii) steam above boiling water (label this point STEAM). [1]
In the table below, write in two properties, other than expansion of a liquid, that can be
used to measure temperature.
2. OF
[2]
[Total: 5]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 A motorcyclist drives along a straight road. Fig. 6.1 gives information about the first 10 s of
his ride.
Fig. 6.1
(i) describe the motion of the motorcyclist by ticking one of the following boxes,
constant speed
uniform acceleration
uniform deceleration
[1]
(b) State why the distance travelled in the first 5 s is less than half of the distance travelled
in the first 10 s of the journey.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 A girl drops a small stone from a bridge into a pond.
Fig. 7.1
(a) The stone hits the water surface at point X. Fig. 7.2, which is drawn full-size, shows the
wavefront a fraction of a second after the stone hits the water.
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of the wavefront 0.3 s after that already shown. [2]
Fig. 7.2
State two ways in which these waves are different from the waves in part (a), other than
the fact that one is created in air and the other in water.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07 [Turn over
PMT
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 An object OX is placed in front of a converging lens. The lens forms an image IY.
Fig. 8.1 shows two rays from the object to the image.
I
O
Fig. 8.1
(i) clearly mark and label the principal focus and the focal length of the lens, [3]
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) The following list contains descriptions that can be applied to images.
real
virtual
enlarged
diminished
inverted
upright
(c) State two things that happen to the image in Fig. 8.1 when the object is moved further
away from the lens.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A thermistor connected to a variable voltage supply is immersed in a beaker of water.
The beaker of water is heated slowly, using a Bunsen burner, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
thermometer
water
Bunsen
burner
Fig. 9.1
At different temperatures, the voltage is adjusted until the current is 25 mA and the value of
the voltage is noted.
temperature / °C 15 30 45 60 75 90
(a) On the axes of Fig. 9.2, shown on page 13, plot a graph of voltage against temperature.
[4]
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
25
voltage / V
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
temperature / oC
Fig. 9.2
(b) From the graph, find the voltage needed to give a current of 25 mA
(i) at 40 °C, voltage needed = ............................................. V [1]
(c) Use your results in (b) to calculate the resistance of the thermistor
(i) at 40 °C,
resistance at 40 °C = .....................................................
(ii) at 80 °C.
resistance at 80 °C = .....................................................
[5]
(d) Use your results in (c) to complete the following sentence about thermistors of the sort
used in this experiment.
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07 [Turn over
PMT
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 A coil of insulated wire is connected in series with a battery, a resistor and a switch.
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch is closed and the current in the coil creates a magnetic field.
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw the shape of the magnetic field, both inside and outside the coil.
[4]
(ii) A glass bar, an iron bar and a perspex bar are placed in turn inside the coil.
(b) Two thin iron rods are placed inside the coil as shown in Fig. 10.2. The switch is then
closed.
Fig. 10.2
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2007 0625/02/O/N/07
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 The activity of a sample of radioactive material is determined every 10 minutes for an hour.
The results are shown in the table.
time / minutes 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
activity
461 332 229 162 106 81 51
count / s
(a) From the figures in the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
(b) A second experiment is carried out with another sample of the same material. At the
start of the experiment, this sample has twice the number of atoms as the first sample.
(c) Name one type of particle that the material might be emitting in order to cause this
activity.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A beam of cathode rays is travelling in a direction perpendicularly out of the page. The beam
is surrounded by four metal plates P1, P2, P3 and P4 as shown in Fig. 12.1.
P2
P1
P3
P4
Q
Fig. 12.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A potential difference is applied between P1 and P3, with P1 positive with respect to P3.
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) The potential difference in (b) is removed. Suggest how the beam of cathode rays can
now be deflected down the page towards Q.
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(d) Cathode rays are invisible. State one way to detect them.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible.
Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been
included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University
of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2008 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means "correct answer only".
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o. means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if
figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units It is expected that all final answers will have correct units. Deduct one unit penalty for
each incorrect or missing unit, maximum 1 per question. No unit penalty if unit is
missing from final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
© UCLES 2008
PMT
2 (a) L×B×H C1
2 × 1.5 × 1 C1
3 (m3) A1
(b) M=V×D C1
3000 (kg) e.c.f. A1
correct units in both (a) and (b) B1 [6]
(iii) increases B1
4 (a) radio OR TV B1
ultra-violet B1
(d) red B1
violet (NOT blue, purple, mauve) B1 [8]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
(ii) distance/time C1
his(i)/1.6 C1
300 (m/s) e.c.f. A1
(b) i=r B1
© UCLES 2008
PMT
(c) attract B1
9 (a) a B1
(b) B B1
(c) I = V/R C1
6/4 A1
1.5 A1
A OR amp(s) OR ampere(s) B1
(d) connection 2 B1
both receive full voltage OR both run at full brightness B1
if one blows/switched off, other will continue working B1 [9]
© UCLES 2008
PMT
11 (a) core B1
(b) a.c. B1
12 (a) 84 B1
(b) 218 B1
(c) (i) 2 B1
(ii) 4 B1
allow both marks for interchanged answers for (i) and (ii),
if answers to (a) and (b) were interchanged
© UCLES 2008
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2008
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
For Examiner’s Use
Answer all questions.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use 1
appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (i.e. acceleration of free fall = 10 m/s2). 2
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together. 3
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part
question. 4
10
11
12
Total
SP (NF/CGW) T41976/4
© UCLES 2008 [Turn over
PMT
1 A boy is fishing in a river. Nearby, a ferry-boat is taking passengers backwards and forwards For
across the river. Examiner’s
Use
12 12
11 1 11 1
10 2 10 2
9 3 9 3
8 4 8 4
7 5 7 5
6 6
When he starts fishing one morning, the boy’s wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
When he finishes his morning’s fishing, the wristwatch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
(b) It takes the ferry-boat 20 minutes to load up passengers, take them across the river,
load up with passengers at the other side, and return, to start all over again.
Calculate how many journeys, across the river and back, the ferry made whilst the boy
was fishing.
[Total: 5]
2 The tank in Fig. 2.1 measures 2.0 m × 1.5 m × 1.0 m. It is full of water. For
Examiner’s
Use
water
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 6]
3 A spring is hung from a beam, and a load is suspended from it. For
Fig. 3.1 shows the spring before and after suspending the load. Examiner’s
Use
before after
W
X
load
Fig. 3.1
(a) Using the letters on Fig. 3.1, state which distance you would need to measure in order
to find the extension of the spring.
(b) An experimenter measures the extension of the spring with different loads, and obtains
the graph shown in Fig. 3.2.
extension / cm
0
0 1 2 3 4 load / N 5
Fig. 3.2
(i) When the experimenter hangs an unknown load on the spring, the extension
of the spring is 1.7 cm.
Use Fig. 3.2 to find the weight of the unknown load.
(ii) State the value of the tension in the spring when this load is hanging from it. For
Examiner’s
tension = ................................................ [2] Use
............................................................................................................................ [1]
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 represents the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, with an enlargement of the For
visible light part of the spectrum. Examiner’s
Use
visible
M N
Fig. 4.1
(a) Two of the regions have not been named in Fig. 4.1.
In the two boxes below the spectrum, write the names of these regions. [2]
(b) Write “long wavelength” next to the long wavelength end of the electromagnetic
spectrum. [1]
(c) State one use for the radiation of each of the following regions.
microwaves ......................................................................................................................
infra-red ...........................................................................................................................
γ-rays ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]
5 (a) Make the following sentences about sound echoes correct by crossing out the incorrect For
alternatives. An example has been given to help you. Examiner’s
Use
large
(example) An echo is caused when a sound wave hits a small obstacle.
thin
reflected
(i) An echo is a sound wave which is refracted by an obstacle. [1]
dispersed
(b) Two students, A and B, are trying to use echoes to enable them to measure the speed
of sound. Student A has two blocks of wood that make a loud sound when banged
together. Student B has a stopwatch. They stand 240 m from the school wall, as shown
in Fig. 5.1.
school
wall
B A
240 m
Fig. 5.1
Student A bangs the blocks together and, at the same time, B starts the stopwatch.
B stops the stopwatch when he hears the echo. The watch then reads 1.6 s.
(i) How far did the sound travel during the 1.6 s? ................................ m [1]
(iii) The students expected that the value for the speed of sound would be closer to For
330 m/s. Examiner’s
Use
Suggest two reasons that might explain why the students’ value was different from
what was expected.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two mercury barometers standing side by side. The right-hand diagram is
incomplete. The space labelled X is a vacuum.
glass
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 6.1
(a) On the left-hand barometer, carefully mark the distance that would have to be measured
in order to find the value of the atmospheric pressure. [2]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(c) The space above the mercury in the right-hand barometer is a vacuum.
On Fig. 6.1, mark the level of the mercury surface in the tube. [1]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08
PMT
(d) The left-hand tube now has air above the mercury; the right-hand tube has a vacuum. For
Complete the table below, using words chosen from the following list, to indicate the Examiner’s
effect of changing the external conditions. Use
atmospheric pressure
rises
temperature
rises
[4]
[Total: 10]
7 This question requires the use of a ruler or other straight edge. Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light
striking a plane mirror.
ray of
light
mirror
Fig. 7.1
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(i) draw another mirror which is perpendicular to the one in the diagram and 2 cm to
the right of A, [1]
(ii) draw the path of the ray of light after reflection from this second mirror. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2008 0625/02/O/N/08 [Turn over
PMT
10
8 (a) An iron rod is placed next to a bar magnet, as shown in Fig. 8.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, mark clearly the north pole and the south pole that are induced in the
iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the magnet and the rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
(b) A second bar magnet is now placed next to the iron rod, as shown in Fig. 8.2.
N S N S
iron rod
Fig. 8.2
(i) On Fig. 8.2, mark clearly the magnetic poles induced in the iron rod. [1]
(ii) What happens to the iron rod and the second magnet? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
(c) The iron rod is removed, leaving the two magnets, as shown in Fig. 8.3.
N S N S
Fig. 8.3
nothing
they attract
11
(d) The second magnet is removed and replaced by a charged plastic rod, as shown in For
Fig. 8.4. Examiner’s
Use
N S + –
charged
plastic rod
Fig. 8.4
What happens to the magnet and the plastic rod? Tick one box.
nothing
they attract
[Total: 6]
12
9 A toymaker wires a circuit in a toy house, so that a 6 V lamp can be switched on using either For
switch 1 at the bottom of the stairs or switch 2 at the top of the stairs. Examiner’s
The circuit is shown in Fig. 9.1. Use
X Y
6V switch 2
lamp
a
6 V supply
switch 1
A
Fig. 9.1
(a) When switch 1 is in position A, what is the position of switch 2 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When switch 2 is in position b, what is the position of switch 1 so that the lamp is lit?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
13
(d) The toymaker decides he wants to have two 6 V lamps in the circuit with the 6 V supply. For
Examiner’s
Which of the following means of connecting the lamps between X and Y, shown in Use
Fig. 9.2, is the best? Give two reasons for your answer.
X Y X Y
connection 1 connection 2
Fig. 9.2
Reason 1 .........................................................................................................................
[Total: 9]
14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to switch an electric motor For
on and off. The relay coil has a much greater resistance than the potential divider. Examiner’s
Use
pivoted iron
armature
power supply
6V for motor
M motor
switch
Fig. 10.1
(a) The relay operates when there is a potential difference of 3 V across the coil.
On Fig. 10.1, mark the position of the slider of the potential divider when the relay just
operates. [1]
(b) Describe how the relay closes the contacts in the motor circuit.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 4]
15
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a transformer being used to operate a 6 V lamp from a 240 V mains supply. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
240V 6V
mains lamp
Fig. 11.1
(a) What name is given to the piece of iron that links the two coils?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For the transformer to operate, must the mains supply be a.c., d.c., or doesn’t it
matter?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Using the information on Fig. 11.1, calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
(d) State why it would not be wise to connect a 1.5 V lamp between A and B.
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
16
12 The nucleus of one of the different nuclides of polonium can be represented by For
the symbol Examiner’s
Use
218
84 Po
218 214
84 Po 82 Pb + emitted particle
(i) State the proton number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
(ii) State the nucleon number of the emitted particle. .......................... [1]
α-particle
β-particle
neutron
proton [1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2009 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means "correct answer only".
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
e.e.o.o. means "each error or omission".
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if
figures specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units It is expected that all final answers will have correct units. Deduct one unit penalty for
each incorrect or missing unit, maximum 1 per question. No unit penalty if unit is
missing from final answer but is shown correctly in the working.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
© UCLES 2009
PMT
[Total: 4]
(d) weight /mass (of athlete) AND height/distance (of bar) B1 [1]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2009
PMT
[Total: 7]
[Total: 8]
6 (a) same B1
greater at B B1
greater at B B1 [3]
[Total: 5]
7 (a) q B1 [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009
PMT
(b) first M1
second one suffers absorption,dispersion A1 [2]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 11]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2009
PMT
11 no exposed wires )
)
no worn insulation )
)
no loose wires/connections )
)
no short circuits )
) any 3
plug correctly wired )
)
any idea about continuity check )
)
no sharp bends in cable ) B1 x 3 [3]
[Total: 3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2009
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Core October/November 2009
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
final level
20 original level 20 of water
of water
10 10
(a) State
................................................ cm3
................................................ cm3
[1]
[Total: 4]
2 As a pole vaulter runs towards the jump, his pole is straight. When he is jumping, the pole is For
bent, as illustrated in Fig. 2.1. Examiner’s
Use
pole
Fig. 2.1
(a) Which form of energy of the athlete increases as he accelerates towards the jump?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Which form of energy of the athlete increases because he is rising towards the bar?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Which two quantities need to be known in order to calculate how much work is done
lifting the athlete up from the ground to the bar?
[Total: 4]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the distance/time graph for a girl’s bicycle ride and the axes for the For
corresponding speed/time graph. Examiner’s
Use
distance
from
starting
point
0A B C D time
speed
0
A B C D time
Fig. 3.1
(a) Look at the distance/time graph that has been drawn for you.
(i) Answer the following questions for the time interval AB.
...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... [2]
..................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On the speed/time axes in the lower part of Fig. 3.1, draw a thick line that could For
show the speed during AB. [1] Examiner’s
Use
(i) draw a thick line that could show the speed during BC, [1]
(ii) draw a thick line that could show the speed during CD. [2]
(c) How far from her starting point is the girl when she has finished her ride?
[Total: 8]
4 (a) The object illustrated in Fig. 4.1 is not in equilibrium. It has a weight of 12 N. For
Examiner’s
Use
12 N
15 N 6N
weight = 12 N
Fig. 4.1
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 4.1, draw an arrow to show the extra force necessary to bring the object to
a state of equilibrium. Label the arrow with the size of the force. [2]
(iii) On Fig. 4.1, show where the centre of mass of the object is situated, using the
letter G. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a car transporter, first unloaded and then loaded with two cars on the For
upper deck. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.2
(i) What happens to the centre of mass of the transporter and its load when the cars
are loaded?
rises
falls
[1]
(ii) How do the two loaded cars affect the stability of the transporter?
more stable
no effect
less stable
[1]
[Total: 7]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the cooling curve for a pure substance. The substance is liquid at A. For
Examiner’s
Use
temperature
A
C
B
time
Fig. 5.1
1. A and B, . ..........................................................................................................
2. B and C, ...........................................................................................................
3. C and D. ...........................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) During which of the sections of the graph is energy being lost from the substance to
the surroundings? Put a tick in any of the boxes to indicate where this is happening.
between A and B
between B and C
between C and D
[2]
................................................. [1]
(b) When the temperature reaches that at D, the substance is then heated steadily until it For
again reaches the temperature it had at A. Examiner’s
Use
On the axes of Fig. 5.2, sketch a graph of temperature against time for the heating of the
substance. [2]
temperature
time
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 8]
10
6 A bicycle pump has its outlet sealed with a tight rubber bung, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
handle
bung B A
air piston
Fig. 6.1
(a) The temperature of the air in the pump is kept constant. The handle of the pump is
pushed in so that the piston moves from A to B.
Tick the correct box in each row of the table below to show how each quantity varies as
the piston is moved.
[3]
(b) When the handle is pushed in even further, the rubber bung pops out of the hole.
Which two forces are equal just before the bung pops out? Tick two boxes.
[Total: 5]
11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment in which an image is being formed on a card by a lens and a For
plane mirror. Examiner’s
Use
lens image
torch
p q
plane
mirror
hole cut
in card
Fig. 7.1
The card and the mirror are shown angled, so that you can see what is happening. In a real
experiment they are each roughly perpendicular to the line joining the torch bulb and the
centre of the lens.
(a) State which of the three marked distances, p, q and r, is the focal length of the lens.
................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1 clearly mark a principal focus of the lens, using the letter F. [1]
(c) Tick the boxes alongside two features that describe the image formed on the card.
erect
inverted
real
virtual [2]
(d) What can be said about the size of the image, compared with the size of the object?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) In the experiment, the plane mirror is perpendicular to the beam of light.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2009 0625/02/O/N/09 [Turn over
PMT
12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a student standing midway between a bell tower and a steep mountainside. For
Examiner’s
Use
steep
mountainside
student
bell tower
and bell
990 m 990 m
Fig. 8.1
The bell rings once, but the student hears two rings separated by a short time interval.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
13
(ii) Calculate the time interval between the bell ringing and the student hearing it for
the second time.
[Total: 8]
14
9 (a) The two circuits shown in Fig. 9.1 each contain two resistors and a battery. For
Examiner’s
Complete the statement under each circuit. Use
R1 R3
R2 R4
Fig. 9.1
(b) A student connects the circuit shown in Fig. 9.2. The resistance of the 12 V battery is so
low that it can be ignored.
280 Ω
12 V
200 Ω
Fig. 9.2
15
(iii) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across the 200 Ω resistor.
(iv) Describe how the student could check whether the p.d. across the 200 Ω resistor is
the same as you have calculated. Include the name of the instrument he would use
for this.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 11]
16
12 V a.c. voltmeter
V
a.c.
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 10.1, clearly label the core of the transformer. [1]
(ii) Name a suitable material from which the core could be made.
............................................................................................................................ [1]
............................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
17
11 A woodworker buys an old electric drill that has been used before. The drill is illustrated in For
Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
Suggest three checks the woodworker could make in order to ensure that the rest of his
purchase is electrically safe.
1. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
2. .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
3. .............................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 3]
18
800 counts / s.
Fig. 12.1 shows the count-rate readings at the start of the experiment and after one half-life
has elapsed.
900
800
700
600
500
count-rate
counts / s
400
300
200
100
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
time t / minutes
Fig. 12.1
19
(a) Complete the plot of the decay curve, for times up to t = 12 minutes. Draw the best curve For
through your points. [3] Examiner’s
Use
(ii) the time it takes for the count-rate to fall from 700 counts / s to 350 counts / s.
(d) A river contains fine particles of mud. The mud builds up on the bottom of the river and
prevents the movement of large ships. To solve this problem, the authorities remove the
mud and dump it at sea. To check where the mud goes after it is dumped, a radioactive
material is mixed with it and tracked with radioactivity detectors.
(i) Explain why the radioactive material X is not suitable to trace the movement of the
dumped mud.
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) State two other properties that a radioactive material must have to make it suitable
for tracking the mud.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625/02/O/N/09
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(ii) 6 × 5 × 2 ecf C1
60 (cm3) ecf A1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) tidal B1
wave B1
hydroelectric accept waterfall B1
(any order)
[Total: 6]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(b) gamma B1
(c) radio B1
(d) alpha B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) conduction B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 5]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
9 (a) (i) N at left end and S at right end (inside or outside magnet outline) M1
both N and S within magnet outline A1
(iii) nothing B1
(b) (i) pass current through coil/wire OR connect a battery across coil B1
[Total: 7]
10 (a) parallel B1
(d) parallel B1
[Total: 8]
(b) (i) S and M on door and frame (either way) so they would be next to each other when door
closed B1
S on frame and M on door edge/door face close to edge B1
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
12 (a) yes B1
yes B1
no B1
(b) nucleus B1
(ii) 8 ± 1 (mins) C1
108 ± 1 (mins) C1
100 ± 2 (mins) e.c.f. if working shown A1
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 24995/3
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
PMT
1 (a) (i) Figs. 1.1 and 1.2 show the dimensions of a rectangular block being measured using a
ruler. They are not shown full size.
Use the scales shown to find the length and the width of the block, giving your answers
in cm.
140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250
millimetres
50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
Fig. 1.1
210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
millimetres
Fig. 1.2
(ii) When the block was made, it was cut from a piece of metal 2.0 cm thick.
Fig. 1.3 shows the reading when the block is placed on a balance.
block
40 50 60 70
grams
Fig. 1.3
[Total: 8]
(b) The journey is all along a horizontal road. At the end of the journey the boy is tired because of
the work he has done.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
3 (a) Name three different energy resources used to obtain energy directly from water (not steam).
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Choose one of the energy resources you have named in (a) and write a brief description of
how the energy is converted to electrical energy.
description ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows four parallel rays of light reaching a thin converging lens. Point F is a principal focus
of the lens.
P F
Fig. 4.1
(b) On Fig. 4.1, carefully draw the paths of the rays through the lens and into the air as far as the
broken line. [2]
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
alpha (α), beta (β), gamma (γ), infra-red, radio, ultra-violet, visible, X-rays
(a) Underline all those radiations in the list which are not electromagnetic radiations. [2]
(d) Which radiation consists of particles that are the same as 4He nuclei? ............................. [1]
[Total: 5]
water water
ice
gentle
heating
ice trapped by
small piece of
gentle wire gauze
heating
Experiment 1 Experiment 2
Cold water is gently heated Cold water is gently heated
at the bottom. The ice at the at the top. The ice trapped
top melts before the water at the bottom remains solid,
boils. even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
Fig. 6.1
(a) Name the process by which thermal (heat) energy travels through the glass.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Name the principal process in Experiment 1 which takes the energy from the water at the
bottom to the ice at the top.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest two reasons why the ice in Experiment 2 does not melt, even when the water at the
top begins to boil.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
BLANK PAGE
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a ray of light is shown passing into water from air. The angle of the refracted ray to
the normal is 40°.
ray of
light
air
40° water
Fig. 7.1
(b) In Fig. 7.2, a ray of light is shown in water and reaching the surface with the air at an angle of
40° to the normal.
air
water
40°
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw accurately the path of the ray in the air. [2]
(ii) The angle in the water in Fig. 7.2 is increased from 40° to 70°, and the ray no longer
emerges into the air.
State what happens to the ray at the surface and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a workman hammering a metal post into the ground. Some distance away is a
vertical cliff.
cliff
workman
boy girl
Fig. 8.1
(a) A boy is standing at the foot of the cliff. The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s. It takes 1.5 s for
the sound of the hammer hitting the post to reach the boy.
(i) What does the boy hear after he sees each strike of the hammer on the post?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the distance between the post and the boy.
(b) A girl is also watching the workman. She is standing the same distance behind the post as
the boy is in front of it. She hears two separate sounds after each strike of the hammer on the
post.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
11
(ii) How long after the hammer strike does the girl hear each of these sounds?
[Total: 8]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the magnetic field pattern around a single bar magnet.
A B
Fig. 9.1
(i) On Fig. 9.1, mark the north and south poles of the magnet, using the letters N and S.
[2]
(ii) A small piece of unmagnetised iron is placed at A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
coil
core
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest the material from which the core should be made.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State one advantage of an electromagnet, compared with a magnet such as that in (a).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
13
10 A cruise ship is anchored in a harbour. The crew holds a party for the guests on board, and the
ship’s electrical department decorates the decks with strings of coloured lamps.
Fig. 10.1
Each string of lamps contains thirty 100 V lamps. The strings of lamps are run from a 100 V
generator. The resistance of each lamp is 250 Ω. Ignore the resistance of the generator.
(a) State whether the lamps on a particular string are connected in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) What current does the generator supply to each string of lamps?
State whether the strings are connected to the generator in series or in parallel.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
14
BLANK PAGE
15
11 The reed switch (reed relay) shown in Fig. 11.1 is a normally-closed one.
Fig. 11.1
When a magnet is held close to the reed switch, the contacts open, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
Fig. 11.2 also includes the circuit symbol for a bell.
N S
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete Fig. 11.2 so that it shows a circuit that will cause the bell to ring when the magnet is
taken away. [2]
............................................
............................................
............................................
...................................... [1]
Fig. 11.3
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2010 0625/21/O/N/10 [Turn over
PMT
16
12 The table below lists the three types of emission which can occur during radioactive decay.
(a) Complete the table to indicate whether each of the emissions has mass and whether it has
charge. Three answers have been given to help you.
mass charge
gamma (γ) NO
[3]
(b) From which part of the atom do all of these emissions come?
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The values in the table below were obtained during the decay of a radioactive substance.
0 909
20 689
40 522
60 400
80 300
100 230
120 170
140 125
160 99
(i) On Fig. 12.1, three points have been plotted for you.
Plot the remaining points, using dots in circles as shown, and draw the best-fit curve for
these points. [3]
17
1000
900
count rate
counts / min
800
= .................................. minutes
600
half-life of substance
= .................................. minutes
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
elapsed time / minutes
Fig. 12.1
18
(ii) From the graph, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 800 counts / min
to 200 counts / min. Write your answer and any working in the space on the graph. [3]
(iii) Use your value from (c)(ii) to determine the half-life of the radioactive substance.
(d) A different sample of the same radioactive substance as in (c) has an initial count rate of
4000 counts / min.
Write down the time taken for the count rate to decrease to 1000 counts / min.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 12]
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(c) more accurate OR errors less significant OR time for 1 interval too small B1
[Total: 8]
(ii) proportional B1
(iii) 1. newton(s) B1
2. 25 – 26 (mm) C1
75 – 76 (mm) A1
[Total: 8]
(ii) idea of
headwind on outward journey
OR tailwind on return journey
OR shorter route on return journey
OR air friction is less
OR idea of less weight
NOT flies slower B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
4 work B1
potential/gravitational/PE/GPE/position B1
kinetic/KE/movement B1
constant/the same/uniform B1
joule(s) OR J condone j B1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 8]
(ii) dispersion B1
(b)
red B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
[Total: 6]
(ii) wavelength B1
[Total: 5]
(b) EITHER
6/1.5 C1
(circuit res. =) 4 (Ω) C1
(res. of AB =) 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
OR
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
[Total: 7]
11 (a) condone OR B1
[Total: 4]
(b) 250 B1
98 B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/SW) 24987/3
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
PMT
1 Drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an IGCSE Physics student’s room, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
cracked
gutter
Fig. 1.1
The student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.
To do this he
then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,
Fig. 1.2
(b) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
(c) Explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Using Fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the
ground.
(e) Fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
2 An unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
50.0 mm
load
Fig. 2.1
Different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load. [1]
(b) The extensions for different loads are given in the table below.
load / N extension / mm
0 0
1.0 10.0
2.0 20.5
3.0 31.0
4.0 41.5
(i) On Fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (), and draw the best straight
line for the points. [3]
60
extension / mm
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring
2. Use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 N is hanging from
it.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10 [Turn over
PMT
air friction
engine thrust
weight
Fig. 3.1
(i) In order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the
aeroplane must be equal?
(ii) In order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the
plane.
(b) The aeroplane in Fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from Budapest (Hungary) to Palermo (Italy)
in 2.75 hours. The distance is 2200 km.
(ii) On the return journey from Palermo to Budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though
the engine thrust is the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
4 A simple pendulum starts with its bob at position X, shown in Fig. 4.1. The bob is pulled aside to Y
and then released. It swings from Y to Z and back to Y.
support
thin cord
pendulum
bob Z
Y
ground
Fig. 4.1
Write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. Ignore air resistance.
In order to move the bob from X to Y, ................................. has to be done on it and its
........................................... energy. Throughout the swing from Y to Z and back to Y, the total
[Total: 5]
5 (a) The list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature.
(i) Which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity
of energy, without changing state?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. The brass rod is inside a tube, called a
steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. The rod is fixed at the right-hand end,
but free to move at the left-hand end. The dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left
hand end.
thermometer
steam steam
in out
fixed end
Fig. 5.1
Steam is now passed through the steam jacket. In the boxes below, write down what will
happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why.
reading on
thermometer
reading on dial
micrometer
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/22/O/N/10
PMT
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light AB striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40°.
mirror B
40°
A C
Fig. 6.1
State the value of the angle of reflection of the ray ..................................................... [1]
(b) In Fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10° from its position in Fig. 6.1. AB has remained
unchanged.
10°
B
mirror 40°
A C
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.
(ii) State the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line BC. .................
(iii) Through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates
(i) State the height of the image formed by the mirror. ............................................ [1]
(ii) Find the distance between the object and the image.
[Total: 8]
10
7 A narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible
spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in Fig. 7.1.
space for
answers to part
(b)
o f
b eam
ow
narr e ligh
t
i t
wh
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.
State two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
11
8 A stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. Fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating.
Fig. 8.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
12
9 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the
resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
[3]
(ii) State the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.
[1]
(iii) State two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In Fig. 9.1, AB is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.
6.0 V
3.0
A B
Fig. 9.1
13
[Total: 10]
14
10 (a) The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. The metal wheels are rolled along the rails
from the left-hand end to the right-hand end.
metal wheels
on metal axle metal
rails
sensitive
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
15
spring
magnet
sensitive
coil
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.2
The end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in
and out of the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
16
11 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.
live
neutral
earth
[1]
[Total: 4]
17
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the
boxes.
250 0
97
Bk Cf + e –1
[2]
[Total: 6]
18
BLANK PAGE
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2010 question papers for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
un.pen. means "unit penalty". An otherwise correct answer will have one mark deducted if the
unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where specifically stated in the mark
scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing units are condoned.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
figures otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Ignore units, except where a mark is specified for a particular unit.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed out.
© UCLES 2010
PMT
(c) more accurate OR errors less significant OR time for 1 interval too small B1
[Total: 8]
(ii) proportional B1
(iii) 1. newton(s) B1
2. 25 – 26 (mm) C1
75 – 76 (mm) A1
[Total: 8]
(ii) idea of
headwind on outward journey
OR tailwind on return journey
OR shorter route on return journey
OR air friction is less
OR idea of less weight
NOT flies slower B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
4 work B1
potential/gravitational/PE/GPE/position B1
kinetic/KE/movement B1
constant/the same/uniform B1
joule(s) OR J condone j B1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 8]
(ii) dispersion B1
(b)
red B1
© UCLES 2010
PMT
[Total: 6]
(ii) wavelength B1
[Total: 5]
(b) EITHER
6/1.5 C1
(circuit res. =) 4 (Ω) C1
(res. of AB =) 1 (Ω) e.c.f. C1
0.5 (Ω/m) e.c.f. A1
OR
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
[Total: 7]
11 (a) condone OR B1
[Total: 4]
(b) 250 B1
98 B1
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2010
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2010
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (SJF/SW) 33915
© UCLES 2010 [Turn over
PMT
1 Drops of water from a cracked gutter fall past the window of an IGCSE Physics student’s room, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
cracked
gutter
Fig. 1.1
The student uses a digital stopwatch to find the time between one drop and the next.
To do this he
then, starts the stopwatch as a drop comes into view at the top of the window,
Fig. 1.2
(b) Calculate the time interval between one drop and the next.
(c) Explain why it is better to time 40 intervals than to time just 1 interval.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) Using Fig. 1.1, estimate the time for a drop to fall from the top of the upper window to the
ground.
(e) Fig. 1.1 shows that the drops get further apart as they get closer to the ground.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
2 An unstretched spring of overall length 50.0 mm is hung from a support, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
50.0 mm
load
Fig. 2.1
Different loads are placed on the spring and the extension is measured each time.
(a) On Fig. 2.1, mark clearly the extension caused by the load. [1]
(b) The extensions for different loads are given in the table below.
load / N extension / mm
0 0
1.0 10.0
2.0 20.5
3.0 31.0
4.0 41.5
(i) On Fig. 2.2, plot these values, using dots in small circles (), and draw the best straight
line for the points. [3]
60
extension / mm
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
load / N
Fig. 2.2
Within the limits of experimental accuracy, the load and the extension of the spring
2. Use the graph to estimate the overall length of the spring when 2.5 N is hanging from
it.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10 [Turn over
PMT
air friction
engine thrust
weight
Fig. 3.1
(i) In order to fly horizontally at a steady speed, which two of the forces shown on the
aeroplane must be equal?
(ii) In order to fly horizontally in a straight line, there must be a fourth force acting on the
plane.
(b) The aeroplane in Fig. 3.1 flies an outward journey from Budapest (Hungary) to Palermo (Italy)
in 2.75 hours. The distance is 2200 km.
(ii) On the return journey from Palermo to Budapest, the journey time is shorter, even though
the engine thrust is the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
4 A simple pendulum starts with its bob at position X, shown in Fig. 4.1. The bob is pulled aside to Y
and then released. It swings from Y to Z and back to Y.
support
thin cord
pendulum
bob Z
Y
ground
Fig. 4.1
Write suitable words in the gaps in the following sentences. Ignore air resistance.
In order to move the bob from X to Y, ................................. has to be done on it and its
........................................... energy. Throughout the swing from Y to Z and back to Y, the total
[Total: 5]
5 (a) The list below contains terms that are used when dealing with heat and temperature.
(i) Which one of these quantities will increase when an object is heated?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Which one of these determines the temperature rise when an object is given a quantity
of energy, without changing state?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
Which one of these quantities describes the temperature at which this happens?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an apparatus containing a brass rod. The brass rod is inside a tube, called a
steam jacket, through which steam may be passed. The rod is fixed at the right-hand end,
but free to move at the left-hand end. The dial micrometer indicates any movement of the left
hand end.
thermometer
steam steam
in out
fixed end
Fig. 5.1
Steam is now passed through the steam jacket. In the boxes below, write down what will
happen to the readings on the thermometer and the dial micrometer, and why.
reading on
thermometer
reading on dial
micrometer
[4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2010 0625/23/O/N/10
PMT
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light AB striking a plane mirror at an angle of incidence of 40°.
mirror B
40°
A C
Fig. 6.1
State the value of the angle of reflection of the ray ..................................................... [1]
(b) In Fig. 6.2, the mirror has been rotated 10° from its position in Fig. 6.1. AB has remained
unchanged.
10°
B
mirror 40°
A C
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, use a straight edge to draw the reflected ray.
(ii) State the value of the angle between the reflected ray and the line BC. .................
(iii) Through how many degrees does the reflected ray rotate when the mirror rotates
(i) State the height of the image formed by the mirror. ............................................ [1]
(ii) Find the distance between the object and the image.
[Total: 8]
10
7 A narrow beam of white light enters a glass prism and is split into the colours of the visible
spectrum, as shown (not to scale) in Fig. 7.1.
space for
answers to part
(b)
o f
b eam
ow
narr e ligh
t
i t
wh
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the different amounts of bending that give rise to the spectrum?
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The lines leaving the prism represent rays of the seven main colours of the visible spectrum.
State two other types of radiation that are also part of the electromagnetic spectrum.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
11
8 A stretched string is vibrating between two fixed ends. Fig. 8.1 shows how the string is vibrating.
Fig. 8.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
12
9 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the circuit that you would use to determine the
resistance of a coil of wire using a voltmeter and an ammeter.
[3]
(ii) State the equation you would use to calculate the resistance of the coil.
[1]
(iii) State two properties of the wire on which the resistance of the coil depends.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
2. .................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) In Fig. 9.1, AB is a 2.0 m length of uniform resistance wire, connected into a circuit.
6.0 V
3.0
A B
Fig. 9.1
13
[Total: 10]
14
10 (a) The apparatus in Fig. 10.1 is set up in a laboratory. The metal wheels are rolled along the rails
from the left-hand end to the right-hand end.
metal wheels
on metal axle metal
rails
sensitive
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe what is seen happening to the pointer on the sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) The metal wheels are now rolled back to the left-hand end again.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
15
spring
magnet
sensitive
coil
centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 10.2
The end of the magnet is pushed into the coil and released, so that it bounces repeatedly in
and out of the coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
16
11 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a fuse.
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A mains electricity circuit has three wires, live, neutral and earth.
live
neutral
earth
[1]
[Total: 4]
17
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay by writing appropriate numbers in the
boxes.
250 0
97
Bk Cf + e –1
[2]
[Total: 6]
18
BLANK PAGE
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures
specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1 (a) (i) BC B1
(ii) AB B1
2 (a) tape measure OR trundle wheel OR laser measure IGNORE metre rule B1
5 (a) 150 × 3 C1
450 (Hz) A1
6 (a) ultrasound B1
(iii) infra-red B1
(ii) freely suspend/pivot and see which end points N (or equivalent)
OR see which end is repelled by N pole of a magnet B1
(b) 4+ smooth curves leaving one end and going to the other (ignore any arrows) B1
no lines crossing or meeting, even at ends B1 [6]
(ii) power supply connected between filament & anode (no e.c.f.) B1
(ii) 2 half-lives C1
(candidate’s 2 – candidate’s 1)/2 C1
7.5–8.6 (days) e.c.f. A1 [8]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (CW/CGW) 34004/4
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
PMT
speed B C
m/s 5
A D
0
0 10 20 time / s 35
Fig. 1.1
(a) Which part, or parts, of Fig. 1.1 indicate when the object is
[Total: 5]
2 Two girls attempt to measure the speed of the water in a river, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
bridge 1
50
m
bridge 2
Fig. 2.1
Suggest an appropriate instrument that they might use to measure this distance.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The girl on bridge 1 drops a piece of wood into the water. The girl on bridge 2 measures how
long it takes for the piece of wood to reach bridge 2. It takes 400 s to travel between the two
bridges.
(i) Name an appropriate instrument that could be used to measure this time.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 9]
3 (a) In a laboratory experiment to find the centre of mass of a triangular piece of card, the card is
suspended first from point A and then from point B, as shown in Figs. 3.1 and 3.2.
B B
A
E
D D
E
C
C
(i) What piece of apparatus might be used to determine the vertical lines through A and B?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.3 below, draw construction lines to find the position of the centre of mass of
the triangular card. Label this point clearly with the letter G.
C
B D
[3]
Fig. 3.3
(b) Fig. 3.4 illustrates a toy that always returns to the upright position, whatever position it is put
in to start with.
Fig. 3.4
On one of the three positions of the toy shown in Fig. 4.3, clearly mark X at a possible position
for the centre of mass of the toy. [2]
[Total: 6]
4 In Fig. 4.1, the smoke cell consists of an illuminated glass box into which some smoke has been
injected.
microscope
smoke
cell light
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe briefly what is seen when the contents of the smoke cell are viewed through the
focused microscope.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) What deductions about the properties and behaviour of air molecules can be made from
these observations?
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
card
Fig. 5.1
The wheel has 150 teeth and rotates 3 times per second.
(b) State the approximate range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
6 The list below contains the names of the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum, but they
are in the wrong order and an extra, non-electromagnetic type of wave motion has been included.
infra-red radiation
X-rays
gamma rays
visible light
radio waves
ultrasound waves
ultra-violet radiation
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) In the boxes below, list the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum in order of
wavelength. The first and last boxes have been filled in for you.
radio waves
gamma rays
[2]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Which of these may be used to obtain a picture of a broken bone inside the body?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
7 The pivoted steel arrow from a small compass has become demagnetised.
coil
steel
arrow
Fig. 7.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw the magnetic field pattern of the magnetised needle. [2]
[Total: 6]
10
8 A student learning about electric circuits connects up the circuit shown in Fig. 8.1.
battery
ammeter
01 23
4
AMP 5
S
coil of
wire
variable resistor
(rheostat)
Fig. 8.1
(a) The student has already made one mistake with his connections.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the arrangement shown in Fig. 8.1, using
standard symbols. [2]
(c) The student now connects a voltmeter to the circuit, so that readings can be taken to find
the resistance of the coil of wire. On your circuit diagram, draw the voltmeter, connected to
measure the potential difference across the coil. [1]
11
(d) Having obtained a correctly-working circuit, the readings on the two meters for one setting of
the variable resistor are as shown in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
2 3 4 5 10
1
0 5 0 15
AMPS VOLTS
(ii) The slider on the variable resistor (see Fig. 8.1) is moved a small distance to the left,
reducing its resistance.
(iii) The slider is adjusted so that the total resistance in the circuit is double that which gave
the readings in Figs. 8.2 and 8.3.
[Total: 9]
12
9 (a) The circuit symbol shown in Fig. 9.1 represents a device often used in electrical equipment.
Fig. 9.1
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows, in simplified form, the essential parts of a grid system for distributing electrical
energy from a power station to domestic consumers. The device in part (a) is used both at X
and at Y.
132 000 V
power transmission
22 000 V cables and 240 V domestic
station
X pylons Y consumer
Fig. 9.2
(i) Using information from Fig. 9.2, deduce the ratio secondary turns necessary at X and
at Y. primary turns
(ii) State two reasons why power transmission is cheaper if the voltage across the cables is
very high.
1. ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. ........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
PMT
13
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows two identical light uncharged balls suspended on thin nylon threads.
nylon thread
ball
A B
Fig. 10.1
In the space below, draw a diagram showing the positions that the balls and threads will take,
now that the balls are charged.
[2]
(c) On ball B in your diagram, use labelled arrows to show the directions of
(iii) the tension force of the thread on the ball (label it T). [2]
(d) Ball B is in equilibrium. State the value of the resultant of forces E, W and T.
resultant = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
14
11 Fig. 11.1 shows a tube that can be used to produce cathode rays. Metal plates above and below
the tube have zero potential difference between them.
Fig. 11.1
(c) What is seen when the beam of cathode rays hits the screen?
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) A high potential difference is now connected between the two metal plates, so that the lower
plate is positive and the upper plate is negative.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
15
(a) With the radioactive sample in place, the count-rate from the sample is determined every
7 days, with the results shown below. The background count-rate has already been subtracted.
time / days 0 7 14 21 28
count-rate
1000 550 300 160 90
counts / s
On Fig. 12.1, plot a graph of count-rate from the sample against time. [3]
1000
800
600
count-rate
counts / s
400
200
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / days
Fig. 12.1
(b) (i) From your graph, find the time at which the count-rate is
(ii) From the figures in (b)(i), find the value of the half-life of the substance.
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2011 0625/21/O/N/11
PMT
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures
specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(b) stays constant (if (b) left blank, can score from (a), if stated there) B1
(ii) thermistor B1
6 (a) (i) 1. points P & P joined and continued back to lens surface
both B1
points Q & Q joined and continued back to lens surface
2. single straight line across lens for each ray, joining incident and
emerging rays B1
7 (a) increases B1
(ii) repel B1
(iii) repel B1
(ii) 2 (A) B1
(b) alpha OR α B1
beta OR β B1
(–1 if gamma mentioned)
(ii) same B1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or
part question.
DC (NF/SW) 34010/4
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
PMT
When 200 cm3 of olive oil is poured into the beaker, the total mass is 394 g.
(b) When the beaker and olive oil are heated, the olive oil expands.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows the mouth of a river, viewed from above. A and B are on opposite banks, and
are 800 m apart.
800 m
Fig. 2.1
Echo depth measurements use the time taken for sound to go from the surface to the river
bed and back again.
Such measurements give the following values for the depth of the water at different distances
from A, along the line AB.
distance from A / m 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Calculate how long a sound wave takes to travel from the surface to the bottom of the
river at a point 300 m from A.
From the figures in the table, estimate how close to A it can sail without hitting the bottom
of the river.
[Total: 6]
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A warehouse worker is about to close a large door, as shown in Fig. 3.1.
A
B
Fig. 3.1
(i) State, with a reason, which of the two positions, A or B, will enable him to close the door
with least force.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On another occasion, with the door in the position shown in Fig. 3.1, two workers each
push on the door with the same force at the same time. One worker pushes at A, from
the side seen in Fig. 3.1. The other worker pushes at B, from the other side of the door.
Which way does the door move, if at all? Tick one box.
[Total: 3]
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Some ice has all reached its melting point, and it begins to melt. What happens to the
temperature of the ice as it melts?
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) A certain substance has a melting point of –10 °C (minus 10 °C). A small amount of this
substance is cooled from 50 °C to –18 °C in a very cold freezer unit.
On Fig. 4.1, sketch a possible graph that shows how the temperature of the substance varies
with time during the cooling process.
60
temperature / °C
40
20
0
time
–20
–40
–60
[Total: 7]
5 The circuit in Fig. 5.1 is connected, and the ammeter reading is noted as the water is heated.
insulated
connecting
wires
heat
Fig. 5.1
(a) (i) State what happens to the resistance of component X as the temperature rises.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
1. at 0°C,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
2. at 100 °C?
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The resistance of X does not vary linearly with temperature between 0 °C and 100 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
6 (a) In a laboratory optics experiment, a student stands a cylindrical converging lens on a large
piece of paper and shines two parallel rays of light into it. This is shown in Fig. 6.1.
converging lens
P P
P
parallel rays
of light
Q
Q Q
Fig. 6.1
The student traces one of the rays using four pins, labelled P in Fig. 6.1. He traces the other
ray using four more pins, labelled Q.
1. the paths of the two rays in the air to the right of the lens,
2. the paths of the two rays as they pass through the lens.
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, use the letter F to label the principal focus of the lens.
[3]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows part of the path of a ray of light through a glass block.
air
B
ray of
light glass
block
Fig. 6.2
(i) State the name that describes what is happening to the ray
1. at A, ..............................................................................................................................
2. at B. ......................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the ray after it has reached C. [2]
[Total: 8]
10
7 Plane waves travel on the surface of some water in a tank. Fig. 7.1 shows the appearance, from
above, of the waves before and after the boundary between two different depths of water in the
tank.
L R
waves move
this way
boundary
Fig. 7.1
(a) State what happens to the wavelength as the waves cross the boundary.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Water waves travel more slowly when the water is shallower, but the frequency does not
change.
(i) State, giving your reasons, which side of the boundary, L or R, has the deeper water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Some more water is poured into the tank, and waves of the same frequency as before
are generated in the tank.
What difference, if any, will this make to the appearance of the waves
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
11
8 (a) Two charged metal spheres are placed next to each other.
In the box alongside each pair of spheres, write “attract” or “repel” or “no effect” to describe
the effect the spheres have on each other.
(i) + –
(ii) + +
(iii) – –
[3]
(b) Water is flowing in a very narrow stream from a water tap (faucet). A negatively-charged
plastic strip is held close to the stream of water, as shown in Fig. 8.1.
tap (faucet)
negatively-charged
plastic strip
water X
Fig. 8.1
In terms of the water at the point labelled X, suggest why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
12
9 (a) Two coils are wound on an iron rod, as shown in Fig. 9.1. One coil is connected to a cell and a
switch. The other is connected to a sensitive centre-zero millivoltmeter.
iron rod
sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter
Fig. 9.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. a small steel pin held close to one end of the iron rod,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
13
(b) You are given an iron bar, a length of insulated wire, a battery and a variable resistor.
(i) In the space below, draw a diagram of the electromagnet that includes the circuit. [2]
(ii) What is the setting of the variable resistor that gives the strongest magnetism of the
electromagnet?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
14
10 The circuit in Fig. 10.1 is connected. The potential difference across resistor R is measured as 8.0 V.
ammeter 3
A
current
reading A ammeter 1 A ammeter 2
= 2.0 A
R 4.0 Ω
potential
difference
= 8.0 V
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) What instrument is used to measure the potential difference across R?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw this instrument in position in the circuit, using the correct circuit
symbol. [2]
(d) State the value of the potential difference across the 4.0 Ω resistor.
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2011 0625/22/O/N/11
PMT
15
11 The count rate from a sample of radioactive material is measured every 20 minutes for 2 hours.
The results, suitably corrected for background radiation, are shown in the table.
count rate
280 210 164 122 88 72 54
counts / s
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Name the two types of particle that the radioactive material might be emitting.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) From the table, without attempting a graph, estimate the half-life of the radioactive material.
(d) A similar experiment is carried out, using a larger quantity of the same radioactive material.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) State one precaution that should be taken for safe handling of the radioactive material.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
16
4
2 He
238
92 U
A
Z Th
Fig. 12.1
(a) In the space below, write the nuclear equation for this decay, including the numerical values of
A and Z. [3]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the report on the
examination.
• Cambridge will not enter into discussions or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2011 question papers for most
IGCSE, GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level
syllabuses.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark
to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more
than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to
mean what we want, give credit.
Significant Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if figures
specified otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
1 (a) 25km B1
3 (a) strain/elastic/potential B1
(ii) gas/vapour B1
(iii) liquid B1
(b) condensation B1
(b) HIS B1
(ii) magnet B1
(b) larger B1
(c) smaller B1
(d) nothing OR small oscillations about zero position OR blurred light spot B1 [6]
(ii) 136/4 C1
34 (counts/min) A1
12 (a) (i) 3 B1
(iii) 4 B1
(b) 7
and
3
e.c.f. from (ii) and (iv) B1 [5]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2011
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (CW/CGW) 34016/3
© UCLES 2011 [Turn over
PMT
m
P
k
10
5k
m
km
10
Q
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 shows the speed-time graph for the car journey. The car starts from rest at O.
speed
O P Q R
time
Fig. 1.2
(a) State the value of the distance represented by the shaded area.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what the car was doing during the interval
(c) Is the average speed during the journey the same as, less than or more than the maximum
speed shown on the graph?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
2 Some very fine grains of powder are mixed with some water. The powder does not dissolve.
A small drop of the mixture is put on a glass slide and viewed through a microscope.
The powder grains are observed to be moving with a jerky, random motion.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 3]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a vertical strip made of springy metal, clamped at the top.
clamp
metal strip
X Y Z
Fig. 3.1
The work done moving the strip is stored as energy in the strip.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The strip is released from X and it initially oscillates between X and Z.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) As time progresses, the frequency of the oscillation remains the same but the amplitude
becomes less.
1. frequency,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
2. amplitude.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) What happens to the total energy of the strip as the amplitude decreases?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) When the oscillations eventually cease, in which position does the strip come to rest?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
Steam is coming out of a kettle of boiling water. When the steam strikes a cold jug, it makes the
jug wet.
(b) All of the following words are names of things that could happen during a change of state.
State which of these is used to describe what happens to the steam to make the jug wet.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) When the steam hits the jug, what happens to the energy stored in the steam?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]
The flask is connected to a vacuum pump, the air is pumped out and then the tap is closed.
Calculate
(a) the mass of the air in the flask before connecting to the vacuum pump,
[Total: 6]
6 A boat is using echo-sounding equipment to measure the depth of the water underneath it, as
illustrated in Fig. 6.1.
Fig. 6.1
(a) The equipment in the boat sends a short pulse of sound downwards and detects the echo
after a time interval of 0.80 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The boat is sailing away from the shore. The depth of water increases uniformly with distance
from the shore.
On Fig. 6.2, sketch a graph that shows how the time interval to hear the echo might change
as the distance from the shore changes.
time interval
to hear echo
0
0 distance from shore
Fig. 6.2
[2]
[Total: 8]
10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a point object P above a horizontal plane mirror.
eye
object
P
plane
mirror
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(b) A boy carefully writes HE CHECKED HIS BOOK on a piece of graph paper. He lays the paper
on the table and then positions a vertical mirror as shown in Fig. 7.2.
vertical
mirror
Which word of the reflection of the sentence in the mirror looks different from that written on
the paper?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
11
(c) The two prisms shown in Fig. 7.3 are made of glass.
A ray of red light enters each prism from the air, as shown.
45°
30°
ray of ray of
red red
light light
60° 45°
Fig. 7.3
The critical angle for red light at the glass-air boundary is 42°.
On Fig. 7.3, complete the paths of the rays through the prisms and out into the air again. [5]
[Total: 10]
12
8 (a) A student tests to see whether certain materials conduct electricity. He uses the circuit in
Fig. 8.1 and connects the materials in turn in the gap between P and Q.
6 V battery
A X
P Q
Fig. 8.1
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the student can tell if a certain material conducts electricity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which of the following materials is a good conductor of electricity? Put a tick alongside
each material that is a good conductor.
copper
glass
iron
nylon
perspex [1]
13
(b) The student now connects a small heater in the gap in the circuit, as shown in Fig. 8.2. He
wishes to determine the resistance of the heater.
6 V battery
A X
heater
Fig. 8.2
(i) What other meter must he connect in the circuit, in order to determine the resistance?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 8.2, draw this meter in the correct position in the circuit. [1]
14
(c) Fig. 8.3 shows a radiant electric fire with 3 heating elements, each of which operates at full
temperature when 250 V is connected across it.
Fig. 8.3
There are 2 switches. The top switch controls one heating element and the bottom switch
controls two heating elements connected in parallel.
250 V a.c.
Fig. 8.4
(ii) The current in one heating element is 2.5 A when it is connected to the 250 V supply.
Calculate the resistance of the heating element.
(iii) All three heating elements are switched on. Which statement about the total resistance
of the electric fire is correct? Tick one box.
no resistance
15
(i) When the girl holds one end of bar 1 near a magnet, she finds that it attracts both the
N pole and the S pole of the magnet.
What does this tell you about bar 1?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) When the girl holds one end of bar 2 near the magnet, it attracts the N pole of the
magnet, but repels the S pole.
What does this tell you about bar 2?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In another experiment, the girl uses two table-tennis balls A and B. Each is coated with a thin
layer of conducting material. Ball A is mounted on an insulating stand and ball B is suspended
from a thin nylon thread. The arrangement is shown in Fig. 9.1.
A B
Fig. 9.1
Ball A is given a negative charge, and is slowly moved towards ball B until it touches.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
16
10 A coil P is joined to a battery and a switch S. A similar coil Q is joined to a sensitive centre-zero
millivoltmeter G.
P Q
Fig. 10.1
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A soft iron bar, as long as the combined lengths of P and Q, is placed inside P and Q.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The bar in (b) is removed and the battery is changed for one with a smaller e.m.f.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
17
(d) The battery is replaced by an a.c. power supply of frequency 50 cycles per second, and then
S is closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
18
11 The counter in Fig. 11.1 records the total number of times that a radiation is detected whilst the
counter is switched on.
counter
OFF
ON
X•
radiation detector
Fig. 11.1
(a) With no radioactive source present, the counter is set to zero and then switched on for
4 minutes.
1 3 6
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
19
(b) (i) Point X is 25 cm from the radiation detector. A source that is known to be highly radioactive
is placed at X.
The counter is reset to zero, and the count again taken for 4 minutes.
1 3 2
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The source is moved to a position 2 cm from the detector. The counter is set to zero and
restarted. The counter reading after counting for 4 minutes is:
8 7 6
[Total: 7]
20
12 Fig. 12.1 represents a neutral lithium atom. All the particles in the atom are shown on the diagram.
orbit
nucleus
Fig. 12.1
(a) Use Fig. 12.1 to help you answer the following questions.
(i) How many electrons does this atom have? ................................... [1]
(ii) What is the value of the proton number of this atom? ................................... [1]
(iii) How many neutrons does the atom have? ................................... [1]
(iv) What is the value of the nucleon number of this atom? ................................... [1]
(b) Write the appropriate numbers in the boxes below, to represent this atom of Lithium in nuclide
notation.
Li
[1]
[Total: 5]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
1 (a) moment/torque
ignore turning force B1
(c) kinetic B1
ignore heat
(b) (i) blue light refracted from same point at first surface B1
blue shown with greater refraction B1
blue light always below red light B1
(c) (i) two resistors shown in parallel (accept any symbol here) B1
condone faint lines through resistors (where attempted to rub out wire)
(ii) increases/higher/greater M1
condone greater than zero
any indication of gradual increase A1
(c) remains the same OR decreases/goes back to zero (very) slowly i.e. ignore B1 [5]
decreases/getting smaller on their own.
10 (a) copper B1
(b) core B1
(c) (10mm) lead / Pb stops all β OR only γ gets through (10 mm) lead / Pb B1
still some count rate with lead / Pb B1 [6]
240 240
(c) (i) 94 Pu OR Pu OR 94 B1
250 250
(ii) 98 Cf OR 98 NOT just Cf B1 [6]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49779/4
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
For
Examiner’s
1 (a) State the name that is given to the turning effect of a force. Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A gate has rusty hinges that are very stiff. A man opens the gate by pulling on it, as
shown in Fig. 1.1.
Fig. 1.1
After he has passed through the opening, he closes the gate behind him.
When closing the gate, the man pulls it at a point halfway along its length.
State two differences between his force when closing the gate and his force when he
opened the gate.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Suggest one way of reducing the force needed to open the gate.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
2 (a) State the equation linking the density of a substance with its mass and volume. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When oil leaks out of a damaged oil-tanker, it forms a very thin layer of oil, known as an
oil slick, on the water.
One such oil slick covers an approximately rectangular area measuring 2.5 × 104 m by
6.0 × 103 m.
[Total: 6]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows four runners at the start of an 80 m race on a school sports day. For
Examiner’s
Use
starting pistol timekeeper
80 m
Calculate the time taken for the sound from the starting pistol to reach the timekeeper.
(b) The timekeeper takes 0.20 s to react after hearing the sound and then starts the
stopwatch.
(i) By how much will his time for the race be in error?
(ii) Suggest how he can reduce this error, whilst still using the same stopwatch.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) When he stops the stopwatch as the winner crosses the finishing line, the appearance For
of the stopwatch is as shown in Fig. 3.2. Examiner’s
Use
55 0 5
50 min 10
5
45 15
seconds
40 20
35
30 25
Fig. 3.2
How long did the winner actually take to run the race?
[Total: 8]
4 An archer pulls the string of his bow, and moves the arrow to the position shown in Fig. 4.1. For
He then releases the string so that the arrow is fired towards a target. Examiner’s
Use
bow
string
arrow
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) What type of energy does the arrow have because it is moving?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) On another occasion, the archer fires the arrow so that it rises up to a maximum height
before falling back down to the ground.
Use words from the following list to complete the sentences below.
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
PMT
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The nut in Fig. 5.1 has become jammed on the bolt, so that it will not rotate.
nut
bolt
very hot
flame
Fig. 5.1
Explain why heating the nut with a very hot flame is likely to free the jammed nut.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
6 (a) In Fig. 6.1, a ray of red light is shown passing through a triangular glass prism and on to For
another prism that is identical but upside down. Examiner’s
Use
t
l igh
red
Fig. 6.1
(i) The angle of incidence of the red light at the first surface is shown on Fig. 6.1 as i.
On Fig. 6.1, use the letter r to mark clearly the angle of refraction at the first surface.
[1]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the right-hand prism and out into
the air again. Label the emergent ray “line R”. [3]
(iii) The beam of red light is moved so that it shines into the right-hand prism along
line R.
Using the letter P, mark clearly the point where this ray will emerge from the left-
hand prism. [1]
(b) On another occasion, a beam containing a mixture of red and blue light is shone into a
prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
i red lig
ht
t
igh
l
red + ht
ig
el
blu
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of the blue light through the prism and out into the air
again. [3]
diffraction
dispersion
focusing
[Total: 9]
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a compass needle that has come to rest in the Earth’s magnetic field. For
Examiner’s
Use
compass
needle
N S
Fig. 7.1
(a) On Fig. 7.1, draw an arrow pointing towards the north pole of the Earth. [1]
(b) The S pole of a bar magnet is brought towards the S pole of the compass needle, as
shown in Fig. 7.2.
N S S
Fig. 7.2
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
11
(c) The magnet in (b) is removed and a horizontal wire is positioned above the compass For
needle, as shown in Fig. 7.3. Examiner’s
Use
wire
N S
Fig. 7.3
When there is a current in the wire, the compass needle rotates through a small angle.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]
12
Fig. 8.1
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Three cells identical to the cell in Fig. 8.1 make up a 4.5 V battery. The battery is
connected in series with a 180 Ω resistor.
(c) A second 180 Ω resistor is connected in parallel with the 180 Ω resistor from (b).
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram of the two resistors in parallel,
connected to the battery. Use standard symbols.
[3]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2012 0625/21/O/N/12
PMT
13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a time-delay circuit that includes a capacitor C and a resistor of very high For
resistance. Examiner’s
Use
C V
Fig. 9.1
(a) On Fig. 9.1, use the letter S to label the switch. [1]
(b) When the switch is open, the voltmeter in the circuit registers zero.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
14
10 A 240 V a.c. mains supply is connected to the primary coil of the transformer shown in For
Fig. 10.1. A lamp that gives full brightness with a 6 V supply is connected to the secondary Examiner’s
coil. Use
240 V 6V
mains lamp
Fig. 10.1
(a) Name a suitable material from which the coils may be made.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the name given to the part of the transformer that is made of soft iron (see
Fig. 10.1).
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Calculate the number of turns of wire in the secondary coil that will enable the lamp to
light at full brightness.
(d) State what would happen to the lamp if the number of turns in the secondary coil was
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
15
11 The apparatus for investigating the absorption of the emissions from a radioactive source is For
shown in Fig. 11.1. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 11.1
The source and detector are about 2 cm apart. The detector is connected to a scaler, which
measures the count rate.
Different absorbing materials are placed between the source and the detector.
The table below shows the count rate obtained with each of five absorbers.
count rate
absorbing material
counts / s
air 523
sheet of paper 523
0.5 mm of aluminium 391
10 mm of aluminium 214
10 mm of lead 122
(a) How can you tell that the source is not emitting any α-particles?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
16
4 4
12 (a) The symbol for an α-particle is either 2 α or 2 He. For
Examiner’s
Use
(i) What does the 4 indicate about an α-particle?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
0 0
(b) The symbol for a β-particle is either –1β or –1e.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The list below gives, in nuclide notation, the symbols of five radioactive nuclides.
240 244 248 250 250
94Pu 96Cm 98Cf 97Bk 98Cf
244
(i) 96Cm decays by emitting an α-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
250
(ii) 97Bk decays by emitting a β-particle.
Into which of the other nuclides in the list does it decay? .................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
(c) (i) 3 or 4 B1
(ii) 1 (km) B1
[9]
3 (a) less B1
(b) (i) normal between mid point of mirror and P correct by eye B1
(ii) violet B1
any 2 correct B1
(b) (i) meter 1 remaining 2 correct B1
B1
(ii) voltmeter
(ii) L2 and L3 B1
(b) L1 off
L2 full – 1 e.e.o.o. B2
L3 off
L1 partial
L2 partial – 1 e.e.o.o. B2
L3 partial
[6]
(ii) motor/ammeter/voltmeter/galvanometer/multimeter B1
[4]
12 (a) vacuum B1
(c) heated B1
(d) cathode B1
anode B1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49780/3
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the distance / time graph for a bus that goes to collect supporters from a For
football match and take them home to their villages. Examiner’s
Use
6
distance from
bus depot 5
/ km
4
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
time / minutes
Fig. 1.1
(a) The bus drives from its depot, without stopping, along the straight road to the football
ground.
(i) the distance from the bus depot to the football ground,
(ii) the time taken, in hours, to travel from the bus depot to the football ground,
(iii) the speed, in km / hour, of the bus on its journey to the football ground.
(b) State how you can tell from Fig. 1.1 that the bus travelled at a constant speed to the For
football ground. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The bus returned to the depot by the same route, stopping a number of times to let
supporters get off near to their home villages.
(i) At how many villages did the bus stop? ............................................................... [1]
(ii) What was the smallest distance from a village to the football ground?
[Total: 9]
2 (a) The length of a rectangular sheet of plastic is measured using a short ruler, as shown in For
Fig. 2.1 (not full size). Examiner’s
Use
mm 1
6
2
5
3
4
5
4
6
7
3
8
9
10
2
11
12
sheet of plastic
13
1
14
15
ins
From the ruler in Fig. 2.1, find the length, in cm, of the sheet.
(b) The sheet of plastic in (a) has a thickness of 0.50 cm and a width that is half its length.
(ii) Which laboratory instrument could be used to check the mass of the sheet?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a manometer being used to measure the pressure of some gas in a container. For
The container is connected to the manometer by a length of rubber tubing. Examiner’s
Use
millimetre scale
rubber
tubing
to container
184 mm
of gas
61 mm
mercury
Fig. 3.1
(a) State whether the pressure of the gas in the container is greater than, the same as, or
less than the pressure of the atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) From Fig. 3.1, deduce the difference between the gas pressure and the atmospheric
pressure.
(d) State how the vertical height difference of the two mercury surfaces changes, if at all, if
a mercury manometer made from a narrower tube is used.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12
PMT
4 A busy factory has a corner in a corridor where people are likely to collide. To avoid such For
collisions, a plane mirror is fixed across the corner, as shown in Fig. 4.1. Examiner’s
Use
plane mirror
offices
corridor
A'
workshop
B B'
Fig. 4.1
(a) Using this mirror, people at A and at B can see each other’s reflections.
On Fig. 4.1, put X to show where the image of the person at A will be, as seen by the
person at B. [2]
(i) On Fig. 4.1, draw the normal to the mirror at end P. [1]
(ii) Draw lines on Fig. 4.1 to help you decide whether the two people can still see each
other’s reflections.
Can they still see each other’s reflections? Having drawn your lines, tick one box
below.
definitely yes
just about
definitely no [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/22/O/N/12 [Turn over
PMT
5 A boy is sitting still on a swing that is oscillating from side to side, as shown in Fig. 5.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
A
B
Fig. 5.1
(a) At the highest point of the oscillation, the boy’s gravitational potential energy is 150 J
more than it is at the lowest point of the oscillation.
(b) The time for the boy to swing from A to B and back to A is approximately 3 s.
Describe how you would determine this time as accurately as possible. State the simple
laboratory instrument you would use.
method .............................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
6 (a) A crystal that dissolves slowly is put into some water in a beaker, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
crystal
heat
Fig. 6.1
As it dissolves, the crystal colours the water around itself. When the beaker is heated,
the coloured water moves as shown in Fig. 6.1.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A decorator, up a step-ladder painting the ceiling of a room, comments, “It is hotter up
here by the ceiling than it is down on the floor.”
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. Two regions have not been For
named, and there is an enlargement of the visible region. Examiner’s
Use
visible
L M
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the two boxes on Fig. 7.1, write the names of the regions they are indicating. [2]
(b) State the name of the colour of the light that is found
(c) (i) A man stands in the beam of light from a spot-lamp and finds that it makes him feel
warm.
Which radiation, other than visible, does this observation show that the spotlight is
emitting?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) State one property, apart from their electromagnetic nature, that is the same for
the radiations in all the regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
11
8 A student has two wires A and B. She connects each in turn between the terminals P and Q For
in the circuit of Fig. 8.1. Examiner’s
Use
meter 2
meter 1
P Q
wire A
or wire B
Fig. 8.1
For each wire, she measures the current in the wire when there are various potential
differences across it.
(a) (i) Which of the two meters measures the current? ......................................................
(b) (i) Which of the two meters measures the potential difference (p.d.)? .........................
12
(c) When the student draws the graphs of p.d. against current for the two wires, she gets For
the lines shown in Fig. 8.2. Examiner’s
Use
p.d. / V wire B
2
wire A
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
current / A
Fig. 8.2
(i) From Fig. 8.2, find the p.d. across wire A when there is a current of 0.8 A in it.
(iii) From Fig. 8.2, how can you tell that the resistance of wire A remains constant
during the experiment?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
13
(iv) How can you tell that the resistance of wire B is greater than the resistance of For
wire A? Examiner’s
Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(v) Wires A and B are made of the same material and have the same thickness.
State, giving your reasons, which of the wires is the longer wire.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]
14
9 In the circuit of Fig. 9.1, a 12 V car battery is connected to three identical lamps and two For
switches. The resistance of the battery is so small that it may be ignored. Examiner’s
Use
12 V
S1
L2
L1
L3 S2
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) When switches S1 and S2 are both open, which two lamps are in series?
(ii) When switches S1 and S2 are both closed, which two lamps are in parallel?
15
(b) Each of the three lamps glows with full brightness when there is a p.d. of 12 V across the For
lamp. Examiner’s
Use
Complete the tables below, to show how the lamps glow with different switch
combinations. Tick one box in each row.
[Total: 6]
16
10 A wire between the poles of a large horseshoe magnet is carrying a current. For
Examiner’s
Fig. 10.1 shows the direction of the force acting on the wire. Use
current
force
magnet magnet
N S
wire
Fig. 10.1
On Fig. 10.2 below, draw an arrow to show the direction of the force on the wire.
current
magnet magnet
S N
Fig. 10.2
[1]
17
current
magnet magnet
S N
Fig. 10.3
[1]
(c) In the arrangement of Fig. 10.1 at the beginning of this question, the electromagnetic
force on the wire is greater than the weight of the wire.
(i) Suggest what happens to the wire as the current is switched on.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest one common device that makes use of this effect.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
18
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows the decay curve for a particular radioactive substance.
2500
count rate
counts / min
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / minutes
Fig. 11.1
(i) Use numbers from the graph to show that the half-life of the radioactive substance
is 2 minutes.
[3]
(ii) Estimate the value of the count rate at a time of 6 minutes from the start of the
measurements.
[Total: 8]
19
12 Fig. 12.1 shows parts of a tube in which cathode rays are produced. For
Examiner’s
Use
Y-plates
X-plates
P1
screen
cathode
P2 P4
P3
anode
electron beam
(cathode rays)
Fig. 12.1
(a) What occupies the remaining space within the tube? Tick one box.
air
hydrogen
nitrogen
vacuum [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Between which two parts shown on Fig. 12.1 is there a large potential difference that
causes the electrons to be accelerated into a beam?
(e) The electron beam normally travels along the axis of the tube, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
Between which two parts must a potential difference be connected in order to deflect
the beam upwards?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2012 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures [ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore Indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
Work which has been crossed out, but not replaced, should be marked as if it had not been crossed
out.
1 (a) 54 (s) B1
405 / 54 C1
7.5 A1
m/s B1
2
shape molecular
arrangement
[4]
3 renewable
non-renewable
(ii) 1. 45(°) B1
2. 45(°) with correct ° symbol at least once B1
(ii) convection B1
7 (a) reflection / sound coming back / sound heard for 2nd time M1
off an object A1
(b) DIAGRAM
source of sound and large obstacle B1
distance shown as [ 150 m B1
DESCRIPTION
make (loud) sound and listen B1
9 (a) N S N B1
(b) (i)
(b) 92 B1
146 B1
92 no e.c.f. B1 [7]
(b) 3 B1
(d) curve above existing line at all points and roughly parallel B1 [5]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2012
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
10
11
12
Total
DC (CW/SW) 49782/4
© UCLES 2012 [Turn over
PMT
1 Two boys, X and Y, decide to measure the speed of some of the vehicles travelling along a For
road. The two boys stand 405 m apart beside the road, as shown in Fig. 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
Y 405 m X
Cambridge
Transport
Company
Boy X has a stopwatch which he sets to zero. As a vehicle passes boy Y, boy Y drops his
hand as a signal to boy X to start his stopwatch. Boy X then stops the stopwatch as the
vehicle goes past him.
60
55 5
seconds
50 10
45 15
40 20
35
30 25
Fig. 1.2
(a) How long did it take for the vehicle to travel from Y to X?
(c) The vehicle in (a) and (b) is accelerating as it travels from Y to X. For
Examiner’s
(i) How does its speed at X compare with that at Y? Use
greater than at Y
same as that at Y
(ii) How does its speed at X compare with the average speed calculated in (b)?
[Total: 7]
2 Solids, liquids and gases have different properties. The list below gives some of them. For
Examiner’s
completely fills the container Use
fixed shape
Use descriptions from the list to complete the table. Any description may be used more than
once if appropriate. Two spaces have been filled in to help you.
shape molecules
(a) solid
[2]
[1]
[1]
[Total: 4]
3 Here is a list of energy resources available to the world. Some of these are renewable and For
some are non-renewable. Examiner’s
Use
In the first blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are renewable.
In the second blank column, put a tick by any two resources that are non-renewable.
renewable non-renewable
coal
hydroelectricity
nuclear energy
oil
solar energy
tidal energy
wind energy
[4]
[Total: 4]
4 An aluminium rod is cut into a longer section and a shorter section, as shown in Fig. 4.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
(a) The shorter section of the rod is placed into a measuring cylinder containing water.
Fig. 4.2 shows the appearance of the measuring cylinder before and after this is done.
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 40
30 30
20 20
water
10 10 shorter section of
aluminium rod
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) Name an instrument that could be used to measure the length of the longer section
of aluminium rod.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Suggest a method, different from that in Fig. 4.2, that could be used to determine
the volume of this longer section.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]
5 (a) In Fig. 5.1, A and B are two parallel plane mirrors. A ray of light strikes mirror A at an For
angle of incidence of 45°. The ray then reflects, to strike mirror B. Examiner’s
Use
45°
normal
x
y
normal
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the name given to the angle x shown on Fig. 5.1.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
1. angle x, .....................................................
2. angle y. .....................................................
[2]
(iii) On Fig. 5.1, use your ruler to draw the path of the ray after it leaves the surface
of B. [1]
(b) The mirror B is now rotated so that it reflects the ray of light back along its original path. For
Examiner’s
On Fig. 5.2, draw mirror B in the correct position to do this. Use
45°
normal
x
[1]
Fig. 5.2
[Total: 5]
10
6 Some water in a glass beaker is heated from below, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
water
heat
Fig. 6.1
(b) As thermal energy is supplied, the temperature of the water begins to rise. Although
the supply of energy remains constant, eventually the temperature becomes steady at
about 80°C.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The rate of energy supply is increased. The temperature of the water begins to rise
again, but eventually becomes steady at a higher temperature. This time many bubbles
are seen throughout the water.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
air
hydrogen
oxygen
steam [1]
[Total: 5]
11
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Describe how the echo of a sound may be demonstrated. Include a diagram that shows
approximate sizes and distances.
diagram
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) The demonstration in (b) is used to find the speed of sound in air.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State how you would calculate the speed of sound from these measurements.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
12
8 Fig. 8.1 represents the circuit that operates two of the lamps on a car. For
Examiner’s
Use
switch
fuse
L1 car battery
lamps L2
Fig. 8.1
(a) In the space below, draw the circuit diagram for this circuit, using conventional symbols.
[3]
(b) The car battery has an e.m.f. of 12 V and, when the lamps are switched on, there is a
current of 1.6 A in each lamp.
13
(c) When the switch is turned on, both lamps should light up. On one occasion when the For
driver operates the switch, lamp L2 fails to light up. Examiner’s
Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) An amateur workman connects a length of wire across lamp L2 and shorts it out.
When the switch is closed for the first time after this, what happens, if anything, to
[Total: 11]
14
9 (a) Magnets A and B, shown in Fig. 9.1, attract each other. For
Examiner’s
Use
S
magnet A magnet B
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, mark the polarities of the other poles, using the letters N or S. [1]
(b) A soft-iron rod and a steel rod each have coils around them. Both rods are initially
unmagnetised. The coils are attached to circuits, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
Fig. 9.2
(i) Use the following statements to complete the table referring to the soft-iron rod and
the steel rod shown in Fig. 9.2.
soft iron
steel
[2]
(ii) Which words apply to the force between the rods when the switches are closed?
no force
attractive force
15
(iii) Which of the two arrangements in Fig. 9.2 would be used as the electromagnet on For
the crane in a scrap-metal yard? Examiner’s
Use
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iv) State one advantage that an electromagnet could have in comparison with a
similar-sized permanent magnet.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]
16
10 (a) Suggest how a plastic rod may be given an electrostatic charge. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
When a plastic rod with a positive charge is held near the suspended charged sphere,
the sphere moves to the position shown in Fig. 10.1.
plastic rod
insulating thread
+
+
+
+ charged sphere
+
+
+
+
Fig. 10.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow to show the electrostatic force on the sphere. [1]
17
(d) The positively-charged plastic rod is removed and replaced by a plastic rod with a For
negative charge. Examiner’s
Use
Describe the position that the suspended sphere now takes.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
18
0 or m or 2000 m.
[Total: 7]
19
12 Fig. 12.1 shows the graph of the count rate from a radioactive source over a period of time. For
The readings have already had the background count rate subtracted. Examiner’s
Use
1000
count rate
counts / s
800
600
400
200
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / s
Fig. 12.1
(a) From Fig. 12.1, find the time taken for the count rate to decrease from 1000 counts / s to
125 counts / s.
(b) How many half-lives of the radioactive material were there during the time interval
in (a)?
(c) From your answers to (a) and (b), calculate the half-life of the material.
(d) On Fig. 12.1, sketch the curve that might have been plotted if the background count rate
had not been subtracted. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2012 0625/23/O/N/12
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
o.w.t.t.e. means “or words to that effect”.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
2 (a) (D = ) mass/volume C1
476/35 C1
13.6 OR 13 600 A1
g / cm3 OR kg / m3 B1
note: if value calculated, unit must agree with value)
(b) top box ticked (mass of water is less than mass of mercury) B1
[Total: 7]
(ii) 1. at pivot (however expressed) e.g. idea of where plank in contact with log B1
2. upwards accept up, vertically is insufficient B1
[Total: 5]
(b) (i) particles/air/solid vibrates/is moved OR prongs push/collide with air molecules B1
reference to/idea of (sound) waves B1
idea of pressure/longitudinal/compressions/rarefactions (transmitted through air) B1
(iii) pitch C1
lower pitch / octave lower ignore lower/less sound NOT louder/quieter A1
[Total: 8]
5 (a) thermometer B1
(c) balance OR scales, condone scale / weighing machine, accept measuring cylinder B1
find mass of empty beaker/container/apparatus, accept measure volume of water B1
find mass of beaker/container/apparatus + water, accept look up density of water B1
subtract the two masses, accept use M = D x V B1
note: allow weight/weigh instead of mass, ignore if subtraction gives negative mass
[Total: 8]
(ii) X marked above point where candidate’s blue light hits screen B1
[Total: 5]
(b) diminished B1
inverted B1
image distance less B1
(c) any correct ray with appropriate refraction either at centre line or at both surfaces B1
[Total: 6]
right B1
left B1
(b) no effect B1
no effect B1
attracts B1
attracts B1
[Total: 8]
9 (a) resistor B1
(ii) 6.0 V OR 6 V, unity penalty applies unless penalised in (i), no e.c.f. from (i) B1
(iii) 250 mA OR 0.25 A, unit penalty applies unless penalised in (i) or (ii) B1
(c) (R =) V/I C1
6/0.25 OR 6/250 C1
24 OR 0.024 A1
Ω OR ohm(s) OR kΩ (note: if value calculated, unit must agree with value) B1
(ii) increases B1
(iii) unchanged B1
accept no effect/none
[Total: 11]
12 (a) 84 B1
(b) 128 B1
(d) 208 B1
82 B1
[Total: 6]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NH/SW) 64825/7
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
1 A wind turbine can be seen through the window of the IGCSE Physics class laboratory, as For
shown in Fig. 1.1. Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 1.1
The blades on the wind turbine are turning slowly, so a student uses a laboratory stopclock
to time 40 rotations of the blades.
50 minutes 10
hand
45 15
seconds
40 hand 20
35 25
30
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Calculate the time, in seconds, for one rotation of the blades.
(b) Later in the day, the blades of the wind turbine are found to take 15 s to rotate once. For
Examiner’s
The tip of the blade travels in a circle of circumference 75 m. Use
[Total: 7]
(b) The density of water is much less than the density of mercury.
How does the mass of 35 cm3 of water compare with the mass of 35 cm3 of mercury?
(i) What happens to the mass of the mercury? Tick one box.
decreases
increases
(ii) What happens to the density of the mercury? Tick one box.
decreases
increases
[2]
[Total: 7]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
A girl sits on one end of the plank, and a boy pushes down on the other end to keep the
plank horizontal. Fig. 3.1 shows this arrangement.
pivot
Fig. 3.1
(i) What two things can be said about the moments caused by the boy and by the girl?
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) There are four forces acting on the plank when it is in equilibrium. Three of the
forces are:
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) State what is meant by the frequency of the vibration of a vibrating object. For
Examiner’s
.......................................................................................................................................... Use
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a tuning fork. Its frequency is indicated by the number on the handle.
512 Hz
handle B
Fig. 4.1
When the tuning fork is struck on a solid surface, the prongs A and B vibrate as indicated
by the arrows.
(i) Explain how a sound is produced and transmitted when the prongs are vibrating.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) After the tuning fork was struck on the solid surface, the sound from the tuning fork
gradually gets quieter.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Another tuning fork is marked with 256 Hz, to indicate its frequency.
State how the sound from this tuning fork compares with the sound from the tuning
fork in Fig. 4.1.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
5 The apparatus in Fig. 5.1 is used to investigate temperature rise when some water is heated. For
Examiner’s
+ Use
–
lagging heater
beaker
water
Fig. 5.1
(a) Name the instrument used to measure the temperature of the water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) Describe how the mass of the water may be determined, stating the apparatus you
would use.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
(d) The heater is switched on and eventually the water starts to boil.
State two things that may be observed about the water when it is boiling.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
6 (a) A ray of red light passes through a rectangular glass block, as shown in Fig. 6.1. For
Examiner’s
A Use
45°
glass block
B
26°
Fig. 6.1
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, the emergent ray is not drawn at the correct angle θ to the normal.
θ = ......................................................
[2]
(b) A ray of blue light is directed into a glass prism, as shown in Fig. 6.2. For
Examiner’s
screen Use
air air
no
rm
al
of
ray ght
li
blue
glass prism
Fig. 6.2
(i) Using your ruler, draw a possible path for the blue light, until it reaches the screen.
On Fig. 6.2, mark an X to show where the red light might hit the screen.
[3]
[Total: 5]
10
image
Fig. 7.1
(b) The following can be used to describe the image formed by a lens.
enlarged diminished
inverted upright
Put ticks in the boxes containing descriptions that apply to the image in Fig. 7.1. [3]
(c) On Fig. 7.1, draw one more ray from the top of the object to the top of the image. [1]
[Total: 6]
11
8 Fig. 8.1 shows the outline of a bar magnet. A compass needle is being used to show the For
magnetic field pattern around the bar magnet. The needle is a small, freely-pivoted magnet. Examiner’s
Use
N S
Fig. 8.1
(a) The compass is placed to the left of the N pole of the magnet. Its needle points in the
direction shown by the arrow.
Four other positions are indicated around the magnet, each marked by a circle.
In each circle, draw an arrow to indicate the direction in which the compass needle
would point at each of these positions. Other magnetic fields can be ignored. [4]
(b) Five pieces of metal are placed, in turn, near the S pole of the magnet.
In the table below tick the box that states what happens to each of the different metals.
An example has been given to help you.
attracted by repelled by
type of metal no effect
magnet magnet
gold ✓
aluminium
copper
iron
steel
[4]
[Total: 8]
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a series circuit. The resistances of the ammeter and of the battery may be For
ignored. Examiner’s
Use
6.0 V
reading
A
250 mA
X
Fig. 9.1
bell
fuse
relay
resistor
[1]
(c) Use values from Fig. 9.1 to calculate the resistance of component X. Give the unit.
13
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 11]
14
10 The transformer in Fig. 10.1 is to be connected to a circuit containing two electric motors. For
Examiner’s
240 V Use
primary secondary
coil coil
4800 turns
output
18 V
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.1, draw the two motors connected in parallel across the output of the
transformer. Use the circuit symbol M to represent each motor. [1]
(b) Calculate the number of turns needed in the secondary coil in order to supply 18 V.
(c) The motors are now connected in series across the output of the transformer.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
15
11 A radiation detector is used to monitor the radiation from a radioactive source. A ratemeter For
records the number of counts per minute. Examiner’s
Use
(a) The source is brought close to the detector. The table below shows how the ratemeter
reading varies with time.
(i) The bottom row gives the count rate due only to the source.
(ii) From the table, estimate the half-life of the radioactive source.
(b) Even when the source is a long way from the detector, the ratemeter registers a reading
of 20 counts / min.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
16
212
12 (a) How many protons are in the nucleus of an atom of 84Po? ............................ [1] For
Examiner’s
212 Use
(b) How many neutrons are in the nucleus of an atom of 84Po? .......................... [1]
212
(c) (i) How many electrons are in a neutral atom of 84Po? ...............................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
212
(d) When a nucleus of 84Po decays by emitting an alpha-particle, it becomes a nucleus of
lead (Pb).
X = ..........................
Y = ..........................
[2]
[Total: 6]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried this incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working,
the candidate may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided the subsequent working is
correct, bearing in mind this earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised
more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR/or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 sig. fig. is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by the mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT Indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
8 × 50 C1
400 (m) A1
10 e.c.f. (c) C1
m/s B1
(ii) waves
wind
hydro (electric)
tides any 1 B1
geothermal
sun (light) / solar
biofuel
wood
(iii) waves
tides / tidal any 1 B1
hydro (electric)
5 (a) 31 ± 2 (mm) C1
31 ± 0.2 (mm) A1
2nd explanation:
more energy to raise temperature (in 1 minute)
OR
4 < 8; water must be stated to score mark B1
(ii) convection B1
radiation B1
(b) C B1
(c) D B1
12/4 C1
3.0 (A)
OR
3 (A) A1
(ii) parallel
OR
same (direction) B1 [7]
(b) (i) C B1
(ii) B or D any 1 B1
(iii) A B1
(iv) C B1 [8]
(b) to prevent access by (unauthorised) people / can only be opened by key holder B1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (NF/JG) 64874/6
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
1 A slope is made by resting one end of a plank of wood on a block, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
plank trolley
Fig. 1.1
Three students each use a digital stopwatch to time a small trolley rolling down the full length
of the slope.
The times on their stopwatches as the trolley reached the bottom of the slope are shown in
Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
(a) On the line next to each stopwatch, write the time measured by each student. [1]
(b) Calculate the average time measured for the trolley to roll down the slope. Show your For
working. Examiner’s
Use
(c) What other measurement must be taken in order to be able to calculate the average
speed of the trolley?
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) Suggest one change that might be made to the arrangement in Fig. 1.1 so that the
same trolley takes less time to roll down the full length of the slope.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
2 A lorry travels at constant speed for 50 s and then steadily slows down, taking another 50 s to For
come to a stop. Examiner’s
Use
10
speed
m/s 8
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(d) (i) A car takes 60 s to travel the distance calculated in (c) at a constant speed. For
Examiner’s
Calculate the speed of the car. Use
(ii) On Fig. 2.1, draw the speed-time graph for the 60 s at this constant speed. [2]
[Total: 11]
3 (a) (i) State one example of a fuel in which chemical energy is stored.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) State one energy resource that involves liquid water (not steam).
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State two reasons why it is important that nations investigate energy resources other
than fossil fuels (coal, oil, natural gas).
1. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a boy in four positions on a flat floor. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 4.1
(i) Put a tick in the box under the position where the boy is exerting the least pressure
on the floor.
(ii) State the reason for your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The pressure of carbon dioxide in a container is being measured by means of a mercury
manometer. This is shown in Fig. 4.2.
gas cylinder
carbon dioxide
h
mercury
manometer
Fig. 4.2
(i) How does the pressure of the carbon dioxide compare with atmospheric pressure?
Complete the sentence below.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13
PMT
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, measure carefully, in mm, the wavelength of the wave.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) A large barrier, of height greater than the height of the wave in Fig. 5.1, is put in the path
of the wave.
[Total: 6]
statement .................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) which has the greater thermal capacity, the water or the glycerol.
statement .................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
ceiling
wall
window
metal
case
hot
water
floor
Fig. 6.1
The room is heated by a heater containing hot water. The heater is mounted on one For
wall, as shown. Examiner’s
Use
(i) By what process does thermal energy pass through the metal case of the heater in
Fig. 6.1?
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) State the two main processes by which the thermal energy from the heater is
transferred to the whole room.
1. ...............................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................
[2]
On Fig. 6.1, draw arrows to show how the air moves in the room. [2]
[Total: 8]
10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows circuit symbols for four electrical components. For
Examiner’s
Use
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the box next to each component, write the name of that component. [4]
(b) In the space below, draw a circuit diagram that shows these four components connected
in series with an ammeter.
[2]
Which one of the components is adjusted in order to do this? Tick one box.
Z [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2013 0625/22/O/N/13
PMT
11
magnets, another rod is made of iron and the final rod is made of copper. His teacher asks
him to find out, by experiment, which rod is which.
Fig. 8.1 shows the results the student obtains when he puts the rods next to each other.
A B repel
A C attract
B D no effect
Fig. 8.1
(a) Which two rods are magnets? ............................. and ............................. [1]
[Total: 5]
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a thick, vertical copper rod AB, of negligible resistance, connected into an For
electrical circuit. AB passes through a hole in a horizontal card PQRS. Examiner’s
Use
41
Q R
+
d.c. power supply
P S –
Fig. 9.1
(a) The d.c. power supply produces a current in the circuit, which causes a magnetic field
around AB.
(i) Fig. 9.2 shows the view from above of the card PQRS, with the hole through which
AB passes.
Q R
P S
Fig. 9.2
On Fig. 9.2, draw the pattern of the magnetic field around AB. Include at least four
magnetic field lines. [3]
13
(ii) Describe briefly how the pattern of the magnetic field may be shown experimentally. For
Examiner’s
.................................................................................................................................. Use
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The d.c. power supply contains a circuit breaker that operates at a current of 5 A.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) The power supply is set at 12 V and then switched on. The resistor has a resistance
of 4 Ω.
current = .................................................... A
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 10]
14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a ray of light incident on a plane mirror at point A. For
Examiner’s
Use
ray of mirror
light
mirror
Fig. 10.1
(a) The construction in this question requires you to draw rays carefully.
On Fig. 10.1,
(b) Which of the following equations correctly links i and r? Tick one box.
i + r = 90°
i + r = 180°
i=r
[1]
(c) A second mirror is positioned as shown in Fig. 10.1, parallel to the first mirror.
(i) Continue the ray reflected from A, to show what happens to it after it reaches the
second mirror. [2]
(ii) State how the direction of the ray, after it has reflected from both mirrors, compares
with its original direction.
............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
15
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Suggest one reason why the fact that radon-220 is a gas makes it potentially more
dangerous than an α-emitting solid source of similar activity.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
(b) In the situations illustrated in Fig. 11.1, the radioactive source is emitting α-particles,
β-particles and γ-rays. The detector is sensitive to all three types of radiation. The
apparatus is in air.
A B
radioactive radiation
source thick detector
aluminium thick paper
1 cm 2 cm
C D
1 cm 15 cm
[Total: 8]
16
Fig. 12.1
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 4]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
PMT
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it, e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the
candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means “correct answer only”.
e.c.f. means “error carried forward”. This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his subsequent working is correct,
bearing in mind his earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised more than
once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated “e.c.f.”
e.e.o.o. means “each error or omission”.
o.w.t.t.e. means “or words to that effect”.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR / or indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit.
Significant figures
Answers are acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except if specified
otherwise, or if only 1 significant figure is appropriate.
Units Incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More commonly, marks are
allocated for specific units.
Fractions These are only acceptable where specified.
Extras Ignore extras in answers if they are irrelevant; if they contradict an otherwise correct
response or are forbidden by mark scheme, use right + wrong = 0.
Ignore indicates that something which is not correct is disregarded and does not cause a right
plus wrong penalty.
Not/NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
[Total: 6]
(b) all stated quantities are appropriate for calculating power, expect weight/mass and height
and time
–1 for each error or omission (minimum zero) B2
[Total: 5]
3 (a) (i) any statement that indicates that sound travels slower than light B1
(“sound travels slowly”, on its own, gets zero)
[Total: 7]
4 (a) thermometer B1
(b) temperature B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 9]
(ii) like charges repel / positive charges repel other positive charges A1
[Total: 6]
7 (a) conduction B1
(b) convection B1
(c) conduction B1
convection B1
[Total: 4]
8 (a) (radio)
infra-red
visible
ultra-violet
X-rays
gamma B2
note: all 5 correct gains B2, any 3 consecutive in correct order, even if shifted in list,
gains B1
(d) communications
GPS/satellite navigation
satellite TV any 1 B1
mobile/cell phones
[Total: 5]
(iii) decreases B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 9]
11 (a) (i) plastic absorbs alpha / alpha will not penetrate plastic / will not be detected B1
(iii) idea of short half-life will cause inaccuracy over time or will need replacing B1
(b) (i) 88 B1
[Total: 8]
(ii) copper B1
(c) 3 lamps all in parallel, connected correctly to Fig. 12.1 output terminals B1
correct symbol for all 3 lamps B1
[Total: 7]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2013
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use a pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
DC (SLM/SW) 64841/5
© UCLES 2013 [Turn over
PMT
1 A ruler is used to measure the length of a piece of cotton, as shown in Fig. 1.1. For
Examiner’s
Use
cotton
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
cm
(a) Use the ruler in Fig. 1.1 to find the length of the piece of cotton.
(b) The left-hand end of the cotton is moved to the 1.0 cm mark on the ruler.
On Fig. 1.1, mark clearly and carefully, with an arrow, where the right-hand end will
reach on the ruler. [1]
The rod has a square cross-section. The cotton goes around the rod exactly 3 times, as
shown in Fig. 1.2.
Fig. 1.2
[Total: 6]
Fig. 2.1
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State the three quantities that need to be known in order to calculate the useful power of
one of the athletes.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
3. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The two athletes run side-by-side all the way to the top of the hill, but one athlete
develops more useful power than the other.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
3 An explosion at X in a quarry is heard by a boy at Y and a girl at Z. Their relative positions For
are shown in Fig. 3.1. Examiner’s
Use
girl
explosion
Z
X boy
rock
face
Y
quarry
1700 m
(a) The girl hears the explosion 5.0 s after she sees the explosion happening.
(i) Explain why there is a delay between seeing and hearing the explosion.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The boy is standing at Y, between the explosion site and the girl. For
Examiner’s
(i) When does he hear the explosion? Tick one box. Use
immediately it happens
(ii) How does the sound heard by the boy compare with the sound heard by the girl?
[Total: 7]
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) What must be done in order to make the instrument give a zero reading?
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(e) What happens within the instrument to make it give a reading larger than zero?
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a small object in front of a vertical plane mirror. For
Examiner’s
plane mirror Use
object
Fig. 5.1
On Fig. 5.1,
(i) mark carefully with a clear cross, labelled I, where the image of the object is
located, [2]
(ii) draw the path of a ray from the object to point P on the mirror, and its path after the
ray is incident on the mirror, [2]
(iii) mark clearly the angle of incidence i and the angle of reflection r at P. [2]
(b) When you look into a mirror, you see an image of your face.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) If you look from a brightly-lit room into a thick glass window when it is dark outside, you
can see two images of your face.
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows two light, uncharged balls A and B suspended next to each other on vertical, For
insulating threads. Examiner’s
Use
A B
Fig. 6.1
(i) How will the two threads appear? Tick one box.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(i) How will the two threads appear? Tick one box.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Ball A remains negatively charged and ball B remains positively charged. A rod with a For
large positive charge is positioned to the left of A. Examiner’s
Use
ball A ................................................................................................................................
ball B ................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
7 Three methods of transfer of thermal energy are conduction, convection and radiation.
(a) Which one is involved when thermal energy is transferred through a solid?
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 4]
10
8 In alphabetical order, some major regions of the electromagnetic spectrum are For
Examiner’s
gamma, Use
infra-red,
radio,
ultra-violet,
visible,
X-rays.
(a) List these regions in order of decreasing wavelength. The first one has been filled in for
you.
radio
longest wavelength .......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
.......................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
Explain why the design of microwave ovens must include effective screening, so that
microwaves do not escape.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
11
P 0.3 A 10 1 Q 10 1 R
Fig. 9.1
(i) at Q, .........................................................................................................................
(ii) at R? .........................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Calculate the potential difference (p.d.) across one of the 10 Ω resistors.
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Deduce the value of the resistance of X when the 6.0 V battery is supplying 0.3 A to
the circuit.
(iii) What happens to the current in the circuit when the resistance of X is increased?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
12
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a light-dependent resistor (LDR) connected with a 1000 Ω resistor to For
form a potential divider. Examiner’s
Use
1000 1
+
12.0 V d.c.
–
LDR
Fig. 10.1
• In the dark, the LDR has a resistance much higher than 1000 Ω.
(i) What is the potential difference across the LDR when it is dark? Tick one box.
0V
exactly 6.0 V
12.0 V
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
13
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the potential divider of Fig. 10.1 connected to a relay and a lamp. For
Examiner’s
Use
1000 1 lamp
+
12 V d.c.
–
LDR switch in
relay
relay coil
2000 1
Fig. 10.2
In order to close the switch in the relay, there must be at least 6.0 V across the relay coil.
(i) At a certain time, the potential difference across the relay coil is greater than 6.0 V.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [3]
(ii) What happens to the lamp when the switch in the relay is closed?
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) A similar circuit in the laboratory has a thermistor instead of the LDR.
Which one of the following will cause this circuit to switch the lamp on or off? Tick
one box.
change in temperature
14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows an arrangement to monitor the level of the fuel in the tank of a car. For
Examiner’s
level indicator Use
detector of radioactive
emissions
tank
fuel
Fig. 11.1
(i) Suggest why the radioactive source in the float is unlikely to be an α-particle emitter.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(ii) Explain why the detector gives different readings for different fuel levels.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
(iii) Comment on the value of the half-life of the radioactive source used in the float.
..................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
15
226
(b) Radium-226 ( 88Ra) decays according to the equation below, emitting a particle X. For
Examiner’s
226 222 Use
88Ra 86Rn + particle X
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
.............................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
16
240 V coil B
250 turns
coil A
5000 turns
Fig. 12.1
(c) Three lamps each require a voltage equal to the output voltage of coil B in order to
operate at full brightness.
On Fig. 12.1, show these three lamps, suitably connected to run at full brightness. Use
the standard circuit symbol for each lamp. [2]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s
answer.
M marks M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an
M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer.
If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks
can be scored.
C marks C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These
can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
A marks A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are
one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored. A marks are commonly awarded for
final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is
correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the
marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at
a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not
award the A mark, but award C marks on their merits. An A mark following an M mark is
a dependent mark.
Brackets ( ) Brackets around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording
used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or
units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
Underlining Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very
similar.
OR / or This indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Ignore This indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g. spelling which
suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or thermistor / transistor /
transformer.
Not / NOT This indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a
candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a
candidate from being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies
to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one. Regard a power-of-ten error as an arithmetic error.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because previously
calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
extra valid detail, e.g. rule close to and parallel with spring, use of marker/set-
square, eye level with reading etc. B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 5]
(ii) increases M1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 7]
(c) (R =) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 12 C1
20 (Ω) A1
(ii) parallel B1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 9]
10 (a) electrons B1
[Total: 6]
11 (a) (i) B B1
(ii) A
both correct B1
(iii) C
(b) 3 B1
2
(c) 1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
3
1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
[Total: 5]
smooth best-fit single line curve through most of the points, not joining points dot
to dot B1
idea of halving, e.g. 175 or mark at 175 on graph, NOT halving number of
days, i.e. 7 C1
[Total: 9]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/SW) 81802/5
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
12.0 cm 15.0 cm
2.0 N
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung
from the hook.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
With a load of 2.0 N on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.
Fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released.
2.8 N
2.0 N
Fig. 1.2
Calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.
direction = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
5 kg
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 4]
3 (a) Use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.
initial acceleration
distance moved
force exerted
potential energy
time taken
An object is dragged across a rough surface. In order to find the work done on the object, it is
(b) A machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is
involved in.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. The temperature of the
substance varies with time as shown in Fig. 4.1.
D
temperature
B C
time
Fig. 4.1
At the temperature indicated by point A on Fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Suggest why ice at 0 °C is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at
0 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(i) State and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. She has a flat piece of wood
in each hand.
rock face
When the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. A short time later
she hears the sound again.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.
(c) A boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.
How long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?
(d) State two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
10
6 (a) Describe
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. She gets out of the car. She touches
the door handle when her feet are on the ground. She experiences an electric shock.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
11
7 Fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.
C I
O
F2 F1
Fig. 7.1
F1 and F2 are the two principal focuses of the lens. The object is at O and its image is at I.
(i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]
(ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through F2, until it reaches
the image. [2]
(b) Where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? Tick one box.
at F2
at C
at F1
at I
[1]
(c) The object is moved a small distance away from the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
12
8 The electric circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.
X R1 R2 Y
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Name the component that is shown in Fig. 8.1 by the symbol .
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? Tick one box.
charge
potential difference
power
resistance
13
(d) R1 and R2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between X and Y, so that they
have a different combined resistance.
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit showing R1 and R2 connected in this different way.
[2]
(ii) What word is used to describe this different way of connecting R1 and R2?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a
240 V mains supply.
240 V X
Y
Z
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.
Electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, W, X, Y and Z.
(a) The piece of metal P provides a magnetic link between the coils.
State
(b) A lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 V supply, lights normally when
connected between W and X.
15
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) State what would happen if the 120 V lamp in (b) is connected between W and Z.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.
top
Y2 X2
H2
heater screen
H1
C A Y1 X1
cathode anode Y-plates X-plates
bottom
path of cathode rays
Fig. 10.1
The cathode rays are represented by the broken line in Fig. 10.1.
(b) How does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in
order to
(ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube, .................... and .................... [1]
(iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen. .................... and .................... [1]
[Total: 6]
17
B B B
C
A A C A
C
Fig. 11.1
(b) State the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ............... [1]
(c) All three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol H. Hydrogen can be represented
in nuclide notation as 11 H .
[Total: 5]
18
12 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
blue face
Fig. 12.1
The 350 dice are thrown on a bench. All those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are
removed. They are regarded as having “decayed”.
The remaining dice are then thrown again, and the “blue-uppermost” dice are removed. This
process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.
The table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw.
throw 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
number of dice 350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35
remaining
On Fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.
(a) On Fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei
From your graph in Fig. 12.2, find the “half-life” of dice, showing clearly on Fig. 12.2 how
you obtained your answer.
19
350
300
number of
dice
remaining
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
throw number
Fig. 12.2
1. Suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s
answer.
M marks M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an
M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer.
If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks
can be scored.
C marks C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These
can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
A marks A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are
one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored. A marks are commonly awarded for
final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is
correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the
marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at
a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not
award the A mark, but award C marks on their merits. An A mark following an M mark is
a dependent mark.
Brackets ( ) Brackets around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording
used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or
units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
Underlining Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very
similar.
OR / or This indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Ignore This indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g. spelling which
suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or thermistor / transistor /
transformer.
Not / NOT This indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a
candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a
candidate from being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies
to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one. Regard a power-of-ten error as an arithmetic error.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because previously
calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
(iii) density = mass / volume, in any form e.g. words, symbols, numbers C1
267 / 30 C1
8.9 A1
g / cm3 B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 7]
4 (a) evaporation B1
[Total: 6]
5 B1
B1
x B1
B1
x B1
[Total: 5]
(b) solid B1
[Total: 6]
(ii) means of signalling when gun fired such as dropped arm or smoke seen B1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 6]
10 (a) volts OR V B1
(ii) use of any V from table / graph OR large triangle drawn on graph C1
calculation using V / I OR gradient calculation C1
5.2 – 5.8 (Ω) A1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 7]
12 (a) 5 B1
(b) (i) 9 B1
(ii) 4 B1
(c) electrons B1
[Total: 4]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (AC/SW) 81803/5
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
1 (a) Which two conditions apply for an object on Earth to be in equilibrium? Tick two boxes.
Fig. 1.1
A copper block of unknown mass is placed on the left-hand pan. Six standard masses, placed
on the right-hand pan, cause the balance to be in equilibrium, with the beam horizontal.
100 g, 100 g, 50 g, 10 g, 5 g, 2 g
(ii) What will be seen to happen if the 2 g mass is removed from the right-hand pan?
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
2 A car travels along a straight, horizontal road at a steady speed of 36 m / s. The total resistive force
on the car is 2800 N, as represented on Fig. 2.1.
36 m / s
2800 N
resistive driving
force force
Fig. 2.1
(b) Later in the journey, the car’s speed decreases uniformly from 36 m / s to zero in 18 s.
(i) On the axes in Fig. 2.2, sketch the speed-time graph for the motion of the car during
these 18 s. Mark 36 m / s and 18 s clearly on your graph.
speed
m/s
0
0
time / s [3]
Fig. 2.2
[Total: 7]
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State two sources of energy that will eventually run out or become uneconomic to extract.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
4 Some water forms a shallow puddle on a metal surface in a laboratory, as shown in Fig. 4.1.
puddle of water
metal surface
Fig. 4.1
Later in the day, it is noticed that the puddle has disappeared and the metal surface is dry.
(a) Which process has caused the disappearance of the puddle? Tick one box.
boiling
condensation
evaporation
freezing
[1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
Some statements are correct. Put a tick () in the box alongside each of these.
Other statements are false. Put a cross () in the box alongside each of these.
On Earth, an object has weight due to a force acting towards the Earth.
Work is done when an object moves in the direction of the force acting on it.
If the only forces acting on an object are two equal and opposite forces in the same
straight line, then the object is in equilibrium.
[Total: 5]
6 (a) A laboratory liquid-in-glass thermometer has a range from –10 °C to 110 °C.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The measurement of temperature can be carried out using any physical property that changes
with temperature. Two examples are given below.
Add two more examples. You may re-use words from the examples if you wish, but you do not
have to do so.
1. the of
2. the of
[2]
[Total: 6]
7 Four school athletes are about to run a 100 m race, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
starter
starting pistol
timekeeper
100 m A
B
winning line
The runners start at A, when the starter fires the starting pistol, and they finish at B.
(i) the groundsman used when he measured out the 100 m before marking the track,
...........................................................................................................................................
(ii) the timekeeper uses to time how long the runners take to run the 100 m.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
What might cause the timekeeper to introduce an inaccuracy into the timing of the race?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest one reason why the average speed of the winner is less than his top speed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(d) On another occasion, the starter and timekeeper decide to measure the speed of the sound
from the gun. They use the same equipment they used to time the race.
(ii) Suggest how the timekeeper would know when to start timing.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
10
To make the pool more attractive at night, there are submerged lamps in the pool. Fig. 8.1 shows
three rays coming from one of these lamps.
air
A B
40° 50°
30°
water
lamp
Fig. 8.1
(a) State what is meant by the critical angle for a ray of light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 8.1, use your ruler to draw approximate paths for the rays after they reach the surface
at A and B. [4]
[Total: 7]
11
9 (a) Which electrical quantity does a voltmeter measure? Tick one box.
current
potential difference
power
resistance
[1]
(b) The transformer in Fig. 9.1 has 600 turns on its primary coil AB, and 400 turns on its secondary
coil CD.
iron core
A
C
D
B
Fig. 9.1
(ii) A large number of cells are connected in series, to make a 120 V battery.
The mains supply is disconnected from AB, and the 120 V battery is connected in its
place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2014 0625/22/O/N/14 [Turn over
PMT
12
10 A student is attempting to measure the resistance of a resistor R. To do this, she connects the
circuit of Fig. 10.1.
E S
Fig. 10.1
(a) The letter E on Fig. 10.1 represents the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery.
Write V and A in the appropriate circles, to show which meter is which. [1]
(i) Write down the label of the component that is used to vary the current in the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) The table below gives the readings obtained by the student for different currents.
13
(i) On Fig. 10.2, draw a graph of these values. The first two points have been plotted for you.
[2]
voltmeter reading / V
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0
ammeter reading / A
Fig. 10.2
[Total: 9]
14
11 The radiation detector and counter in Fig. 11.1 are being used to count particles from a radioactive
source.
counter
X Y
radiation detector
Fig. 11.1
Each time the counter is used to make a measurement, it is first reset to zero and then left switched
on for 3 minutes.
(a) With no radioactive source anywhere near the radiation detector, after being switched on for 3
minutes the reading on the counter is 85 counts.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A radioactive source emitting β-particles is placed at X. After 3 minutes, the counter reads
592 counts.
Calculate the average count rate, in counts / min, from the radioactive source.
(c) The β-particle source is left at X and a block of aluminium 4 cm thick is placed at Y.
(i) Suggest what the counter would read on this occasion, after 3 minutes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
15
–
nucleus
+
– + –
+
+
Fig. 12.1
The broken circle indicates the nucleus, and the particles inside this broken circle are the particles
in the nucleus.
Charged particles are marked + or –. Uncharged particles are shown as empty circles.
(b) State
[Total: 4]
16
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen specifically in the candidate’s
answer.
M marks M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an
M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer.
If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks
can be scored.
C marks C marks are compensatory marks in general applicable to numerical questions. These
can be scored even if the point to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have known it. For
example, if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does not write down the
actual equation but does correct substitution or working which shows he knew the
equation, then the C mark is scored. A C mark is not awarded if a candidate makes two
points which contradict each other. Points which are wrong but irrelevant are ignored.
A marks A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are
one of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored. A marks are commonly awarded for
final answers to numerical questions. If a final numerical answer, eligible for A marks, is
correct, with the correct unit and an acceptable number of significant figures, all the
marks for that question are normally awarded. It is very occasionally possible to arrive at
a correct answer by an entirely wrong approach. In these rare circumstances, do not
award the A mark, but award C marks on their merits. An A mark following an M mark is
a dependent mark.
Brackets ( ) Brackets around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording
used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or
units in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
Underlining Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very
similar.
OR / or This indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the marks.
Ignore This indicates that something which is not correct or irrelevant is to be disregarded and
does not cause a right plus wrong penalty.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. If an answer can be understood to mean
what we want, give credit. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g. spelling which
suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or thermistor / transistor /
transformer.
Not / NOT This indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate, i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
ecf meaning "error carried forward" is mainly applicable to numerical questions, but may in
particular circumstances be applied in non-numerical questions. This indicates that if a
candidate has made an earlier mistake and has carried an incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, marks indicated by ecf may be awarded, provided the
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a
candidate from being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies
to marks annotated ecf.
Sig. figs. Answers are normally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2. Any
exceptions to this general rule will be specified in the mark scheme.
Arithmetic errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is clearly an arithmetic
one. Regard a power-of-ten error as an arithmetic error.
Transcription errors
Deduct one mark if the only error in arriving at a final answer is because previously
calculated data has clearly been misread but used correctly.
extra valid detail, e.g. rule close to and parallel with spring, use of marker/set-
square, eye level with reading etc. B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 5]
(ii) increases M1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 7]
[Total: 4]
[Total: 7]
(c) (R =) R1 + R2 OR 8 + 12 C1
20 (Ω) A1
(ii) parallel B1
[Total: 9]
[Total: 9]
10 (a) electrons B1
[Total: 6]
11 (a) (i) B B1
(ii) A
both correct B1
(iii) C
(b) 3 B1
2
(c) 1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
3
1 ( any attempt at a symbol) B1
[Total: 5]
smooth best-fit single line curve through most of the points, not joining points dot
to dot B1
idea of halving, e.g. 175 or mark at 175 on graph, NOT halving number of
days, i.e. 7 C1
[Total: 9]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2014
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (LK/SW) 98699
© UCLES 2014 [Turn over
PMT
12.0 cm 15.0 cm
2.0 N
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe how the length of the spring can be measured accurately, after it has been hung
from the hook.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
With a load of 2.0 N on the end of the spring, its length is 15.0 cm.
Fig. 1.2 represents the forces acting on the load just after it is released.
2.8 N
2.0 N
Fig. 1.2
Calculate the resultant force acting on the load and give its direction.
direction = ......................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
5 kg
Fig. 2.1
[Total: 4]
3 (a) Use words from the list below to complete the sentences about work and energy.
initial acceleration
distance moved
force exerted
potential energy
time taken
An object is dragged across a rough surface. In order to find the work done on the object, it is
(b) A machine working in a factory actually uses more energy than is needed to do the task it is
involved in.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
4 (a) Thermal energy is supplied to a certain substance at a constant rate. The temperature of the
substance varies with time as shown in Fig. 4.1.
D
temperature
B C
time
Fig. 4.1
At the temperature indicated by point A on Fig. 4.1, the substance is in the solid state.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Suggest why ice at 0 °C is more effective for cooling a drink than the same mass of water at
0 °C.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(i) State and explain what happens to the temperature of the water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the mass of water in the container.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a girl standing some distance away from a rock face. She has a flat piece of wood
in each hand.
rock face
When the girl bangs the two pieces of wood together, they make a loud sound. A short time later
she hears the sound again.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The time interval between the two sounds is 1.8 s. Sound travels at 330 m / s in air.
(c) A boy standing very close to the rock face only hears one sound.
How long after the girl makes the sound does he hear this sound?
(d) State two ways in which a sound wave is different from a light wave.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
10
6 (a) Describe
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A lady has been riding in a car with plastic-covered seats. She gets out of the car. She touches
the door handle when her feet are on the ground. She experiences an electric shock.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]
11
7 Fig. 7.1 is a ray diagram representing the formation of an image by a converging lens.
C I
O
F2 F1
Fig. 7.1
F1 and F2 are the two principal focuses of the lens. The object is at O and its image is at I.
(i) accurately mark the focal length of the lens and label it f, [2]
(ii) from the top of the object, draw the path of the ray that passes through F2, until it reaches
the image. [2]
(b) Where would a screen need to be placed in order to see a focused image? Tick one box.
at F2
at C
at F1
at I
[1]
(c) The object is moved a small distance away from the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
12
8 The electric circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a cell, two resistors and another component.
X R1 R2 Y
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) Name the component that is shown in Fig. 8.1 by the symbol .
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) What flows in the circuit in order to create the current in the circuit? Tick one box.
charge
potential difference
power
resistance
13
(d) R1 and R2 are removed from the circuit and then re-connected between X and Y, so that they
have a different combined resistance.
(i) In the space below, draw the circuit showing R1 and R2 connected in this different way.
[2]
(ii) What word is used to describe this different way of connecting R1 and R2?
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
14
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a transformer used to allow lamps of different voltage ratings to be operated from a
240 V mains supply.
240 V X
Y
Z
Fig. 9.1
The primary coil and the secondary coil both have 500 uniformly-wound turns.
Electrical connections to the secondary coil can be made at four places, W, X, Y and Z.
(a) The piece of metal P provides a magnetic link between the coils.
State
(b) A lamp, designed to light at normal brightness with a 120 V supply, lights normally when
connected between W and X.
15
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(d) State what would happen if the 120 V lamp in (b) is connected between W and Z.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
16
10 Fig. 10.1 is a simplified drawing of a tube for producing, deflecting and detecting cathode rays.
top
Y2 X2
H2
heater screen
H1
C A Y1 X1
cathode anode Y-plates X-plates
bottom
path of cathode rays
Fig. 10.1
The cathode rays are represented by the broken line in Fig. 10.1.
(b) How does the screen show the presence of cathode rays?
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Between which two of the labelled terminals should a potential difference be connected in
order to
(ii) accelerate the cathode rays along the tube, .................... and .................... [1]
(iii) deflect the cathode rays to the top of the screen. .................... and .................... [1]
[Total: 6]
17
B B B
C
A A C A
C
Fig. 11.1
(b) State the nucleon number of the tritium atom. ............... [1]
(c) All three atoms may be represented by the chemical symbol H. Hydrogen can be represented
in nuclide notation as 11 H .
[Total: 5]
18
12 350 dice are made from small cubes of wood with one face painted blue, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
blue face
Fig. 12.1
The 350 dice are thrown on a bench. All those dice that land with the blue face uppermost are
removed. They are regarded as having “decayed”.
The remaining dice are then thrown again, and the “blue-uppermost” dice are removed. This
process is repeated until the number of dice remaining is quite small.
The table below shows the number of dice remaining after each throw.
throw 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
number of dice 350 289 237 201 168 138 115 94 79 67 59 50 41 39 35
remaining
On Fig. 12.2, points have been plotted for some of the readings in the table.
(a) On Fig. 12.2, plot the first five points and draw the best smooth curve for all the points. [3]
The half-life of a radioactive substance is the time taken to reduce the number of nuclei
From your graph in Fig. 12.2, find the “half-life” of dice, showing clearly on Fig. 12.2 how
you obtained your answer.
19
350
300
number of
dice
remaining
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
throw number
Fig. 12.2
1. Suggest how many throws it takes to reduce the number of dice to 400.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of he Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of he University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/21 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This
prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but
only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities,
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except
where the mark scheme specifies otherwise.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate. i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(ii) balance B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 6]
(ii) diffracted B1
[Total: 4]
(c) expansion B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) wind B1
(b) electrical B1
light B1
[Total: 7]
(c) steel B1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 6]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
11 (a) Gamma / γ B1
(ii) A = 4 B1
Z=2 B1
[Total: 6]
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 C1
115 / 25 × 500 C1
2300 A1
[Total: 9]
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Core October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (NF/CGW) 96018/4
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
The student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. The liquids do not mix
but form three separate layers as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
50
kerosene
40
30
water
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.2
Identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. Tick only two boxes.
[Total: 8]
2 Cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. Each camera records the
exact time that a car passes the camera.
Fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes.
(a) (i) Calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera A and camera B. State your
answer in seconds.
Calculate the average speed of the car between camera A and camera B.
(iii) Using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between
camera B and camera C. Tick one box.
Use your answers to (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to estimate whether the car’s average speed was
greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera A and camera C. Explain
how you decided on your answer.
estimate ....................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
Draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the
arrangement of the particles in that state of matter.
solid
liquid
gas
[1]
plastic
stopper
air and
vapour
perfume
perfume
bottle
Fig. 3.1
(i) A student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. She notices that her arm feels
cold as the perfume evaporates.
Explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the
bottle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
4 A student has a mobile (cell) phone. The phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces
a ring tone.
(a) State two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound
wave produced when the phone rings.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. The waves interact with a wall,
and a doorway, in the room.
mobile phone
doorway
wall
With reference to Fig. 4.1, complete each of the following sentences using a word from the
box below.
(i) When the waves hit the wall, the waves are .............................................................. . [1]
(ii) When the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are ...................................... . [1]
[Total: 4]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.
Fig. 5.1
The thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range −10 °C to 110 °C. There is
no scale on the thermometer.
(b) Describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.
Tick one box.
colour
expansion
pressure
resistance
[1]
[Total: 5]
10
solar
panels
SLOW
DOWN
Fig. 6.1
(a) The sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.
Identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. Tick the correct box.
chemical
geothermal
light
wind [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when
the sign is operating using solar energy.
11
(c) (i) In certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) After passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.
State the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
12
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet.
paper
A
N magnet S C
Fig. 7.1
The bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. A plotting compass is placed in each of the four
positions labelled A, B, C and D.
plotting
compass
S N
pivot
pointer
Fig. 7.2
13
(a) In each of positions A, B, C and D on Fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of
the pointer. Ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position B and the
other through position D. The lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
14
starter
motor
M
S relay
coil
Fig. 8.1
When the driver closes switch S, there is a current of 200 A in the starter motor.
(a) (i) Explain how closing switch S causes the starter motor to operate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire
connecting the switch S to the battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
15
12 V P
fuse
Fig. 8.2
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
16
9 A student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. Fig. 9.1
shows the circuit that the student uses.
Fig. 9.1
(b) The student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. The
results are shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
temperature of thermistor / °C 0 10 20 30 40 50
current in thermistor / mA 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5
(i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 V at 20 °C.
17
25
20
current in
thermistor /
mA
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
temperature / °C
Fig. 9.2
The student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the
temperature of the thermistor.
Explain how the graph shown in Fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
18
10 A camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 10.1 shows part of this
circuit.
6V
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe what happens to the resistance of the LDR and the current in the LDR when a bright
light is shone on the LDR.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A camera lens is used to produce an image of an object OX. The arrangement is shown in
Fig. 10.2.
principal axis
O
F F
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2,
(i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through
and beyond the lens, [2]
(ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of OX, [2]
(iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1]
[Total: 7]
19
α - radiation,
β - radiation,
γ - radiation.
(a) State which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
The equation below describes the change. The symbol AZ X represents the particle emitted.
241Am 237 Np + AX
95 93 Z
A = .......................................................
Z = .......................................................
[2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
20
X generator
boiler transmission
lines
steam
transformer
coal
water
cooling
tower
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i) State the name of the part of the power station labelled X.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The transformer converts the 25 kV output from the generator to 115 kV. The primary coil of
the transformer has 500 turns.
21
(c) Explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kV.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
22
BLANK PAGE
23
BLANK PAGE
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/22 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to be
scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's answer. If a
candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent A marks can be
scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which they
refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark and
the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one of
the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units in
brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit given.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of working, he
or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her subsequent working is
correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being
penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks annotated
"e.c.f."
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities, e.g.
spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except where
the mark scheme specifies otherwise.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate. i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
[Total: 6]
2 (a) (i) 10 (m / s) B1
(iii) 7 (s) B1
[Total: 8]
3 (a) decreases B1
(b) increases B1
(c) increases B1
(d) increases B1
does not change B1
decreases B1
[Total: 6]
(ii) kinetic B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 5]
(ii) convection B1
[Total: 6]
[Total: 7]
(iii) second ray correctly drawn through either principal focus and horizontal section,
correct to better than ± 1 small square B1
(b) diminished B3
inverted
real
[Total: 7]
(ii) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 B1
4800 / (120 / 10) OR correct substitution C1
400 A1
[Total: 5]
(ii) steel B1
[Total: 6]
(b) V = IR B1
(c) 250 / 2 C1
125 (Ω) A1
[Total: 9]
(c) 237 B1
93 B1
[Total: 7]
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Core October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (NF/CGW) 96017/4
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
BLANK PAGE
1 A student uses a rule to measure a thin piece of wire as shown in Fig. 1.1.
wire
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
cm
Fig. 1.1
(a) State two errors in the student’s measurement of the length of wire.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The student is asked to measure the thickness of the wire using the same ruler. The student
does this by bending a short length of the wire and measuring distance x as shown in Fig. 1.2.
0
cm
wire
1
x
2
3
Fig. 1.2
(ii) Calculate the average thickness of the wire, in mm. Give your answer correct to two
significant figures.
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2015 0625/22/O/N/15 [Turn over
PMT
2 Two cyclists, A and B, are riding their bicycles on a flat and straight road.
(a) Fig. 2.1 shows a speed-time graph for the first part of their journey.
20
speed cyclist A
m/s
cyclist B
10
cyclist B
cyclist A
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / s
Fig. 2.1
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the horizontal forces acting on cyclist A and his bicycle at one instant.
Fig. 2.2
(i) Calculate the resultant force acting on cyclist A and his bicycle.
force = .................................................... N
direction = ......................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe the effect of this resultant force on the cyclist’s motion.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) At time t = 20 s, the backwards force on the cyclist increases suddenly to 100 N. The
forwards force remains the same at 90 N.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
Complete each of the statements by adding in the spaces the words decreases, increases or
does not change.
(a) When a liquid evaporates, the more energetic molecules escape from the surface and the
(b) When the volume of a gas is decreased at constant temperature, the pressure of the gas
........................................... . [1]
(c) When the temperature of a gas is increased at constant volume, the pressure of the gas
........................................... . [1]
(d) When a metal block is heated, the volume of the block ........................................... , the mass of
[Total: 6]
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a farmer driving a tractor that has a diesel engine.
Fig. 4.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State the useful energy obtained from the diesel engine as the tractor starts to move.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) State two other forms of energy output from the diesel engine.
Modern diesel engines waste less energy than older diesel engines. This means modern
diesel engines are
faster.
more efficient.
more reliable.
[1]
(b) The tractor in Fig. 4.1 is a lot heavier than a car. A car sinks into soft ground. The tractor does
not sink.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
5 A bimetallic strip is made from two metals, brass and invar, stuck together. A student clamps the
bimetallic strip, as shown in Fig. 5.1, and heats the end.
clamp invar
brass
clamp stand
heat
Fig. 5.1
When the bimetallic strip is heated, the brass expands more than the invar. The bimetallic strip
bends.
(a) On Fig. 5.1, sketch the position of the strip after it has been heated. [1]
(b) (i) Suggest how the bimetallic strip may be used to measure temperature. Include the idea
of fixed points.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Suggest one reason why, in practice, a thermometer using this bimetallic strip would be
difficult to use.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 5]
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a piece of apparatus used to show the transfer of thermal energy in liquids.
glass water
tube
heat
Fig. 6.1
The glass tube is filled with cold water. Crystals that dissolve slowly are inserted into the bottom of
the tube. The water around the crystals becomes coloured.
When the glass tube is heated as shown in Fig. 6.1, the coloured water moves.
(a) (i) On Fig. 6.1, draw arrows indicating the direction of movement of the water in each section
of the tube. [1]
(ii) State the name of this method of thermal energy transfer in the water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 6]
10
7 A battle re-enactment enables observers to see and hear an old cannon being fired.
Fig. 7.1 shows the battle site and the distant cliffs.
cliffs
cannon
observers
valley
500 m
The cannon is fired. Observers see the smoke and then hear the bang.
(a) (i) Explain why there is a short delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the bang of
the cannon.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) An observer notices that, after the cannon is fired, she hears a loud bang and then a
quieter bang a short time later.
Tick one box to identify the reason for the second bang.
11
(b) Another observer is standing 500 m away from the cannon. He uses a stopwatch to measure
the time delay between seeing the smoke and hearing the first bang. His timings are shown in
the table.
Use the measurements in the table to calculate an accurate value for the speed of the sound
produced by the cannon.
[Total: 7]
12
8 Fig. 8.1 represents an object positioned on the principal axis of a thin lens.
object
C
F1
Fig. 8.1
The principal focus on the left hand side of the lens is labelled F1.
(a) (i) On Fig. 8.1, clearly mark the position of the principal focus on the right hand side of the
lens and label it F2.
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw a ray from the top of the object that passes through the
centre C of the lens. Continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw a second ray from the top of the object that passes through a
principal focus. Continue the path of the ray to the edge of the graph paper.
(iv) On Fig. 8.1, carefully draw the position of the image produced.
[4]
(b) Which of the following words describe the image produced? Tick all that are correct.
diminished
enlarged
inverted
upright
real
[3]
[Total: 7]
13
9 A child has an electric car racing game. The game operates from a 120 V a.c. supply.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, sketch a graph showing how voltage output varies with time for an a.c. supply.
(b) (i) A device is used to change the 120 V supply to the 10 V needed by the toy cars.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The device used in part (b)(i) has a primary coil consisting of 4800 turns.
[Total: 5]
14
10 A coil is wound on an iron core. A student places a permanent bar magnet near the coil, as shown
in Fig. 10.1.
d.c.
supply
switch
bar magnet
N S
iron core
Fig. 10.1
When the switch is closed, the bar magnet moves away from the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The iron core is replaced with a new core. When the current is switched on, this new core
becomes a permanent magnet.
State the name of the material used for the new core.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows apparatus used to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet. The bar magnet is placed on a piece of card. A small pivoted magnet, with N-pole
and S-pole as shown in Fig. 10.3, is placed near the magnet.
card
bar magnet
pivoted N S
magnet
Fig. 10.2
S N
pivot
Fig. 10.3
Starting from the arrangement shown in Fig. 10.2, describe how the apparatus is used to
produce a pattern of the field lines around the bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
16
11 Hair dryers are used by many people. Fig. 11.1 shows an example of a hair dryer.
blower heater
hot
motor air
Fig. 11.1
The hair dryer has two switches, one for the heater, the other for the motor that operates the
blower. Fig. 11.2 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the hair dryer.
Fig. 11.2
(a) Complete the table identifying which of the circuit’s components, if any, is operating.
(b) State the equation that links potential difference (p.d.), current and resistance.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
17
(c) The current in the heater is 2.0 A when the potential difference across the heater is 250 V.
(i) On Fig. 11.2, draw the symbol for a fuse between the power supply and switch S. [1]
(ii) State what happens if a fault develops in the hair dryer, causing a large current in the
circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
18
(a) Different types of ionising radiation have different properties, as shown in the table.
charged alarm
_ air circuit
metal plates _ _
ï
_-particle
source
Fig. 12.1
The α-particles ionise the air inside the smoke detector. This results in a small current
between the charged metal plates.
When smoke enters the smoke detector the current decreases and an alarm sounds.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
19
(ii) Suggest which of the following times would be a suitable half-life for the source of
α-particles used in the smoke detector. Tick one box.
100 minutes
100 hours
100 days
Complete the equation to show the nucleon number and proton number of neptunium.
241 ........ 4
95
Am ........ Np + 2
α [2]
[Total: 7]
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
0625 PHYSICS
0625/23 Paper 2 (Core Theory), maximum raw mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.
B marks are independent marks, which do not depend on any other marks. For a B mark to
be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be seen in the candidate's
answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend. For an M
mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in a candidate's
answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark, then none of the dependent
A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the points to which
they refer are not written down by the candidate, provided subsequent working gives
evidence that they must have known it. For example, if an equation carries a C mark
and the candidate does not write down the actual equation but does correct working
which shows he or she knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or which are one
of the ways which allow a C mark to be scored.
Brackets ( ) around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate wording used to
clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend on seeing the words or units
in brackets, e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
e.c.f. means "error carried forward". This indicates that if a candidate has made an earlier
mistake and has carried his incorrect value forward to subsequent stages of
working, he or she may be given marks indicated by e.c.f. provided his or her
subsequent working is correct, bearing in mind his or her earlier mistake. This
prevents a candidate being penalised more than once for a particular mistake, but
only applies to marks annotated "e.c.f."
Underlining indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something very similar.
OR indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for scoring the mark.
AND indicates that both answers are required to score the mark.
Spelling Be generous about spelling and use of English. However, do not allow ambiguities,
e.g. spelling which suggests confusion between reflection / refraction / diffraction or
thermistor / transistor / transformer.
Significant
figures Answers are generally acceptable to any number of significant figures ≥ 2, except
where the mark scheme specifies otherwise.
Units On this paper, incorrect units are not penalised, except where specified. More
commonly, marks are allocated for specific units.
NOT indicates that an incorrect answer is not to be disregarded, but cancels another
otherwise correct alternative offered by the candidate. i.e. right plus wrong penalty
applies.
(ii) balance B1
[Total: 8]
[Total: 9]
[Total: 6]
(ii) diffracted B1
[Total: 4]
(c) expansion B1
[Total: 5]
6 (a) wind B1
(b) electrical B1
light B1
[Total: 7]
(c) steel B1
[Total: 5]
[Total: 6]
[Total: 8]
[Total: 7]
11 (a) Gamma / γ B1
(ii) A = 4 B1
Z=2 B1
[Total: 6]
(b) V1 / V2 = N1 / N2 C1
115 / 25 × 500 C1
2300 A1
[Total: 9]
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Core October/November 2015
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (CW/CGW) 116361
© UCLES 2015 [Turn over
PMT
The student pours liquid honey into a container, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
cm3
50
40
30
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.1
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Name the other piece of apparatus necessary when determining the density of the honey.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The student then carefully adds some water and then some kerosene. The liquids do not mix
but form three separate layers as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
50
kerosene
40
30
water
20
10
honey
Fig. 1.2
Identify the correct statements about the densities of the liquids. Tick only two boxes.
[Total: 8]
2 Cameras are used to check average speeds on a long straight road. Each camera records the
exact time that a car passes the camera.
Fig. 2.1 shows three cameras and the times at which the car passes.
(a) (i) Calculate the time taken for the car to travel between camera A and camera B. State your
answer in seconds.
Calculate the average speed of the car between camera A and camera B.
(iii) Using the information on the clocks, describe the average speed of the car between
camera B and camera C. Tick one box.
Use your answers to (a)(ii) and (a)(iii) to estimate whether the car’s average speed was
greater or less than the speed limit when travelling between camera A and camera C. Explain
how you decided on your answer.
estimate ....................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
Draw three lines, each line connecting a state of matter to the diagram representing the
arrangement of the particles in that state of matter.
solid
liquid
gas
[1]
plastic
stopper
air and
vapour
perfume
perfume
bottle
Fig. 3.1
(i) A student pours a small amount of perfume onto her arm. She notices that her arm feels
cold as the perfume evaporates.
Explain why the evaporating perfume produces a cooling effect on her arm.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) When the perfume bottle is left by a window on a hot day, the stopper pops out of the
bottle.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
4 A student has a mobile (cell) phone. The phone receives a signal from a transmitter and produces
a ring tone.
(a) State two differences between the microwave signal received by the phone and the sound
wave produced when the phone rings.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 represents the waves emitted by the mobile phone. The waves interact with a wall,
and a doorway, in the room.
mobile phone
doorway
wall
With reference to Fig. 4.1, complete each of the following sentences using a word from the
box below.
(i) When the waves hit the wall, the waves are .............................................................. . [1]
(ii) When the waves pass through the doorway, the waves are ...................................... . [1]
[Total: 4]
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a simple liquid-in-glass (alcohol) thermometer made by a technician in a laboratory.
Fig. 5.1
The thermometer is to be used to measure temperatures in the range −10 °C to 110 °C. There is
no scale on the thermometer.
(b) Describe how the thermometer is cooled to its lower fixed point.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Identify the physical property used by a liquid-in-glass thermometer to measure temperature.
Tick one box.
colour
expansion
pressure
resistance
[1]
[Total: 5]
10
solar
panels
SLOW
DOWN
Fig. 6.1
(a) The sign makes use of two sources of renewable energy, one of which is solar energy.
Identify the other source of renewable energy used by the sign. Tick the correct box.
chemical
geothermal
light
wind [1]
(b) Fill in the blank spaces to complete one of the useful energy conversions taking place when
the sign is operating using solar energy.
11
(c) (i) In certain conditions, the sign cannot use its sources of renewable energy.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) After passing the sign, the cars climb a steep hill.
State the type of energy gained by cars as they climb the hill.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]
12
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an experiment to identify the pattern and direction of field lines around a bar
magnet.
paper
A
N magnet S C
Fig. 7.1
The bar magnet is placed on a sheet of paper. A plotting compass is placed in each of the four
positions labelled A, B, C and D.
plotting
compass
S N
pivot
pointer
Fig. 7.2
13
(a) In each of positions A, B, C and D on Fig. 7.1, carefully draw an arrow showing the position of
the pointer. Ignore the magnetic field due to the surroundings. [3]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, carefully draw two complete magnetic field lines, one through position B and the
other through position D. The lines you draw should start and finish on the bar magnet. [1]
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
14
starter
motor
M
S relay
coil
Fig. 8.1
When the driver closes switch S, there is a current of 200 A in the starter motor.
(a) (i) Explain how closing switch S causes the starter motor to operate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain why the cable connecting the motor to the battery is much thicker than the wire
connecting the switch S to the battery.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
15
12 V P
fuse
Fig. 8.2
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
16
9 A student investigates how the resistance of a thermistor changes with temperature. Fig. 9.1
shows the circuit that the student uses.
Fig. 9.1
(b) The student varies the temperature of the thermistor and records the ammeter readings. The
results are shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
temperature of thermistor / °C 0 10 20 30 40 50
current in thermistor / mA 1.0 2.0 4.0 7.5 14.0 24.5
(i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the thermistor is 6.0 V at 20 °C.
17
25
20
current in
thermistor /
mA
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
temperature / °C
Fig. 9.2
The student suggests that the current in the thermistor is directly proportional to the
temperature of the thermistor.
Explain how the graph shown in Fig. 9.2 shows that the suggestion is incorrect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
18
10 A camera has a circuit containing a light-dependent resistor (LDR). Fig. 10.1 shows part of this
circuit.
6V
Fig. 10.1
(a) Describe what happens to the resistance of the LDR and the current in the LDR when a bright
light is shone on the LDR.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A camera lens is used to produce an image of an object OX. The arrangement is shown in
Fig. 10.2.
principal axis
O
F F
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2,
(i) draw a ray from the top of the object, parallel to the principal axis and continuing through
and beyond the lens, [2]
(ii) draw in another ray to locate the position of the image of OX, [2]
(iii) carefully draw and label the image obtained. [1]
[Total: 7]
19
α - radiation,
β - radiation,
γ - radiation.
(a) State which of the three types of emission has the greatest speed.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
The equation below describes the change. The symbol AZ X represents the particle emitted.
241Am 237 Np + AX
95 93 Z
A = .......................................................
Z = .......................................................
[2]
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
20
X generator
boiler transmission
lines
steam
transformer
coal
water
cooling
tower
Fig. 12.1
(a) (i) State the name of the part of the power station labelled X.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The transformer converts the 25 kV output from the generator to 115 kV. The primary coil of
the transformer has 500 turns.
21
(c) Explain the advantages of transmitting electricity at high voltages such as 115 kV.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
22
BLANK PAGE
23
BLANK PAGE
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
®
Cambridge IGCSE , Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 C
2 D 22 D
3 A 23 B
4 A 24 A
5 B 25 C
6 B 26 D
7 A 27 D
8 C 28 A
9 A 29 B
10 C 30 A
11 C 31 B
12 D 32 D
13 D 33 A
14 C 34 C
15 B 35 B
16 A 36 C
17 C 37 D
18 B 38 C
19 B 39 D
20 D 40 C
© UCLES 2016
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*2117549282*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB16 11_0625_21/8RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
PMT
1 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
2 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
3 A car travels along a horizontal road in a straight line. The driver presses the accelerator to
increase the speed of the car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20
time / s
4 A spaceship approaches the Earth from deep space. Near the Earth, a force on the spaceship
causes it to have weight. This causes it to change its speed and direction.
Which type of force causes the spaceship’s weight, and which property of the spaceship resists
its change in speed and direction?
A gravitational mass
B gravitational volume
C magnetic mass
D magnetic volume
5 The diagrams show an empty rectangular box, and the same box filled with liquid.
The box has a mass of 60 g when empty. When filled with liquid, the total mass of the box and the
liquid is 300 g.
7 Which diagram shows the magnitude and direction of the resultant R of the two forces F1 and F2?
A B C D
F1 F1 F1 F1
R R
R R
F2 F2 F2 F2
8 Two cars, P and Q, have different masses and different speeds as shown.
mass mass
1000 kg 500 kg
speed speed
10 m / s 20 m / s
car P car Q
Which row correctly compares the momentum and the kinetic energy of P with the momentum
and the kinetic energy of Q?
hill
h NOT TO
SCALE
By travelling to the top of the hill, the car gains 40 000 J of gravitational potential energy.
A 5.0 m B 20 m C 50 m D 500 m
10 A lamp has a power input of 5.0 W. It wastes 1.0 W of power heating the surroundings.
A 3 B 4 C 5 D 6
65 m water
dam
The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3. The gravitational field strength g is 10 N / kg.
What is the pressure exerted at the base of the dam due to the water?
13 Air is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The original volume of the trapped air is V and the original
pressure of the trapped air is P. The piston is pushed to the left. The temperature of the gas does
not change.
piston
cylinder 25 50 25 50
What is the new volume and what is the new pressure of the trapped air?
14 When a liquid evaporates, some of its molecules escape from the surface and the temperature of
the liquid changes.
Which row describes the escaping molecules and the change in temperature of the liquid?
temperature of
escaping molecules
the liquid
15 A gas at a constant temperature is in a container of fixed volume. The gas exerts a pressure on
the walls of the container. The pressure is caused by the gas molecules striking the walls.
Which statement about the gas molecules when they strike the walls is correct?
16 A piece of melting ice at 0 °C and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. The
laboratory is at 20 °C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the
temperature of the boiling water?
temperature of temperature of
melting ice boiling water
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing
°C
–10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
liquid
liquid thread
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C) and the specific heat capacity of water
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
How much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the
water by 10 °C?
What is this method of thermal energy transfer, and what is the second process?
20 The diagrams show four spherical objects at the same temperature. Two of the objects are small
and two are large. Two of the objects are white and two are black.
A B C D
21 The diagram represents plane wavefronts being diffracted by passing through a gap in a barrier.
barrier
wavefronts
gap
Which pair of changes must increase the amount of diffraction that occurs?
22 An image is formed by a plane mirror. A second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying
glass.
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual
10
23 Light travelling at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s strikes the surface of a glass block and undergoes
refraction as it enters the block.
The diagram shows a ray of this light before and after it enters the block.
55°
glass block
33°
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.0 × 108 m / s
C 4.5 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
24 Radiation from which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used in the remote controller for a
television?
A infra-red waves
B microwaves
C radio waves
D ultraviolet waves
25 A girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
11
26 The diagrams represent the displacement in four different sound waves. All the diagrams are
drawn to the same scale.
A B
displacement displacement
0 time 0 time
0 0
C D
displacement displacement
0 time 0 time
0 0
12
28 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
29 A polythene rod is rubbed with a cloth. The rod becomes positively charged because of the
movement of charged particles.
Which row gives the name of these charged particles, and the direction in which they move?
charged direction of
particles movement
13
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
Another 6.0 Ω resistor is then connected in series with the parallel combination.
12.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
A 8.0 Ω B 10 Ω C 15 Ω D 24 Ω
12 V
How much energy is transferred to the surroundings by the lamp in 2.0 minutes?
A 48 J B 96 J C 2880 J D 5760 J
14
33 The diagram shows a circuit containing a battery, a resistor with high resistance, a switch and a
lamp.
12 V
battery
12 V
resistor lamp
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
A B C D
15
Which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?
What happened?
A All the α-particles were absorbed by the nuclei of the gold atoms.
C Some of the α-particles were attracted by the neutrons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.
D Some of the α-particles were repelled by the protons in the nuclei of the gold atoms.
39 A nucleus undergoes radioactive decay. The proton number increases by one. The nucleon
number does not change.
A a neutron
B a proton
C an α-particle
D a β-particle
16
40 Radioactive source S emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. A detector is placed 5 cm away
from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
S detector
5 cm
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
®
Cambridge IGCSE , Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 D 22 D
3 C 23 A
4 B 24 B
5 D 25 C
6 B 26 A
7 A 27 A
8 B 28 D
9 B 29 A
10 C 30 D
11 C 31 A
12 D 32 A
13 D 33 C
14 D 34 A
15 A 35 B
16 C 36 C
17 B 37 C
18 C 38 A
19 C 39 D
20 B 40 C
© UCLES 2016
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*0209924104*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB16 11_0625_22/6RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
PMT
1 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
2 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
speed X Y
20
m/s
W P
Z
0
0 5 15 25
time / s
4 An object tends to keep moving with the same speed and in the same direction due to a certain
property.
What is the name of the property, and what is the name of the field?
property field
A mass electric
B mass gravitational
C volume electric
D volume gravitational
5 A student uses a measuring cylinder and a balance to find the density of oil. The diagram shows
the arrangement used.
empty measuring
measuring cylinder containing
cylinder volume V of oil
oil
m1 m2
g g
A V B V C
m2
D
(m 2 − m1)
m2 (m2 − m1) V V
7 The diagrams show a spring and a graph of the length of the spring against the load applied to it.
7
length / cm
6
5
spring
length 4
3
load
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
load / N
Which energy resource is used to generate electricity without needing any moving parts?
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C solar
D water waves
11 A lamp has a power input of 5.0 W. It wastes 1.0 W of power heating the surroundings.
12 A pendulum bob swings along the path WXYZ and back again.
pendulum bob
W Z
X Y
13 The equation used to find the pressure caused by a liquid can be written as
p=h×Y×Z
Y Z
14 The diagram shows a gas that is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The volume of the gas is
120 cm3 and the pressure of the gas is P.
gas piston
The piston is moved slowly to the left so that the volume of the gas is reduced to 30 cm3. The
temperature of the gas does not change.
P P
A B C P D 4P
4 2
15 A piece of melting ice at 0 °C and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. The
laboratory is at 20 °C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the
temperature of the boiling water?
temperature of temperature of
melting ice boiling water
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing
Which statement explains the effect of the wind on the rate of evaporation of the water in the
puddle?
A The wind gives molecules in the water extra kinetic energy and so increases the rate of
evaporation.
B The wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so decreases the rate of
evaporation.
C The wind removes evaporated water from near the surface and so increases the rate of
evaporation.
D The wind takes energy from molecules near the surface and so decreases the rate of
evaporation.
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C) and the specific heat capacity of water
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
How much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the
water by 10 °C?
18 On a very cold day, a boy puts one hand on the metal handlebars of his bicycle. He puts the
other hand on the rubber hand grip.
The metal feels colder than the rubber hand grip, although they are both at the same
temperature.
Why is this?
19 The diagrams show four spherical objects of the same colour and same type of surface. Two of
the objects are small and two are large. Two of the objects are at the same high temperature and
two are at the same low temperature.
A B C D
displacement 1.0
/ cm
A 0
0 1 2 3 4 distance / cm
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
B 0
0 1 2 3 4 distance / cm
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
C 0
0 1 2 3 4 distance / cm
–1.0
displacement 1.0
/ cm
D 0
0 1 2 3 4 distance / cm
–1.0
10
21 Which diagram shows what happens when plane waves pass the edge of the object shown?
A B
object object
C D
object object
22 An image is formed by a plane mirror. A second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying
glass.
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual
11
23 The diagram shows light passing from air into glass. Two angles p and q are marked.
normal
p
air
glass
q
Which pair of equations can both be used to calculate the refractive index n of the glass?
24 Which part of the electromagnetic spectrum is used to send television signals from a satellite to
Earth?
A infra-red
B microwaves
C ultraviolet
D visible light
25 A girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
12
A amplitude
B frequency
C speed
D wavelength
27 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
13
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
A second copper wire is twice as long as the first wire, and its diameter is twice the diameter of
the first wire.
14
A B
1.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
1.0 Ω 2.0 Ω
C D
1.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
3.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
33 In the circuit shown, the voltmeter reads 2.0 V. A charge of 5.0 C passes through the resistor in a
certain time.
A 0.40 J B 2.5 J C 10 J D 20 J
input 1
output
input 2
15
35 An electric kettle has a metal casing. The cable for the kettle contains a wire that is connected to
the earth pin of the plug.
Which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?
uniform
β-particle magnetic field
out of the page
16
What is the proton number and what is the nucleon number of the nucleus formed by this decay?
A 81 210
B 81 212
C 84 213
D 84 214
40 Radioactive source S emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. A detector is placed 5 cm away
from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
S detector
5 cm
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
®
Cambridge IGCSE , Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 D
2 D 22 A
3 A 23 C
4 B 24 C
5 B 25 B
6 B 26 D
7 D 27 A
8 C 28 C
9 C 29 A
10 B 30 D
11 B 31 D
12 C 32 A
13 D 33 B
14 D 34 B
15 C 35 A
16 A 36 C
17 D 37 A
18 B 38 D
19 B 39 C
20 C 40 A
© UCLES 2016
PMT
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2016
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*5649030721*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB16 11_0625_23/6RP
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
PMT
1 The graph shows how the distance travelled by a vehicle changes with time.
S
distance
Q R
P
0
0 time
Which row describes the speed of the vehicle in each section of the graph?
P to Q Q to R R to S
2 A stone falls freely from the top of a cliff. Air resistance may be ignored.
Which graph shows how the acceleration of the stone varies with time as it falls?
A B
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
acceleration acceleration
0 0
0 time 0 time
speed X Y
10
m/s
W
Z
0
0 10 30 50
time / s
What is the reason for this difference, and how does his mass on the Moon compare with his
mass on Earth?
5 The diagrams show an empty container, and the same container filled with liquid.
The empty container has a mass of 120 g. When filled with the liquid, the total mass of the
container and the liquid is 600 g.
7 Different loads are hung on a spring. The diagram shows the length of the spring with and without
the loads attached.
20 cm
40 cm
65 cm
200 N
400 N
A 5 cm B 25 cm C 40 cm D 45 cm
Which change would result in a speed of 6.0 m / s just before hitting the floor?
A Drop the ball from double the height above the floor.
B Drop the ball from four times the height above the floor.
C Use a ball with double the mass.
D Use a ball with four times the mass.
11 Which list contains only energy resources that derive their energy from the Sun?
12 A lamp has a power input of 5.0 W. It wastes 1.0 W of power heating the surroundings.
container
h
liquid
The pressure of the liquid at the bottom of the container depends on several factors.
14 Which diagram best represents the movement of a smoke particle displaying Brownian motion?
A B
smoke smoke
particle particle
C D
smoke
particle
smoke
particle
The pressure p and the volume V of the gas are found to be related by the equation:
pV = constant.
A key
B = constant
C = changed
D
16 A piece of melting ice at 0 °C and a beaker of boiling water are both in a laboratory. The
laboratory is at 20 °C.
boiling water
melting ice
Bunsen burner
heating water
What is happening to the temperature of the melting ice and what is happening to the
temperature of the boiling water?
temperature of temperature of
melting ice boiling water
A constant constant
B constant increasing
C increasing constant
D increasing increasing
Which thermometer is better for measuring a very high temperature, and which thermometer is
better for measuring a rapidly varying temperature?
A liquid-in-glass liquid-in-glass
B liquid-in-glass thermocouple
C thermocouple liquid-in-glass
D thermocouple thermocouple
The specific heat capacity of copper is 385 J / (kg °C) and the specific heat capacity of water
is 4200 J / (kg °C).
How much energy, in joules, is needed to raise the temperature of the copper container and the
water by 10 °C?
19 The diagrams show four spherical objects of the same size. Two of the objects are white and two
are black. Two of the objects are at the same high temperature and two are at the same low
temperature.
A B C D
20 A man is talking at the side of a house. He can be heard by a woman at the front of the house
even though she cannot see him.
10
21 An image is formed by a plane mirror. A second image is formed by a lens used as a magnifying
glass.
A real real
B real virtual
C virtual real
D virtual virtual
The critical angle for light in a transparent plastic material placed in air is 37°.
A 1.8 × 108 m / s
B 2.4 × 108 m / s
C 3.8 × 108 m / s
D 5.0 × 108 m / s
24 A girl notices that, when she shouts into a cave, she hears an echo.
A diffraction
B dispersion
C reflection
D refraction
11
25 A man stands 110 m from a high wall. He makes a short, sharp sound and then hears an echo
from the wall.
How long after making the sound does the man hear the echo?
27 In two separate experiments, a magnet is brought near to an unmagnetised iron bar. This causes
the bar to become magnetised.
A N N
B N S
C S N
D S S
12
cloth
hand
rod
He rubs the rod with a cloth. The rod gains a positive charge.
Of which material could the rod be made, and which transfer of charge has happened?
Which change to the circuit would increase the current in the lamp?
13
30 The graph shows the relationship between the current in a circuit component and the potential
difference (p.d.) across it. The graph has a straight section and a curved section.
current
0
0 p.d.
What happens to the resistance of the component in these two sections as the current increases?
A 0.083 C B 5C C 20 C D 1200 C
14
In which circuit is the direction of the current in the resistor always from the red terminal to the
black terminal?
A B
12 V 12 V
C D
12 V 12 V
15
6V
0V
When brighter light falls on the light-dependent resistor (LDR), its resistance changes.
What happens to the resistance of the LDR and what happens to the current in it?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
low (0) P Q
low (0)
P Q
16
The cable connected to the second appliance does not need an earth wire.
A One appliance has a metal case, but the other appliance does not.
B One appliance is fitted with a fuse, but the other appliance is not.
C One appliance is fitted with a switch, but the other appliance is not.
D One appliance needs more current than the other appliance.
Which row shows the effect that a relay uses and one application of a relay?
A a neutron
B a proton
C an α-particle
D a β-particle
17
uniform
magnetic field
out of the page
α-particle
39 Radioactive source S emits α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. A detector is placed 5 cm away
from S. A thin sheet of paper is placed as shown in the diagram.
S detector
5 cm
18
238
92 U → 234
90 Th + particle
A an α-particle
B a β-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
19
BLANK PAGE
20
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 B 1
6 C 1
7 B 1
8 C 1
9 D 1
10 D 1
11 B 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 A 1
16 D 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 A 1
20 C 1
21 A 1
22 C 1
23 D 1
24 D 1
25 A 1
26 B 1
27 B 1
28 C 1
29 C 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 B 1
34 B 1
35 A 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 B 1
40 A 1
PHYSICS 0625/21
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*6133216338*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 11_0625_21/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
He puts some water into a measuring cylinder and then one glass ball. He puts the cork and then
a second, identical glass ball into the water as shown.
80 80 80
glass ball
60 60 60
40 40 40 cork
20 20 20
glass ball glass ball
Diagram 2 shows the water level after one glass ball is added.
Diagram 3 shows the water level after the cork and the second glass ball are added.
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped from the heights shown.
A B C D
1.0 kg
2.0 kg
3.0 kg
4.0 m
4.0 kg
3.0 m
2.0 m
1.0 m ground
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
80 cm
60 cm
10 cm
X Y
centre
pivot
of beam F
8.0 N
The beam is kept balanced by a force F acting on the beam 80 cm from end X.
A 8.0 N B 18 N C 22 N D 44 N
7 The diagrams show four table lamps resting on a table. The position of the centre of mass of
each lamp is labelled X.
A B C D
X X
X X
8 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A tennis ball of mass 0.060 kg travels horizontally at a speed of 25 m / s. The ball hits a tennis
racket and rebounds horizontally at a speed of 40 m / s.
racket
ball
25 m / s 40 m / s
A 0.018 N B 0.078 N C 18 N D 78 N
10 The diagram shows the path of a stone that is thrown from X and reaches its maximum height
at Y.
Y
path of
stone
How much kinetic energy did the stone have immediately after it was thrown at X?
A 2.0 J B 8.0 J C 10 J D 12 J
motor
load lifted
through 0.50 m
load
40 N
How long does it take the motor to lift the load through 0.50 m?
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
14 The diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. When
the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.
glass tube
mercury
air
water
Which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?
A B C D
16 The diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. A child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.
How does the air pressure in the toy change and why?
pressure reason
17 A strip of iron and a strip of brass are firmly attached to each other along their entire length. This
combination is a bimetallic strip.
iron strip
brass strip
iron
fixed support
brass
How much energy is needed to raise the temperature of the block from 20 °C to 110 °C?
A Convection currents occur because, when cooled, liquids contract and become more dense.
B Convection currents occur because, when warmed, liquids expand and become more dense.
C Convection currents only occur in liquids.
D Convection currents only occur in solids and liquids.
20 The diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.
wavefronts
Which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
21 The diagram shows an object in front of a plane mirror. A ray of light from the object is incident on
the mirror.
object
R
Q S
P
plane
mirror
Through which point does the reflected ray pass, and at which point is the image of the object
formed?
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
A dispersed
B focused
C monochromatic
D refracted
23 Visible light, X-rays and microwaves are all components of the electromagnetic spectrum.
A In a vacuum, microwaves travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
B In a vacuum, microwaves travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter
wavelength.
C In a vacuum, X-rays travel faster than visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
D In a vacuum, X-rays travel at the same speed as visible light and have a shorter wavelength.
24 The Moon is 380 000 km from the Earth. A laser light beam is directed from the Earth to the
Moon. The beam is reflected back to the Earth.
How long does it take for the light to travel to the Moon and back to the Earth?
25 Which wavefront is travelling at a speed closest to that of a sound wave through a solid?
27 A student stands 180 m in front of a vertical, flat cliff and bangs together two pieces of wood to
make a short, loud sound.
A timer records the echo of the sound 1.5 seconds after the pieces of wood are banged together.
28 A train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.
magnet
train of train of
steel nails iron nails
30 A positively-charged rod is held near to, but not touching, an uncharged metal sphere.
A It is charged negatively because negative charges have moved from earth to the sphere.
B It is charged negatively because positive charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
C It is charged positively because negative charges have moved from the sphere to earth.
D It is charged positively because positive charges have moved to earth from the sphere.
Four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points P and Q in
the circuit.
P Q
diameter / mm length / m
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A torch has a simple circuit with a 3.0 V battery and a lamp. There is a 20 mA current in the lamp.
A 0.30 J B 18 J C 60 J D 0.30 kJ
Which graph shows the variation with time of the current in the resistor?
A B
current current
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
current current
0
0 time
0
0 time
34 The diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an
ammeter.
Which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the
current in the circuit?
resistance of
temperature current in circuit
thermistor
A an AND gate
B a NOR gate
C a NOT gate
D an OR gate
The wire is moved in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
X
B
A C
N S
D
37 The graph shows how the voltage induced across a coil changes with time as the coil spins in a
magnetic field.
voltage
0
0 time
Which graph shows what happens when the coil spins more quickly?
A B
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
voltage voltage
0 0
0 time 0 time
38 Emissions X and Y from radioactive material are passed through a magnetic field. The diagram
shows the direction of the emissions, the direction of the magnetic field and the effect on the
emissions.
emission X emission Y
A α-particles β-particles
B α-particles γ-rays
C β-particles α-particles
D β-particles γ-rays
A half of the time taken for all of the original nuclei to decay
B the time taken for half of the original nuclei to decay
C the time taken for the charges on all the nuclei to halve
D the time taken for the mass of each nucleus to halve
40 The rate of emission of a radioactive source is measured until the reading reaches the
background rate of 20 counts per minute.
200
190
180
rate of emission
170
counts / minute
160
150
140
130
120
110
100
90
80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time / minute
A 10 minutes
B 12 minutes
C 14 minutes
D 30 minutes
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 B 1
2 D 1
3 C 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 C 1
7 C 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 C 1
11 A 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 D 1
18 C 1
19 B 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 A 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 B 1
26 C 1
27 C 1
28 C 1
29 A 1
30 A 1
31 C 1
32 B 1
33 C 1
34 B 1
35 D 1
36 A 1
37 B 1
38 B 1
39 D 1
40 A 1
PHYSICS 0625/22
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*2664559192*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 11_0625_22/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
The diagrams show the experiment and the volume of oil in the measuring cylinder at the start of
the experiment, and one minute later.
80 80
cm3 cm3
60 60
40 40
20 20
What is the rate of flow of oil through the funnel during the one minute?
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
3 The gravitational field strength on the Earth is greater than the gravitational field strength on the
Moon. The Earth has an atmosphere, but the Moon does not.
Which speed-time graph represents the motion of a light ball dropped from a great height near
the surface of the Earth and near the surface of the Moon?
A B
Earth
Moon
speed speed
Earth
Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
C D
Earth
Earth
speed speed
Moon Moon
0 0
0 time 0 time
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
5 A body of mass m has a weight W in a location where the gravitational field strength is g.
6 An object is pivoted at point P. A student ties a length of string to a peg on the object. He pulls
the string with a force F.
string
s t
peg
r
q P
object
7 Each diagram shows a metal plate with four parallel forces acting on it. These are the only forces
acting on the plates.
A B
C D
8 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
9 A ball has a mass of 0.30 kg. It moves horizontally with a speed of 3.0 m / s in the direction shown.
wall wall
ball ball
3.0 m / s 2.0 m / s
The ball rebounds from the wall with a horizontal speed of 2.0 m / s.
A 10 3
B 40 10
C 100 25
D 2000 250
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
Which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?
A B C D
15 The diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. A child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.
How does the air pressure in the toy change and why?
pressure reason
16 The diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. When
the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.
glass tube
mercury
air
water
20 The diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.
wavefronts
Which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
21 The diagram shows an object O in front of a thin converging lens of focal length f.
At which point will the lens form a sharp image of the object?
A
O
f f
C
D
22 The diagram shows a ray of light incident on the surface of a rectangular glass block at 90° to the
surface.
ray of light
glass block
Which quantities remain unchanged as the light enters the glass block?
A electric fire
B electric generator
C electric motor
D electromagnet
24 The Moon is 380 000 km from the Earth. A laser light beam is directed from the Earth to the
Moon. The beam is reflected back to the Earth.
How long does it take for the light to travel to the Moon and back to the Earth?
Which row correctly compares the speed of sound in ice and the speed of sound in steam with
the speed of sound in water?
27 A student finds that it takes sound 0.33 seconds to travel 100 metres.
A 30 m / s B 60 m / s C 300 m / s D 600 m / s
28 A train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.
magnet
train of train of
steel nails iron nails
The owner wants to use the watch again. He must demagnetise the watch.
A Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries alternating current and then slowly remove it.
B Insert the watch in a solenoid that carries direct current and then slowly remove it.
C Pass alternating current through the watch.
D Pass direct current through the watch.
30 Which diagram represents the electric field due to a negatively-charged conducting sphere?
A B C D
– – – –
Four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points P and Q in
the circuit.
P Q
diameter / mm length / m
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 The graph shows the way in which one physical quantity y varies with another physical quantity x.
0
0 x
y x
33 The potential difference across a car headlamp is 12 V. The current in the lamp is 2.5 A.
34 The diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an
ammeter.
Which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the
current in the circuit?
resistance of
temperature current in circuit
thermistor
0 0 W
0 1 X
1 0 Y
1 1 Z
W X Y Z
A 0 0 0 1
B 0 1 1 1
C 1 0 0 0
D 1 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a wire hanging freely between the poles of a magnet. There is a current in
the wire in the direction shown.
wire
S N
current
37 A 100% efficient transformer has 6000 turns on its primary coil and 600 turns on its secondary
coil. The output voltage of the transformer is 12 V.
output voltage 12 V
power 24 W
38 In the diagram, the circle represents an atom (not to scale) with the nucleus at its centre.
A particle is emitted by a radioactive source and approaches the nucleus of the atom. The curved
arrow shows the path of the particle.
nucleus
path of
particle
A α-particle negative
B α-particle positive
C β-particle negative
D β-particle positive
39 Which row describes the behaviour of γ-rays in an electric field and in a magnetic field?
A deflected deflected
B deflected undeflected
C undeflected deflected
D undeflected undeflected
A detector near the source shows a reading of 6000 counts per second.
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 40
Published
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination.
Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.
Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.
Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.
This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
1 A 1
2 A 1
3 A 1
4 D 1
5 C 1
6 D 1
7 D 1
8 C 1
9 C 1
10 B 1
11 D 1
12 B 1
13 B 1
14 A 1
15 D 1
16 A 1
17 A 1
18 C 1
19 C 1
20 C 1
21 D 1
22 C 1
23 A 1
24 D 1
25 D 1
26 D 1
27 B 1
28 C 1
29 A 1
30 B 1
31 C 1
32 C 1
33 D 1
34 B 1
35 C 1
36 D 1
37 C 1
38 A 1
39 C 1
40 D 1
PHYSICS 0625/23
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) October/November 2017
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
*7509628836*
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
IB17 11_0625_23/4RP
© UCLES 2017 [Turn over
2
1 A measuring cylinder contains some water. A small metal block is slowly lowered into the water
and is then removed.
Finally a piece of plastic is attached to the metal block and the block is again slowly lowered into
the water.
The diagrams show the measuring cylinder at each stage of this process.
1 2 3
cm3 cm3 cm3
100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
70 70 70
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 30 30
20 20 20 plastic
10 10 10
2 Four balls with different masses are dropped simultaneously from the heights shown.
A B C D
4.0 kg
3.0 kg
2.0 kg
2.0 m
1.0 kg
1.5 m
1.0 m
0.5 m ground
3 The diagram shows the vertical forces acting on a ball as it falls vertically through the air. The ball
does not reach terminal velocity.
air resistance
weight
Which row describes what happens to the resultant force on the ball and what happens to the
acceleration of the ball as it falls through the air?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
spring
metal
A friction
B mass
C pressure
D weight
blade
handle
P
Q
R
S
blade
handle
Where should the rope be positioned and at which labelled points should the hands be positioned
to produce the greatest cutting force?
rope hands
positioned positioned
A P R
B P S
C Q R
D Q S
7 The lamp in the diagram is not very stable and falls over easily.
shade
stem
base
Which row shows changes that would definitely make the lamp more stable?
A narrower higher
B narrower lower
C wider higher
D wider lower
8 The diagram shows an incomplete scale drawing to find the resultant of two 10 N forces acting at
a point in the directions shown.
10 N
10 N
A 7.5 N B 8.6 N C 18 N D 20 N
10 A car, starting from rest at position X, accelerates up a hill. The car reaches a speed of 10 m / s at
position Y.
The kinetic energy of the car at position Y is equal to its gain in gravitational potential energy from
X to Y.
X gain in
height
of car
A 0.50 m B 5.0 m C 10 m D 50 m
11 A 150 W filament lamp has an efficiency of 10%. A 40 W compact fluorescent lamp (CFL) has an
efficiency of 30%.
Which lamp produces more light and which lamp converts more energy into other forms of
energy?
height
length
Which information is not needed to calculate the rate at which the student is doing work against
gravity?
cm vacuum
90
80
metre rule 70
60
50
40
30
20
10
mercury
A 12 cm B 74 cm C 86 cm D 100 cm
Which diagram shows the most likely movement of the pollen grain?
A B C D
15 The diagram shows an air-filled rubber toy. A child sits on the toy and its volume decreases.
How does the air pressure in the toy change and why?
pressure reason
16 The diagram shows a glass flask, sealed with a small volume of mercury in a glass tube. When
the flask is gently warmed the mercury rises up the tube.
glass tube
mercury
air
water
What is the thermal capacity of the water? (Ignore any heat loss.)
19 Why is the heating coil of a domestic immersion heater placed at the bottom of the tank?
A Cold water is less dense than hot water and therefore sinks.
B Cold water is more dense than hot water and therefore rises.
C Hot water is less dense than cold water and therefore rises.
D Hot water is more dense than cold water and therefore sinks.
20 The diagram represents plane wavefronts of a water wave about to strike a solid barrier.
wavefronts
Which diagram shows the position of the wavefronts after reflection at the barrier?
A B
reflected
reflected
C D
reflected
reflected
21 The diagram shows a ray of light in glass. The ray reaches a boundary with air.
air
glass 50°
plastic block
62°
ray of
light
23 A sound wave travels from a medium in one state into the same medium but in another state.
This causes the speed of the wave to change from approximately 300 m / s to approximately
3000 m / s.
A gas to solid
B liquid to gas
C liquid to solid
D solid to liquid
24 The Moon is 380 000 km from the Earth. A laser light beam is directed from the Earth to the
Moon. The beam is reflected back to the Earth.
How long does it take for the light to travel to the Moon and back to the Earth?
A B C D
sea land atmosphere outer space
(water) (rock) (air) (vacuum)
not to scale
28 A train of steel nails and a train of iron nails hang from a strong magnet.
magnet
train of train of
steel nails iron nails
A α-particles
B electrons
C neutrons
D protons
Four pieces of metal wire of the same material are connected, in turn, between points P and Q in
the circuit.
P Q
diameter / mm length / m
A 0.10 1.0
B 0.10 2.0
C 0.20 1.0
D 0.20 2.0
32 A battery is connected to a circuit. It is switched on for 1.0 minute. During that time, there is a
current of 0.40 A in the circuit and the battery supplies a total of 48 J of energy.
Which row gives the charge that passes and the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery?
A 0.40 2.0
B 0.40 120
C 24 2.0
D 24 120
33 Identical cells and identical resistors are used to make the circuits shown.
A A
circuit 1 circuit 2
34 The diagram shows a circuit with a fixed resistor connected in series with a thermistor and an
ammeter.
Which row shows how temperature change affects the resistance of the thermistor and the
current in the circuit?
resistance of
temperature current in circuit
thermistor
X
Y
output
Z
X Y Z
A 0 0 1
B 0 1 1
C 1 0 0
D 1 1 0
36 The diagram shows a short-circuited copper coil swinging about an axis at right-angles to a
strong magnetic field. The motion induces a current in the coil.
axis of rotation
of coil
coil
magnetic field
direction of
swing of coil
A The induced current has no effect on the movement of the coil because copper is non-
magnetic.
B The induced current produces a magnetic field of constant magnitude in the coil.
C The induced current produces forces that assist the change causing it.
D The induced current produces forces that oppose the changes causing it.
37 Diagram 1 shows a magnet being pushed into a coil that is connected to a centre-zero
galvanometer.
N
stationary
magnet
S N
0 0 0
N
S
Which row shows the directions of the pointer when the magnet is as shown in diagrams 2
and 3?
diagram 2 diagram 3
14 14
6C → 7N + particle
A a β-particle
B an α-particle
C a neutron
D a proton
39 As α-particles pass through the electric field between two charged plates, they are deflected
downwards.
+ + + + + + + + +
α-particles
– – – – – – – – –
40 Radioactive iodine-131 emits β-particles and has a half-life of 8 days. It decays to produce
xenon-131.
BLANK PAGE
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
International Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at
www.cie.org.uk after the live examination series.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN MARK SCHEME
45 minutes
MAXIMUM MARK: 40
The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
Question Question
Key Key
Number Number
1 A 21 A
2 B 22 C
3 B 23 C
4 C 24 C
5 B 25 D
6 B 26 D
7 B 27 B
8 C 28 D
9 A 29 B
10 C 30 B
11 C 31 C
12 D 32 C
13 A 33 A
14 A 34 C
15 D 35 B
16 B 36 A
17 D 37 D
18 D 38 A
19 C 39 D
20 A 40 C
PHYSICS 0625/02
Paper 2 Multiple Choice (Extended) For Examination from 2016
SPECIMEN PAPER
45 minutes
Additional Materials: Multiple Choice Answer Sheet
Soft clean eraser
Soft pencil (type B or HB is recommended)
There are forty questions on this paper. Answer all questions. For each question there are four possible
answers A, B, C and D.
Choose the one you consider correct and record your choice in soft pencil on the separate Answer Sheet.
Each correct answer will score one mark. A mark will not be deducted for a wrong answer.
Any rough working should be done in this booklet.
Electronic calculators may be used.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2)
The syllabus is accredited for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
A impulse
B moment
C power
D work done
What is the direction of her motion, and what is the direction of her acceleration, immediately
after she opens her parachute?
A downwards downwards
B downwards upwards
C upwards downwards
D upwards upwards
4 An astronaut in an orbiting spacecraft experiences a force due to gravity. This force is less than
when she is on the Earth’s surface.
Compared with being on the Earth’s surface, how do her mass and her weight change when she
goes into orbit?
A decreases decreases
B decreases unchanged
C unchanged decreases
D unchanged unchanged
cm3 cm3
50 50
40 measuring 40
cylinder
30 30
liquid
20 20
10 balance 10
g g
6 An experiment is carried out to measure the extension of a rubber band for different loads.
7 The diagram shows a satellite that is moving at a uniform rate in a circular orbit around the Earth.
8 Which statement about an object moving in a straight line through air is correct?
9 A beam pivoted at one end has a force of 5.0 N acting vertically upwards on it as shown. The
beam is in equilibrium.
5.0 N
2.0 cm 3.0 cm
pivot
weight
of beam
A 6 kJ
B 12 kJ
C 72 kJ
D 144 kJ
11 Which diagram shows two forces X and Y with their resultant force?
resultant
resultant
Y
X Y
X
A B
resultant
resultant
Y X
Y
C D
12 A ball is dropped on to a hard surface and bounces. It does not bounce all the way back to where
it started, and so has not regained all of its original gravitational potential energy.
ball dropped
from here
ball bounces
to here
hard surface
13 The Sun is the original source of energy for many of our energy resources.
A geothermal
B hydroelectric
C waves
D wind
14 A dam across a lake is divided into two sections by a rock. Section X is longer than section Y but
the two sections are otherwise identical. The water in the lake by the dam is the same depth
everywhere. The diagram shows a view from above of the lake and the dam.
section X of dam
water in
lake
rock
section Y of dam
The water creates a total force on each section of the dam and an average pressure on each
section of the dam.
15 The diagram shows a simple mercury barometer alongside a mercury manometer. The
manometer contains some trapped gas.
cm
90
vacuum
80
70
trapped
gas
60
50
76 cm 40
mercury
30
20
10
A 10 cm of mercury
B 50 cm of mercury
C 66 cm of mercury
D 86 cm of mercury
16 Very small pollen grains are suspended in a beaker of water. A bright light shines from the side.
Small, bright dots of light are seen through a microscope. The dots move in rapidly changing,
random directions.
eye
microscope
light
pollen grains
in water
What happens to the average speed of the gas molecules and to the pressure of the gas in the
cylinder as the temperature of the gas rises?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
18 The diagram shows four beakers A, B, C and D. The beakers contain different amounts of the
same liquid at the same temperature. The beakers are left next to each other on a laboratory
bench overnight. The diagrams are all drawn to the same scale.
A B C D
19 Which line in the table shows the relative expansion of the three states of matter from the most
expansion to the least expansion?
liquid liquid
thread
10
He has a block of copper and an electrical heater. He knows the power of the heater.
A key
B = needed
C = not needed
D
The graph shows how the temperature of the substance changes with time.
temperature
/ °C
0
0 100 300 time / s
A 20 000 J / kg
B 30 000 J / kg
C 500 000 J / kg
D 750 000 J / kg
11
23 The diagram shows some ice being used to lower the temperature of some warm water.
ice
warm water
glass
What is the main process by which the water at the bottom of the glass becomes cool?
A condensation
B conduction
C convection
D radiation
12
24 The diagrams show water waves that move more slowly after passing into shallow water.
A B
fast slow fast slow
C D
fast slow fast slow
25 The diagram shows a ray of monochromatic light passing through a semi-circular glass block.
incident reflected
ray glass ray
air
13
The diagram represents three rays from the top of O passing through the lens.
Which type of image is produced by the lens when the object O is in this position?
27 An echo-sounder on a ship produces a pulse of sound. The echo is received by the echo-sounder
after two seconds.
ship
echo-sounder
sea bed
14
power supply
metal
coil
Which metal and which power supply are used to make a permanent magnet?
A iron 6 V a.c.
B iron 6 V d.c.
C steel 6 V a.c.
D steel 6 V d.c.
29 A positively charged plastic rod is placed just above a thick metal plate. The metal plate rests on
an insulator and is connected to the earth by a wire.
+ + + + + +
earthing wire
insulator
A student disconnects the earthing wire and then removes the positively charged rod.
The experiment is repeated. This time the student removes the positively charged rod and then
removes the earthing wire.
A When the earthing wire is disconnected first, the metal plate becomes positively charged.
B When the earthing wire is disconnected first, the metal plate becomes negatively charged.
C When the plastic rod is removed first, the metal plate becomes positively charged.
D When the plastic rod is removed first, the metal plate becomes negatively charged.
15
30 The resistance of a wire depends on its length l and on its cross-sectional area A.
The resistance is
31 In the circuit shown, the ammeter reads 2.0 A and the voltmeter reads 12 V.
12 V
6.0 Ω
A 2.4 J
B 14.4 J
C 240 J
D 1440 J
16
3.0 A 4.0 Ω
A
2.0 Ω
A 4.5 A
B 6.0 A
C 9.0 A
D 12.0 A
17
33 The circuit diagram shows a thermistor in a potential divider. A voltmeter is connected across the
thermistor.
The graph shows how the resistance of the thermistor changes with temperature.
resistance
temperature
As the thermistor becomes warmer, what happens to its resistance and what happens to the
reading on the voltmeter?
A decreases decreases
B decreases increases
C increases decreases
D increases increases
18
The time taken to break the circuit depends on the current, as shown in the graph.
160
time taken
140
to break the
circuit / s 120
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
current / A
What happens when the current in the circuit is 2 A and what happens when the current is 18 A?
A the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
B the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds the circuit does not break
C the circuit does not break the circuit breaks in less than 5 seconds
D the circuit does not break the circuit does not break
19
35 A solenoid is connected in series with a sensitive ammeter. The N pole of a magnet is placed
next to one end of the solenoid, marked X.
solenoid
N X
magnet
First, the N pole of the magnet is pushed towards X, then the magnet is pulled away from X.
During both stages the ammeter deflects.
A N pole N pole
B N pole S pole
C S pole N pole
D S pole S pole
20
soft-iron core
primary secondary
coil coil
Which row describes the magnetic field in the soft-iron core and the magnetic field in the
secondary coil when the transformer is operating?
magnetic field
in soft-iron core in secondary coil
A changing changing
B changing constant
C constant changing
D constant constant
21
37 The graph shows the output of an a.c. generator. The coil in the generator rotates 20 times in one
second.
+1
output
p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
+1
output
A p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
+1
output
B p.d. / V 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
+2
output
p.d. / V
+1
C 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
–2
+2
output
p.d. / V
+1
D 0
0 0.05 0.10 time / s
–1
–2
22
38 The diagram shows a wire placed between two magnetic poles of equal strength.
A current passes through the wire in the direction shown. The current causes a downward force
on the wire.
wire
direction
of force
direction
of current
S N
A
N S
B
N N
C
S S
D
23
39 A beam of γ-rays passes between two charged metal plates as shown in the diagram.
γ-rays
A 0 mg B 40 mg C 100 mg D 200 mg
24
BLANK PAGE
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
1 hour
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 A person winds some thread tightly 4 times round the length of a metre rule and cuts the
ends off level with the left-hand end of the rule, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
ends cut
off here
thread 1 m rule
Fig. 1.1
.................. m [1]
(b) Is the actual length of thread slightly greater or slightly less than your answer to (a)?
Tick one box and give your reason.
reason .......................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 (a) Two horizontal strings are attached to a soft rubber ball, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
10 N F
Fig. 2.1
(i) The ball does not move. What is the value of the force F on the other string?
F = .............................. N
(ii) What change to the rubber ball do the two forces cause?
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A garden pot containing soil weighs a total of 360 N. The pot rests on three equally-
spaced blocks, so that surplus water can drain out of the holes in the base of the pot.
The soil is uniformly distributed in the pot. The pot is shown in Fig. 2.2.
Fig. 2.2
(i) What is the force exerted by each block on the pot? ...............N
(ii) State the direction of these forces.
...................................................................................................................................
(iii) The gardener finds that the blocks sink into the ground, but he must have the pot
up on blocks to allow the drainage. What can he do to reduce the sinking of the
pot?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 (a) An unopened bottle of olive oil has
a mass of 0.97 kg. The empty bottle
has a mass of 0.51 kg.
Calculate the mass of the olive oil.
OLI V OLI V
OIL OIL
0.97 kg 0.51 kg
Fig. 3.1
(b) The olive oil is poured into three 250 cm3 measuring cylinders. The first two cylinders
are filled to the 250 cm3 mark. The third is shown in Fig. 3.2.
cm3
250
200
50
150
100
50
Fig. 3.2
(i) What is the volume of the olive oil in the third measuring cylinder?
(ii) Calculate the volume of the olive oil in the unopened bottle.
(iii) Calculate the density of the olive oil. Express your answer to 2 significant figures.
density = ..................................
[7]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 The air trapped in a cylinder by a piston is kept under pressure by a load, as shown in
Fig. 4.1.
fixed
pivot
load
piston
cylinder
air
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the pressure in the cylinder is caused by the air molecules.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[3]
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the pressure in the cylinder, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
reason .......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 An immersion heater is put into some crushed ice at 0 °C. The immersion heater is switched
on.
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.2, sketch the graph of temperature against time, up to the time when all the
ice has melted. [3]
100
temperature / °C
0 time
time when
all ice has
melted
Fig. 5.2
(b) The heater is left switched on after all the ice has melted, and the temperature rises.
After some time, the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
(i) Suggest why the temperature stops rising, even though the heater is still on.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) State what happens to the energy received by the water whilst this is happening.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[2]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 In this question, drawing should be done carefully.
ray of
light mirror 2
mirror 1 X
Fig. 6.1
(b) Mirror 2 is parallel to mirror 1. The reflected ray from mirror 1 strikes mirror 2.
Compare the direction of the ray reflected from mirror 2 with the incident ray at X. You
may do a further construction if you wish. Complete the sentence below.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 The speed of sound in air is 340 m/s.
(a) Complete Fig. 7.1 to show how far a sound wave has travelled 2, 3, 4 and 5 seconds
after the sound was made. [1]
time elapsed/s 0 1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 7.1
(b) On Fig. 7.2, draw the graph of distance travelled against time for the sound wave. [3]
distance
travelled
/m
2000
1500
1000
500
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time/s
Fig. 7.2
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
(c) A ship is sinking in the dark as shown in Fig. 7.3.
distress
flare
lifeboat
sinking ship
Fig. 7.3
The sailors on the ship fire a distress flare into the air. It explodes with a bang and a
bright flash of light.
(i) A lifeboat crew hear the bang and see the flash, but not at the same time.
State which reaches the lifeboat first, the bang or the flash, and give a reason.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) The time interval in (c)(i) is 4.2 s. Use your graph in (b) to find how far away the
lifeboat is from the flare. Show clearly on your graph how you got your answer.
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 (a) In an electronic circuit, what is a capacitor designed to store? ................................ [1]
(b) The circuit in Fig. 8.1 contains a large-value resistor and a capacitor.
S1
large-value
resistor
6 V d.c.
V capacitor –
S2
Fig. 8.1
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[4]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 A length of flexible, slack wire is fixed at A and B so that part of it is held vertically
in the field of a horseshoe magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
S
N
Fig. 9.1
Figs. 9.2 and 9.3 each show the same section through the apparatus. The wire between A
and B is not shown.
A A
magnet magnet
pole pole
B B
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.2, draw what the wire might look like when a large current passes
through it. [2]
(ii) Explain why the wire looks like this.
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(b) On Fig. 9.3, draw what the wire might look like if the current in (a) is reversed. [1]
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simplified diagram of the front of a cathode-ray oscilloscope (c.r.o.).
brightness focus
time-base y-gain
ms/cm volts/cm
x-shift y-shift
on
y input off
Fig. 10.1
(a) When the oscilloscope is switched on, a bright spot is seen at the centre of the screen.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) The spot is rather blurred. Which control should be adjusted to make it sharper?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Which control would be switched on to turn the spot into a horizontal line?
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iv) Describe what happens inside the oscilloscope to turn the spot into a horizontal
line.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) You have an alternating p.d. whose waveform you wish to display on the screen.
(i) Where would you connect this alternating p.d. to the oscilloscope?
...................................................................................................................................
(ii) Fig. 10.2 shows what the trace on the screen might look like.
Fig. 10.2
1. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the x-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
2. What change would you see on the screen if you adjusted the y-shift control?
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a circuit containing a lamp and a variable resistor.
Fig. 11.1
The circuit does not work. The lamp does not light and altering the setting on the
variable resistor makes no difference.
In the space below, re-draw the diagram, showing a circuit in which the variable resistor
may be used to change the brightness of the lamp. [2]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows two resistors and an ammeter connected in series to a 6 V d.c. supply.
The resistance of the ammeter is so small that it can be ignored.
8Ω
Q
P
+
6V A
–
R
S
4Ω
Fig. 11.2
current = ..................................
(iii) On Fig. 11.2, show a voltmeter connected to measure the potential difference
across the 4 Ω resistor. [1]
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 A rock climber climbs up a rock face, as shown in Fig. 12.1.
safety rope
climber
Fig. 12.1
air resistance
his weight
(b) What other quantity, as well as the force ticked in (a), must be known in order to find the
work done by the climber?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) One climber weighs 1000 N and another weighs 800 N. They both take the same time to
climb the cliff.
(d) When the first climber reaches the top, he has more gravitational potential
energy than he had at the bottom.
(i) What form of energy, stored in his body, was used to give him this extra
(iii) Other than increasing gravitational potential energy on the way up, how else was
energy in his body used? State one way.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
0625/2/M/J/03
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
PMT
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner’s
Use
1 The clock on a public building has a bell that strikes each hour so that people who cannot
see the clock can know what hour of the day it is.
At precisely 6 o’clock, the clock starts to strike. It strikes 6 times.
At the first strike of the bell, a man’s wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.1.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.1
When the bell strikes for the sixth time, the wrist-watch is as shown in Fig. 1.2.
12
11 1
10 2
9 3
8 4
7 5
6
Fig. 1.2
(a) Calculate the time interval between the 1st strike and the 6th strike.
(b) Calculate the time interval between one strike and the next.
3 For
Examiner’s
Use
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hinged rail in a fence. The rail has to be lifted vertically in order to let people
through.
hinge rail
Fig. 2.1
(a) On Fig. 2.1, draw an arrow to show the position and direction of the smallest force that
would be needed to begin to raise the rail. [3]
(b) What is the correct Physics term for the turning effect of a force?
force
work
moment
movement [1]
(c) Suggest one way the designer of the fence could have reduced the force needed to lift
the rail.
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[1]
4 For
Examiner’s
Use
3 Fig. 3.1 shows the speed-time graph of part of a short journey made by a cyclist.
25
speed P Q
20
m/s
15
10
5
R
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
time/s
Fig. 3.1
(a) Which part of Fig. 3.1 shows when the cyclist is travelling at constant speed?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) State what is happening during the rest of the journey shown in Fig. 3.1.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
5 For
Examiner’s
Use
(iii) Calculate the total distance travelled.
6 For
Examiner’s
Use
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a person pulling a loaded barrow along a path from A to B at a steady
speed.
A B
Fig. 4.1
State the two quantities you need to know in order to be able to calculate the work done
by the person.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ..................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Another person pulls an identical barrow and load from A to B, but this person pulls
much harder than the person in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) (i) State which person has the greater power between A and B.
...................................................................................................................................
reason 1 ....................................................................................................................
reason 2 ...................................................................................................................
[3]
7 For
Examiner’s
Use
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a shallow dish containing a liquid that evaporates easily. The bulb of a
thermometer is held in the liquid. A jet of air is blown over the surface of the liquid, so that the
liquid evaporates rapidly.
thermometer
jet of air
liquid
shallow dish
Fig. 5.1
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Explain your answer to (a) in terms of the behaviour of the molecules of the liquid.
..........................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State one example in everyday life where the effect demonstrated by this experiment
occurs.
......................................................................................................................................[1]
8 For
Examiner’s
Use
6 (a) When a certain amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated aluminium, the temperature
of the aluminium rises by 1 °C.
1 kg aluminium inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to aluminium
Fig. 6.1
In what form does the aluminium store the energy that has been supplied?
......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The same amount of heat is supplied to 1 kg of insulated copper, as shown in Fig. 6.2.
1 kg copper inside
a layer of insulation
heat supplied
to copper
Fig. 6.2
The temperature rise of the 1 kg copper block is greater than the temperature rise of the
1 kg aluminium block in (a).
..........................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................[2]
9 For
Examiner’s
Use
7 Boy A throws a large stone into a large still pond, as illustrated in Fig. 7.1.
B
A
Fig. 7.1
Fig. 7.1
(a) Girl B hears the ‘plop’ sound of the stone entering the water a very short time after she
sees the splash, but it is many seconds before the water wave reaches the edge of the
pond where she is sitting.
Use this information to decide which wave travels fastest and which travels slowest.
Write ‘fastest’ in one box and ‘slowest’ in another box. Leave one box empty.
sound wave
light wave
(b) In the boxes below, state whether each type of wave is a transverse or a longitudinal
wave.
sound wave
light wave
(c) In the boxes below, put a tick alongside any of the types of wave that do not need a
substance in which to travel.
sound wave
light wave
10 For
Examiner’s
Use
8 A, B, C and D are an aluminium bar, an unmagnetised iron bar and two bar magnets. Tests
are performed to find out which bar is which.
Each row of Fig. 8.1 shows what happens when two of the bars are placed end to end.
A B repel
A C attract
B D no effect
Fig. 8.1
Bar A is ........................................................................
Bar B is ........................................................................
Bar C is ........................................................................
11 For
Examiner’s
Use
9 Some pond water becomes contaminated by the release of radioactive waste.
The radioactivity of a sample of the contaminated water is tested every week for 5 weeks.
The results are shown in the table below.
time/weeks 0 1 2 3 4 5
activity
800 440 240 130 70 40
count/s
activity 800
count/s
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
time/weeks
Fig. 9.1
(c) Use your graph to find the half-life of the radioactive material in the sample. Show clearly
on the graph how you obtained your answer.
(d) If the sample of contaminated water used in the test had been smaller, state how this
would have affected, if at all,
12 For
Examiner’s
Use
10 (a) One coil of a transformer is connected to a toy train set. The other coil is connected to a
240 V a.c. mains supply, as shown in Fig. 10.1.
240 V
to
train
set
Fig. 10.1
(i) How can you tell from Fig. 10.1 that the transformer is a step-down transformer?
...................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) 1. The voltage of the mains supply is reduced. What happens to the voltage
supplied to the train set? Tick one box.
increases
decreases
stays the same
2. An attempt is made to use the train set in a country where the mains supply is
110 V. Suggest one difference that might be noticed in the way the toy train
operates.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2004 0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
13 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electromagnetic relay being used to operate an electric motor.
pivoted iron
armature power supply
for motor
M motor
switch
contacts
relay core
Fig. 10.2
Below are sentences that describe stages of the process by which the circuit works.
Put the sentences so that the stages are in the correct order. Put the appropriate letters
in the boxes below. One box has been filled in as an example.
Stage 1 is sentence C
Stage 2 is sentence
Stage 3 is sentence
Stage 4 is sentence
14 For
Examiner’s
Use
11 (a) The list below contains the names of five different components that might be found in an
electric circuit.
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A lamp shines with full brightness when connected to a 12 V battery, as shown in
Fig. 11.1.
12 V
0.50 A
lamp
Fig. 11.1
(i) 1. Write down the equation that links resistance with p.d. and current.
2. The current in the lamp is 0.50 A. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
15 For
Examiner’s
Use
(ii) A resistor is now connected in series with the lamp, as shown in Fig. 11.2.
12 V
lamp
Fig. 11.2
1. State what happens to the current in the lamp when the resistor is added.
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................
[3]
16 For
Examiner’s
Use
12 (a) A man looks at his reflection in a vertical mirror. This is shown from the side in Fig. 12.1.
mirror
Fig. 12.1
(i) On Fig. 12.1, accurately mark with a clear dot labelled B where the image of the tip
A of the man’s beard will be.
(ii) On Fig. 12.1, accurately draw a ray from the tip of the man’s beard that reflects from
the mirror and goes into his eye. You may use faint construction lines if you wish.
Use arrows to show the direction of the ray.
(iii) The man can see the image, but it cannot be formed on a screen. What name is
given to this type of image?
...................................................................................................................................
(iv) Write down the equation that links the angles of incidence and reflection that the
ray makes with the mirror.
[7]
17 For
Examiner’s
Use
(b) A girl looks into a bathroom mirror to brush her hair. Fig. 12.2 shows what she sees in
the mirror.
reflection seen
in mirror
Fig. 12.2
(i) In which hand is she holding the brush? Tick one box.
left hand
right hand
(ii) She has a spot on her skin just below her left eye.
Mark clearly on Fig. 12.2 where this will appear on the reflection.
[2]
18
BLANK PAGE
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
19
BLANK PAGE
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
20
BLANK PAGE
Copyright Acknowledgements:
Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights we have unwittingly
infringed.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.
0625/02 M/J/04
PMT
0625 PHYSICS
0625/02 Paper 2 (Theory), maximum mark 80
This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and students, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were initially instructed to award marks. It does
not indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking
began. Any substantial changes to the mark scheme that arose from these discussions will be
recorded in the published Report on the Examination.
All Examiners are instructed that alternative correct answers and unexpected approaches in
candidates’ scripts must be given marks that fairly reflect the relevant knowledge and skills
demonstrated.
Mark schemes must be read in conjunction with the question papers and the Report on the
Examination.
• CIE will not enter into discussion or correspondence in connection with these mark schemes.
CIE is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2005 question papers for most IGCSE and GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level syllabuses and some Ordinary Level syllabuses.
PMT
Grade thresholds taken for Syllabus 0625 (Physics) in the June 2005 examination.
The threshold (minimum mark) for B is set halfway between those for Grades A and C.
The threshold (minimum mark) for D is set halfway between those for Grades C and E.
The threshold (minimum mark) for G is set as many marks below the F threshold as the
E threshold is above it.
Grade A* does not exist at the level of an individual component.
PMT
June 2005
IGCSE
MARK SCHEME
MAXIMUM MARK: 80
SYLLABUS/COMPONENT: 0625/02
PHYSICS
Theory
PMT
B marks are independent markS, which do not depend on any other marks. For
a B mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must actually be
seen in the candidate’s answer.
M marks are method marks upon which accuracy marks (A marks) later depend.
For an M mark to be scored, the point to which it refers must be seen in
a candidate’s answer. If a candidate fails to score a particular M mark,
then none of the dependent A marks can be scored.
C marks are compensatory method marks which can be scored even if the
points to which they refer are not written down by the candidate,
provided subsequent working gives evidence that they must have
known it. e.g. if an equation carries a C mark and the candidate does
not write down the actual equation but does correct working which
shows he knew the equation, then the C mark is scored.
A marks are accuracy or answer marks which either depend on an M mark, or
allow a C mark to be scored.
c.a.o. means ‘correct answer only’
e.c.f. means ‘error carried forward’. This indicates that if a candidate has
made an earlier mistake and has carried the incorrect value forward to
subsequent stages of working, the candidate may be given marks
indicated by e.c.f. provided the subsequent working is correct, bearing
in mind the earlier mistake. This prevents a candidate being penalised
more than once for a particular mistake, but only applies to marks
annotated ‘e.c.f.’
e.e.o.o means ‘each error or omission’
brackets () Around words or units in the mark scheme are intended to indicate
wording used to clarify the mark scheme, but the marks do not depend
on seeing the words or units in brackets.
e.g. 10 (J) means that the mark is scored for 10, regardless of the unit
given.
underlining Indicates that this must be seen in the answer offered, or something
very similar.
un.pen. means ‘unit penalty’. An otherwise correct answer will have one mark
deducted if the unit is wrong or missing. This only applies where
specifically stated in the mark scheme. Elsewhere, incorrect or missing
units are condoned.
OR/or Indicates alternative answers, any one of which is satisfactory for
scoring the marks.
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen in the spaces provided on the Question Paper.
You may use a soft pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.
Do not use staples, paper clips, highlighters, glue or correction fluid.
2 For
Examiner's
Use
1 (a) A measuring cylinder contains 100 cm3 of water. 20 cm3 of the water is poured into a
beaker.
On Fig. 1.1, mark the level of the water left in the cylinder. [2]
cm3
100
50
Fig. 1.1
(b) A rule, calibrated in cm, is placed alongside the measuring cylinder, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
cm3
100
15
10
50
Fig. 1.2
(i) What is the length of the measuring cylinder, from zero up to the 100 cm3 mark?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) The volume of a cylinder is found using the equation
volume = cross-sectional area × length.
Calculate the cross-sectional area of the measuring cylinder.
3 For
Examiner's
Use
2 A boat sails along a river, stopping at various places along the way. Fig. 2.1 shows how the
speed of the boat changes during the day, starting at 0900 hrs and reaching its final
destination at 2100 hrs.
speed
0
0900 1100 1300 1500 1700 1900 2100
time of day (24 -hour clock)
Fig. 2.1
(b) State the time of day at which the boat reaches its greatest speed.
(c) State the longest time for which the boat was stationary at one place.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) how the average speed for the whole journey could be found.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05 [Turn over
PMT
4 For
Examiner's
Use
3 (a) A light vertical triangular piece of rigid plastic PQR is pivoted at corner P.
Q
5N
pivot
Fig. 3.1
..........................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) On another occasion, two horizontal 5 N forces act on the piece of plastic, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
Q
5N
pivot
5N
R
Fig. 3.2
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On Fig. 3.2, mark the force that the pivot exerts on the piece of plastic. Show the
direction of the force by means of an arrow and write the magnitude of the force
next to the arrow. [4]
5 For
Examiner's
Use
4 Fig. 4.1 represents a hydroelectric system for generating electricity.
reservoir
power
station water flows down
Fig. 4.1
(a) What sort of energy, possessed by the water in the reservoir, is the main source of
energy for this system?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) When the water flows down the pipe, it is moving. What sort of energy does it possess
because of this movement?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The water makes the turbines in the power station rotate. What sort of energy do the
turbines possess because of their rotation?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
(e) None of the energy transfer processes is perfect. In what form is most of the wasted
energy released?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
6 For
Examiner's
Use
5 (a) On a hot day, a child drinks all the water in a plastic bottle. She then screws the cap
back tightly on the bottle, so that the bottle contains only air.
air
Fig. 5.1
She throws the bottle into a waste basket, where the Sun shines on it.
After a while in the Sun’s rays, the air in the bottle is much hotter than before.
(i) State what has happened to the pressure of the air in the bottle.
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the behaviour of the air molecules, explain your answer to (a)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[5]
7 For
Examiner's
Use
(b) Also in the waste basket is a broken glass bottle containing a small quantity of water, as
shown in Fig. 5.2.
water
Fig. 5.2
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) In terms of the effect of the Sun’s rays on the water molecules, explain your answer
to (b)(i).
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[4]
8 For
Examiner's
Use
6 The table below shows the potential difference (p.d.) needed at different times during a day
to cause a current of 0.03 A in a particular thermistor.
(a) Calculate the two values missing from the table. You may use the space below for your
working. Write your answers in the table.
[3]
600
resistance /
400
200
0
0600 0900 1200 1500 1800 2100
time of day
Fig. 6.1
[2]
(c) (i) Draw a smooth curve through your points.
(ii) Why do we draw a smooth curve rather than a series of straight lines joining the
points?
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
9 For
Examiner's
Use
(d) The thermistor is a circuit component with a resistance that decreases as the temperature
increases.
(i) From your graph, estimate the time of day when the temperature was greatest.
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
10 For
Examiner's
Use
7 Fig. 7.1 shows the various regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.
radio visible
Fig. 7.1
(a) In the boxes provided, write the names of the other regions. [4]
(b) Only one of the following types of wave is not an electromagnetic wave.
microwave
radar
sound [1]
11 For
Examiner's
Use
8 An inventor is trying to make a device to enable him to see objects behind him. He cuts a
square box in half diagonally and sticks two plane mirrors on the inside of the box.
mirror
box cut
in half
mirror
Fig. 8.1
90°
Fig. 8.2
Fig. 8.2 shows parallel rays from two different points on a distant object behind the man.
(a) Carefully continue the two rays until they reach the place where the inventor’s head will
be. [3]
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2005 0625/02/M/J/05 [Turn over
PMT
12 For
Examiner's
Use
9 The speed of sound in air is 332 m/s. A man stands 249 m from a large flat wall, as shown in
Fig. 9.1, and claps his hands once.
woman man
249 m 249 m
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the interval between the time when the man claps his hands and the time
when he hears the echo from the wall.
(b) A woman is standing 249 m further away from the wall than the man. She hears the
clap twice, once directly and once after reflection from the wall.
How long after the man claps does she hear these two sounds? Tick two boxes.
0.75 s
1.50 s
2.25 s
3.00 s [2]
13 For
Examiner's
Use
10 (a) (i) What name do we give to the type of material that allows electrical charges to pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
(iii) What must be done to this type of material in order to make electrical charges pass
through it?
..................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) (i) What name do we give to the type of material that does not allow electrical
charges to pass through it?
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) Give an example of such a material.
..................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) Which of the two types of material in (a)(i) and (b)(i) may be held in the hand and
charged by friction (e.g. by rubbing with a soft cloth)?
.................................................................................................................................... [1]
14 For
Examiner's
Use
11 The circuit in Fig. 11.1 is connected up.
2Ω
resistance wire
Fig. 11.1
(a) How does the current in the resistance wire compare with the current in the 2
resistor? Tick one box.
(b) A voltmeter connected across the resistance wire shows the same reading as a
voltmeter connected across the 2 resistor.
........................................ [1]
(c) Calculate the combined resistance of the wire and the resistor.
(d) The wire and resistor are disconnected and then reconnected in parallel, as shown in
Fig. 11.2.
A
resistance wire
2Ω
Fig. 11.2
15 For
Examiner's
Use
(i) What is the combined resistance of the wire and resistor in Fig.11.2? Tick one box.
zero
1
2
3
(ii) The ammeter in Fig. 11.1 reads 0.3 A. What is the reading on the ammeter in
Fig. 11.2? Tick one box.
zero
0.3 A
(e) Walls in buildings sometimes develop cracks. The width of a crack can be monitored by
measuring the resistance of a thin wire stretched across the crack and firmly fixed on
either side of the crack, as illustrated in Fig. 11.3.
thin wire
fixing pin
fixing pin
crack
Fig. 11.3
16 For
Examiner's
Use
12 (a) Complete the following table about the particles in an atom. The first row has been filled
in as an example.
neutron
electron
[6]
..................................................................................................................................
(ii) On the same scale as indicated by the table, state
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of
the University of Cambridge.